1.. SPDX-License-Identifier: CC-BY-SA-2.0-UK
2
3******************
4Variables Glossary
5******************
6
7This chapter lists common variables used in the OpenEmbedded build
8system and gives an overview of their function and contents.
9
10:term:`A <ABIEXTENSION>` :term:`B` :term:`C <CACHE>`
11:term:`D` :term:`E <EFI_PROVIDER>` :term:`F <FEATURE_PACKAGES>`
12:term:`G <GCCPIE>` :term:`H <HOMEPAGE>` :term:`I <ICECC_DISABLED>`
13:term:`K <KARCH>` :term:`L <LABELS>` :term:`M <MACHINE>`
14:term:`N <NATIVELSBSTRING>` :term:`O <OBJCOPY>` :term:`P`
15:term:`R <RANLIB>` :term:`S` :term:`T`
16:term:`U <UBOOT_CONFIG>` :term:`V <VOLATILE_LOG_DIR>`
17:term:`W <WARN_QA>` :term:`X <XSERVER>`
18
19.. glossary::
20
21   :term:`ABIEXTENSION`
22      Extension to the Application Binary Interface (ABI) field of the GNU
23      canonical architecture name (e.g. "eabi").
24
25      ABI extensions are set in the machine include files. For example, the
26      ``meta/conf/machine/include/arm/arch-arm.inc`` file sets the
27      following extension:
28      ::
29
30         ABIEXTENSION = "eabi"
31
32   :term:`ALLOW_EMPTY`
33      Specifies whether to produce an output package even if it is empty.
34      By default, BitBake does not produce empty packages. This default
35      behavior can cause issues when there is an
36      :term:`RDEPENDS` or some other hard runtime
37      requirement on the existence of the package.
38
39      Like all package-controlling variables, you must always use them in
40      conjunction with a package name override, as in:
41      ::
42
43         ALLOW_EMPTY_${PN} = "1"
44         ALLOW_EMPTY_${PN}-dev = "1"
45         ALLOW_EMPTY_${PN}-staticdev = "1"
46
47   :term:`ALTERNATIVE`
48      Lists commands in a package that need an alternative binary naming
49      scheme. Sometimes the same command is provided in multiple packages.
50      When this occurs, the OpenEmbedded build system needs to use the
51      alternatives system to create a different binary naming scheme so the
52      commands can co-exist.
53
54      To use the variable, list out the package's commands that also exist
55      as part of another package. For example, if the ``busybox`` package
56      has four commands that also exist as part of another package, you
57      identify them as follows:
58      ::
59
60         ALTERNATIVE_busybox = "sh sed test bracket"
61
62      For more information on the alternatives system, see the
63      ":ref:`update-alternatives.bbclass <ref-classes-update-alternatives>`"
64      section.
65
66   :term:`ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME`
67      Used by the alternatives system to map duplicated commands to actual
68      locations. For example, if the ``bracket`` command provided by the
69      ``busybox`` package is duplicated through another package, you must
70      use the ``ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME`` variable to specify the actual
71      location:
72      ::
73
74         ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME[bracket] = "/usr/bin/["
75
76      In this example, the binary for the ``bracket`` command (i.e. ``[``)
77      from the ``busybox`` package resides in ``/usr/bin/``.
78
79      .. note::
80
81         If ``ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME`` is not defined, it defaults to ``${bindir}/name``.
82
83      For more information on the alternatives system, see the
84      ":ref:`update-alternatives.bbclass <ref-classes-update-alternatives>`"
85      section.
86
87   :term:`ALTERNATIVE_PRIORITY`
88      Used by the alternatives system to create default priorities for
89      duplicated commands. You can use the variable to create a single
90      default regardless of the command name or package, a default for
91      specific duplicated commands regardless of the package, or a default
92      for specific commands tied to particular packages. Here are the
93      available syntax forms:
94      ::
95
96         ALTERNATIVE_PRIORITY = "priority"
97         ALTERNATIVE_PRIORITY[name] = "priority"
98         ALTERNATIVE_PRIORITY_pkg[name] = "priority"
99
100      For more information on the alternatives system, see the
101      ":ref:`update-alternatives.bbclass <ref-classes-update-alternatives>`"
102      section.
103
104   :term:`ALTERNATIVE_TARGET`
105      Used by the alternatives system to create default link locations for
106      duplicated commands. You can use the variable to create a single
107      default location for all duplicated commands regardless of the
108      command name or package, a default for specific duplicated commands
109      regardless of the package, or a default for specific commands tied to
110      particular packages. Here are the available syntax forms:
111      ::
112
113         ALTERNATIVE_TARGET = "target"
114         ALTERNATIVE_TARGET[name] = "target"
115         ALTERNATIVE_TARGET_pkg[name] = "target"
116
117      .. note::
118
119         If ``ALTERNATIVE_TARGET`` is not defined, it inherits the value
120         from the :term:`ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME` variable.
121
122         If ``ALTERNATIVE_LINK_NAME`` and ``ALTERNATIVE_TARGET`` are the
123         same, the target for ``ALTERNATIVE_TARGET`` has "``.{BPN}``"
124         appended to it.
125
126         Finally, if the file referenced has not been renamed, the
127         alternatives system will rename it to avoid the need to rename
128         alternative files in the :ref:`ref-tasks-install`
129         task while retaining support for the command if necessary.
130
131      For more information on the alternatives system, see the
132      ":ref:`update-alternatives.bbclass <ref-classes-update-alternatives>`"
133      section.
134
135   :term:`ANY_OF_DISTRO_FEATURES`
136      When inheriting the
137      :ref:`features_check <ref-classes-features_check>`
138      class, this variable identifies a list of distribution features where
139      at least one must be enabled in the current configuration in order
140      for the OpenEmbedded build system to build the recipe. In other words,
141      if none of the features listed in ``ANY_OF_DISTRO_FEATURES``
142      appear in ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` within the current configuration, then
143      the recipe will be skipped, and if the build system attempts to build
144      the recipe then an error will be triggered.
145
146
147   :term:`APPEND`
148      An override list of append strings for each target specified with
149      :term:`LABELS`.
150
151      See the :ref:`grub-efi <ref-classes-grub-efi>` class for more
152      information on how this variable is used.
153
154   :term:`AR`
155      The minimal command and arguments used to run ``ar``.
156
157   :term:`ARCHIVER_MODE`
158      When used with the :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class,
159      determines the type of information used to create a released archive.
160      You can use this variable to create archives of patched source,
161      original source, configured source, and so forth by employing the
162      following variable flags (varflags):
163      ::
164
165         ARCHIVER_MODE[src] = "original"                   # Uses original (unpacked) source files.
166         ARCHIVER_MODE[src] = "patched"                    # Uses patched source files. This is the default.
167         ARCHIVER_MODE[src] = "configured"                 # Uses configured source files.
168         ARCHIVER_MODE[diff] = "1"                         # Uses patches between do_unpack and do_patch.
169         ARCHIVER_MODE[diff-exclude] ?= "file file ..."    # Lists files and directories to exclude from diff.
170         ARCHIVER_MODE[dumpdata] = "1"                     # Uses environment data.
171         ARCHIVER_MODE[recipe] = "1"                       # Uses recipe and include files.
172         ARCHIVER_MODE[srpm] = "1"                         # Uses RPM package files.
173
174      For information on how the variable works, see the
175      ``meta/classes/archiver.bbclass`` file in the :term:`Source Directory`.
176
177   :term:`AS`
178      Minimal command and arguments needed to run the assembler.
179
180   :term:`ASSUME_PROVIDED`
181      Lists recipe names (:term:`PN` values) BitBake does not
182      attempt to build. Instead, BitBake assumes these recipes have already
183      been built.
184
185      In OpenEmbedded-Core, ``ASSUME_PROVIDED`` mostly specifies native
186      tools that should not be built. An example is ``git-native``, which
187      when specified, allows for the Git binary from the host to be used
188      rather than building ``git-native``.
189
190   :term:`ASSUME_SHLIBS`
191      Provides additional ``shlibs`` provider mapping information, which
192      adds to or overwrites the information provided automatically by the
193      system. Separate multiple entries using spaces.
194
195      As an example, use the following form to add an ``shlib`` provider of
196      shlibname in packagename with the optional version:
197      ::
198
199         shlibname:packagename[_version]
200
201      Here is an example that adds a shared library named ``libEGL.so.1``
202      as being provided by the ``libegl-implementation`` package:
203      ::
204
205         ASSUME_SHLIBS = "libEGL.so.1:libegl-implementation"
206
207   :term:`AUTHOR`
208      The email address used to contact the original author or authors in
209      order to send patches and forward bugs.
210
211   :term:`AUTO_LIBNAME_PKGS`
212      When the :ref:`debian <ref-classes-debian>` class is inherited,
213      which is the default behavior, ``AUTO_LIBNAME_PKGS`` specifies which
214      packages should be checked for libraries and renamed according to
215      Debian library package naming.
216
217      The default value is "${PACKAGES}", which causes the debian class to
218      act on all packages that are explicitly generated by the recipe.
219
220   :term:`AUTO_SYSLINUXMENU`
221      Enables creating an automatic menu for the syslinux bootloader. You
222      must set this variable in your recipe. The
223      :ref:`syslinux <ref-classes-syslinux>` class checks this variable.
224
225   :term:`AUTOREV`
226      When ``SRCREV`` is set to the value of this variable, it specifies to
227      use the latest source revision in the repository. Here is an example:
228      ::
229
230         SRCREV = "${AUTOREV}"
231
232      If you use the previous statement to retrieve the latest version of
233      software, you need to be sure :term:`PV` contains
234      ``${``\ :term:`SRCPV`\ ``}``. For example, suppose you
235      have a kernel recipe that inherits the
236      :ref:`kernel <ref-classes-kernel>` class and you use the previous
237      statement. In this example, ``${SRCPV}`` does not automatically get
238      into ``PV``. Consequently, you need to change ``PV`` in your recipe
239      so that it does contain ``${SRCPV}``.
240
241      For more information see the
242      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:automatically incrementing a package version number`"
243      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
244
245   :term:`AVAILABLE_LICENSES`
246      List of licenses found in the directories specified by
247      :term:`COMMON_LICENSE_DIR` and
248      :term:`LICENSE_PATH`.
249
250      .. note::
251
252         It is assumed that all changes to ``COMMON_LICENSE_DIR`` and
253         ``LICENSE_PATH`` have been done before ``AVAILABLE_LICENSES``
254         is defined (in :ref:`ref-classes-license`).
255
256   :term:`AVAILTUNES`
257      The list of defined CPU and Application Binary Interface (ABI)
258      tunings (i.e. "tunes") available for use by the OpenEmbedded build
259      system.
260
261      The list simply presents the tunes that are available. Not all tunes
262      may be compatible with a particular machine configuration, or with
263      each other in a
264      :ref:`Multilib <dev-manual/common-tasks:combining multiple versions of library files into one image>`
265      configuration.
266
267      To add a tune to the list, be sure to append it with spaces using the
268      "+=" BitBake operator. Do not simply replace the list by using the
269      "=" operator. See the
270      ":ref:`Basic Syntax <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:basic syntax>`" section in the BitBake
271      User Manual for more information.
272
273   :term:`B`
274      The directory within the :term:`Build Directory` in
275      which the OpenEmbedded build system places generated objects during a
276      recipe's build process. By default, this directory is the same as the
277      :term:`S` directory, which is defined as:
278      ::
279
280         S = "${WORKDIR}/${BP}"
281
282      You can separate the (``S``) directory and the directory pointed to
283      by the ``B`` variable. Most Autotools-based recipes support
284      separating these directories. The build system defaults to using
285      separate directories for ``gcc`` and some kernel recipes.
286
287   :term:`BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS`
288      Lists "recommended-only" packages to not install. Recommended-only
289      packages are packages installed only through the
290      :term:`RRECOMMENDS` variable. You can prevent any
291      of these "recommended" packages from being installed by listing them
292      with the ``BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS`` variable:
293      ::
294
295         BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS = "package_name package_name package_name ..."
296
297      You can set this variable globally in your ``local.conf`` file or you
298      can attach it to a specific image recipe by using the recipe name
299      override:
300      ::
301
302         BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS_pn-target_image = "package_name"
303
304      It is important to realize that if you choose to not install packages
305      using this variable and some other packages are dependent on them
306      (i.e. listed in a recipe's :term:`RDEPENDS`
307      variable), the OpenEmbedded build system ignores your request and
308      will install the packages to avoid dependency errors.
309
310      Support for this variable exists only when using the IPK and RPM
311      packaging backend. Support does not exist for DEB.
312
313      See the :term:`NO_RECOMMENDATIONS` and the
314      :term:`PACKAGE_EXCLUDE` variables for related
315      information.
316
317   :term:`BASE_LIB`
318      The library directory name for the CPU or Application Binary
319      Interface (ABI) tune. The ``BASE_LIB`` applies only in the Multilib
320      context. See the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:combining multiple versions of library files into one image`"
321      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for information
322      on Multilib.
323
324      The ``BASE_LIB`` variable is defined in the machine include files in
325      the :term:`Source Directory`. If Multilib is not
326      being used, the value defaults to "lib".
327
328   :term:`BASE_WORKDIR`
329      Points to the base of the work directory for all recipes. The default
330      value is "${TMPDIR}/work".
331
332   :term:`BB_ALLOWED_NETWORKS`
333      Specifies a space-delimited list of hosts that the fetcher is allowed
334      to use to obtain the required source code. Following are
335      considerations surrounding this variable:
336
337      -  This host list is only used if ``BB_NO_NETWORK`` is either not set
338         or set to "0".
339
340      -  Limited support for wildcard matching against the beginning of
341         host names exists. For example, the following setting matches
342         ``git.gnu.org``, ``ftp.gnu.org``, and ``foo.git.gnu.org``.
343         ::
344
345            BB_ALLOWED_NETWORKS = "*.gnu.org"
346
347         .. note::
348
349            The use of the "``*``" character only works at the beginning of
350            a host name and it must be isolated from the remainder of the
351            host name. You cannot use the wildcard character in any other
352            location of the name or combined with the front part of the
353            name.
354
355            For example, ``*.foo.bar`` is supported, while ``*aa.foo.bar``
356            is not.
357
358      -  Mirrors not in the host list are skipped and logged in debug.
359
360      -  Attempts to access networks not in the host list cause a failure.
361
362      Using ``BB_ALLOWED_NETWORKS`` in conjunction with
363      :term:`PREMIRRORS` is very useful. Adding the host
364      you want to use to ``PREMIRRORS`` results in the source code being
365      fetched from an allowed location and avoids raising an error when a
366      host that is not allowed is in a :term:`SRC_URI`
367      statement. This is because the fetcher does not attempt to use the
368      host listed in ``SRC_URI`` after a successful fetch from the
369      ``PREMIRRORS`` occurs.
370
371   :term:`BB_DANGLINGAPPENDS_WARNONLY`
372      Defines how BitBake handles situations where an append file
373      (``.bbappend``) has no corresponding recipe file (``.bb``). This
374      condition often occurs when layers get out of sync (e.g. ``oe-core``
375      bumps a recipe version and the old recipe no longer exists and the
376      other layer has not been updated to the new version of the recipe
377      yet).
378
379      The default fatal behavior is safest because it is the sane reaction
380      given something is out of sync. It is important to realize when your
381      changes are no longer being applied.
382
383      You can change the default behavior by setting this variable to "1",
384      "yes", or "true" in your ``local.conf`` file, which is located in the
385      :term:`Build Directory`: Here is an example:
386      ::
387
388         BB_DANGLINGAPPENDS_WARNONLY = "1"
389
390   :term:`BB_DISKMON_DIRS`
391      Monitors disk space and available inodes during the build and allows
392      you to control the build based on these parameters.
393
394      Disk space monitoring is disabled by default. To enable monitoring,
395      add the ``BB_DISKMON_DIRS`` variable to your ``conf/local.conf`` file
396      found in the :term:`Build Directory`. Use the
397      following form:
398
399      .. code-block:: none
400
401         BB_DISKMON_DIRS = "action,dir,threshold [...]"
402
403         where:
404
405            action is:
406               ABORT:     Immediately abort the build when
407                          a threshold is broken.
408               STOPTASKS: Stop the build after the currently
409                          executing tasks have finished when
410                          a threshold is broken.
411               WARN:      Issue a warning but continue the
412                          build when a threshold is broken.
413                          Subsequent warnings are issued as
414                          defined by the BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL
415                          variable, which must be defined in
416                          the conf/local.conf file.
417
418            dir is:
419               Any directory you choose. You can specify one or
420               more directories to monitor by separating the
421               groupings with a space.  If two directories are
422               on the same device, only the first directory
423               is monitored.
424
425            threshold is:
426               Either the minimum available disk space,
427               the minimum number of free inodes, or
428               both.  You must specify at least one.  To
429               omit one or the other, simply omit the value.
430               Specify the threshold using G, M, K for Gbytes,
431               Mbytes, and Kbytes, respectively. If you do
432               not specify G, M, or K, Kbytes is assumed by
433               default.  Do not use GB, MB, or KB.
434
435      Here are some examples:
436      ::
437
438         BB_DISKMON_DIRS = "ABORT,${TMPDIR},1G,100K WARN,${SSTATE_DIR},1G,100K"
439         BB_DISKMON_DIRS = "STOPTASKS,${TMPDIR},1G"
440         BB_DISKMON_DIRS = "ABORT,${TMPDIR},,100K"
441
442      The first example works only if you also provide the
443      :term:`BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL`
444      variable in the ``conf/local.conf``. This example causes the build
445      system to immediately abort when either the disk space in
446      ``${TMPDIR}`` drops below 1 Gbyte or the available free inodes drops
447      below 100 Kbytes. Because two directories are provided with the
448      variable, the build system also issue a warning when the disk space
449      in the ``${SSTATE_DIR}`` directory drops below 1 Gbyte or the number
450      of free inodes drops below 100 Kbytes. Subsequent warnings are issued
451      during intervals as defined by the ``BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL``
452      variable.
453
454      The second example stops the build after all currently executing
455      tasks complete when the minimum disk space in the ``${TMPDIR}``
456      directory drops below 1 Gbyte. No disk monitoring occurs for the free
457      inodes in this case.
458
459      The final example immediately aborts the build when the number of
460      free inodes in the ``${TMPDIR}`` directory drops below 100 Kbytes. No
461      disk space monitoring for the directory itself occurs in this case.
462
463   :term:`BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL`
464      Defines the disk space and free inode warning intervals. To set these
465      intervals, define the variable in your ``conf/local.conf`` file in
466      the :term:`Build Directory`.
467
468      If you are going to use the ``BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL`` variable, you
469      must also use the :term:`BB_DISKMON_DIRS`
470      variable and define its action as "WARN". During the build,
471      subsequent warnings are issued each time disk space or number of free
472      inodes further reduces by the respective interval.
473
474      If you do not provide a ``BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL`` variable and you
475      do use ``BB_DISKMON_DIRS`` with the "WARN" action, the disk
476      monitoring interval defaults to the following:
477      ::
478
479         BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL = "50M,5K"
480
481      When specifying the variable in your configuration file, use the
482      following form:
483
484      .. code-block:: none
485
486         BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL = "disk_space_interval,disk_inode_interval"
487
488         where:
489
490            disk_space_interval is:
491               An interval of memory expressed in either
492               G, M, or K for Gbytes, Mbytes, or Kbytes,
493               respectively. You cannot use GB, MB, or KB.
494
495            disk_inode_interval is:
496               An interval of free inodes expressed in either
497               G, M, or K for Gbytes, Mbytes, or Kbytes,
498               respectively. You cannot use GB, MB, or KB.
499
500      Here is an example:
501      ::
502
503         BB_DISKMON_DIRS = "WARN,${SSTATE_DIR},1G,100K"
504         BB_DISKMON_WARNINTERVAL = "50M,5K"
505
506      These variables cause the
507      OpenEmbedded build system to issue subsequent warnings each time the
508      available disk space further reduces by 50 Mbytes or the number of
509      free inodes further reduces by 5 Kbytes in the ``${SSTATE_DIR}``
510      directory. Subsequent warnings based on the interval occur each time
511      a respective interval is reached beyond the initial warning (i.e. 1
512      Gbytes and 100 Kbytes).
513
514   :term:`BB_GENERATE_MIRROR_TARBALLS`
515      Causes tarballs of the source control repositories (e.g. Git
516      repositories), including metadata, to be placed in the
517      :term:`DL_DIR` directory.
518
519      For performance reasons, creating and placing tarballs of these
520      repositories is not the default action by the OpenEmbedded build
521      system.
522      ::
523
524         BB_GENERATE_MIRROR_TARBALLS = "1"
525
526      Set this variable in your
527      ``local.conf`` file in the :term:`Build Directory`.
528
529      Once you have the tarballs containing your source files, you can
530      clean up your ``DL_DIR`` directory by deleting any Git or other
531      source control work directories.
532
533   :term:`BB_NUMBER_THREADS`
534      The maximum number of tasks BitBake should run in parallel at any one
535      time. The OpenEmbedded build system automatically configures this
536      variable to be equal to the number of cores on the build system. For
537      example, a system with a dual core processor that also uses
538      hyper-threading causes the ``BB_NUMBER_THREADS`` variable to default
539      to "4".
540
541      For single socket systems (i.e. one CPU), you should not have to
542      override this variable to gain optimal parallelism during builds.
543      However, if you have very large systems that employ multiple physical
544      CPUs, you might want to make sure the ``BB_NUMBER_THREADS`` variable
545      is not set higher than "20".
546
547      For more information on speeding up builds, see the
548      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:speeding up a build`"
549      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
550
551   :term:`BB_SERVER_TIMEOUT`
552      Specifies the time (in seconds) after which to unload the BitBake
553      server due to inactivity. Set ``BB_SERVER_TIMEOUT`` to determine how
554      long the BitBake server stays resident between invocations.
555
556      For example, the following statement in your ``local.conf`` file
557      instructs the server to be unloaded after 20 seconds of inactivity:
558      ::
559
560         BB_SERVER_TIMEOUT = "20"
561
562      If you want the server to never be unloaded,
563      set ``BB_SERVER_TIMEOUT`` to "-1".
564
565   :term:`BBCLASSEXTEND`
566      Allows you to extend a recipe so that it builds variants of the
567      software. Common variants for recipes exist such as "natives" like
568      ``quilt-native``, which is a copy of Quilt built to run on the build
569      system; "crosses" such as ``gcc-cross``, which is a compiler built to
570      run on the build machine but produces binaries that run on the target
571      :term:`MACHINE`; "nativesdk", which targets the SDK
572      machine instead of ``MACHINE``; and "mulitlibs" in the form
573      "``multilib:``\ multilib_name".
574
575      To build a different variant of the recipe with a minimal amount of
576      code, it usually is as simple as adding the following to your recipe:
577      ::
578
579         BBCLASSEXTEND =+ "native nativesdk"
580         BBCLASSEXTEND =+ "multilib:multilib_name"
581
582      .. note::
583
584         Internally, the ``BBCLASSEXTEND`` mechanism generates recipe
585         variants by rewriting variable values and applying overrides such
586         as ``_class-native``. For example, to generate a native version of
587         a recipe, a :term:`DEPENDS` on "foo" is rewritten
588         to a ``DEPENDS`` on "foo-native".
589
590         Even when using ``BBCLASSEXTEND``, the recipe is only parsed once.
591         Parsing once adds some limitations. For example, it is not
592         possible to include a different file depending on the variant,
593         since ``include`` statements are processed when the recipe is
594         parsed.
595
596   :term:`BBFILE_COLLECTIONS`
597      Lists the names of configured layers. These names are used to find
598      the other ``BBFILE_*`` variables. Typically, each layer will append
599      its name to this variable in its ``conf/layer.conf`` file.
600
601   :term:`BBFILE_PATTERN`
602      Variable that expands to match files from
603      :term:`BBFILES` in a particular layer. This variable
604      is used in the ``conf/layer.conf`` file and must be suffixed with the
605      name of the specific layer (e.g. ``BBFILE_PATTERN_emenlow``).
606
607   :term:`BBFILE_PRIORITY`
608      Assigns the priority for recipe files in each layer.
609
610      This variable is useful in situations where the same recipe appears
611      in more than one layer. Setting this variable allows you to
612      prioritize a layer against other layers that contain the same recipe
613      - effectively letting you control the precedence for the multiple
614      layers. The precedence established through this variable stands
615      regardless of a recipe's version (:term:`PV` variable). For
616      example, a layer that has a recipe with a higher ``PV`` value but for
617      which the ``BBFILE_PRIORITY`` is set to have a lower precedence still
618      has a lower precedence.
619
620      A larger value for the ``BBFILE_PRIORITY`` variable results in a
621      higher precedence. For example, the value 6 has a higher precedence
622      than the value 5. If not specified, the ``BBFILE_PRIORITY`` variable
623      is set based on layer dependencies (see the ``LAYERDEPENDS`` variable
624      for more information. The default priority, if unspecified for a
625      layer with no dependencies, is the lowest defined priority + 1 (or 1
626      if no priorities are defined).
627
628      .. tip::
629
630         You can use the command ``bitbake-layers show-layers``
631         to list all configured layers along with their priorities.
632
633   :term:`BBFILES`
634      A space-separated list of recipe files BitBake uses to build
635      software.
636
637      When specifying recipe files, you can pattern match using Python's
638      `glob <https://docs.python.org/3/library/glob.html>`_ syntax.
639      For details on the syntax, see the documentation by following the
640      previous link.
641
642   :term:`BBFILES_DYNAMIC`
643      Activates content when identified layers are present. You identify
644      the layers by the collections that the layers define.
645
646      Use the ``BBFILES_DYNAMIC`` variable to avoid ``.bbappend`` files
647      whose corresponding ``.bb`` file is in a layer that attempts to
648      modify other layers through ``.bbappend`` but does not want to
649      introduce a hard dependency on those other layers.
650
651      Use the following form for ``BBFILES_DYNAMIC``:
652      collection_name:filename_pattern The following example identifies two
653      collection names and two filename patterns:
654      ::
655
656         BBFILES_DYNAMIC += " \
657            clang-layer:${LAYERDIR}/bbappends/meta-clang/*/*/*.bbappend \
658            core:${LAYERDIR}/bbappends/openembedded-core/meta/*/*/*.bbappend \
659            "
660
661      This next example shows an error message that occurs because invalid
662      entries are found, which cause parsing to abort:
663
664      .. code-block:: none
665
666         ERROR: BBFILES_DYNAMIC entries must be of the form <collection name>:<filename pattern>, not:
667             /work/my-layer/bbappends/meta-security-isafw/*/*/*.bbappend
668             /work/my-layer/bbappends/openembedded-core/meta/*/*/*.bbappend
669
670   :term:`BBINCLUDELOGS`
671      Variable that controls how BitBake displays logs on build failure.
672
673   :term:`BBINCLUDELOGS_LINES`
674      If :term:`BBINCLUDELOGS` is set, specifies the
675      maximum number of lines from the task log file to print when
676      reporting a failed task. If you do not set ``BBINCLUDELOGS_LINES``,
677      the entire log is printed.
678
679   :term:`BBLAYERS`
680      Lists the layers to enable during the build. This variable is defined
681      in the ``bblayers.conf`` configuration file in the :term:`Build Directory`.
682      Here is an example:
683      ::
684
685         BBLAYERS = " \
686             /home/scottrif/poky/meta \
687             /home/scottrif/poky/meta-poky \
688             /home/scottrif/poky/meta-yocto-bsp \
689             /home/scottrif/poky/meta-mykernel \
690             "
691
692      This example enables four layers, one of which is a custom,
693      user-defined layer named ``meta-mykernel``.
694
695   :term:`BBMASK`
696      Prevents BitBake from processing recipes and recipe append files.
697
698      You can use the ``BBMASK`` variable to "hide" these ``.bb`` and
699      ``.bbappend`` files. BitBake ignores any recipe or recipe append
700      files that match any of the expressions. It is as if BitBake does not
701      see them at all. Consequently, matching files are not parsed or
702      otherwise used by BitBake.
703
704      The values you provide are passed to Python's regular expression
705      compiler. Consequently, the syntax follows Python's Regular
706      Expression (re) syntax. The expressions are compared against the full
707      paths to the files. For complete syntax information, see Python's
708      documentation at https://docs.python.org/3/library/re.html#regular-expression-syntax.
709
710      The following example uses a complete regular expression to tell
711      BitBake to ignore all recipe and recipe append files in the
712      ``meta-ti/recipes-misc/`` directory:
713      ::
714
715         BBMASK = "meta-ti/recipes-misc/"
716
717      If you want to mask out multiple directories or recipes, you can
718      specify multiple regular expression fragments. This next example
719      masks out multiple directories and individual recipes: ::
720
721         BBMASK += "/meta-ti/recipes-misc/ meta-ti/recipes-ti/packagegroup/"
722         BBMASK += "/meta-oe/recipes-support/"
723         BBMASK += "/meta-foo/.*/openldap"
724         BBMASK += "opencv.*\.bbappend"
725         BBMASK += "lzma"
726
727      .. note::
728
729         When specifying a directory name, use the trailing slash character
730         to ensure you match just that directory name.
731
732   :term:`BBMULTICONFIG`
733      Specifies each additional separate configuration when you are
734      building targets with multiple configurations. Use this variable in
735      your ``conf/local.conf`` configuration file. Specify a
736      multiconfigname for each configuration file you are using. For
737      example, the following line specifies three configuration files:
738      ::
739
740         BBMULTICONFIG = "configA configB configC"
741
742      Each configuration file you
743      use must reside in the :term:`Build Directory`
744      ``conf/multiconfig`` directory (e.g.
745      build_directory\ ``/conf/multiconfig/configA.conf``).
746
747      For information on how to use ``BBMULTICONFIG`` in an environment
748      that supports building targets with multiple configurations, see the
749      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building images for multiple targets using multiple configurations`"
750      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
751
752   :term:`BBPATH`
753      Used by BitBake to locate ``.bbclass`` and configuration files. This
754      variable is analogous to the ``PATH`` variable.
755
756      .. note::
757
758         If you run BitBake from a directory outside of the
759         Build Directory
760         , you must be sure to set
761         BBPATH
762         to point to the Build Directory. Set the variable as you would any
763         environment variable and then run BitBake:
764         ::
765
766                 $ BBPATH = "build_directory"
767                 $ export BBPATH
768                 $ bitbake target
769
770
771   :term:`BBSERVER`
772      If defined in the BitBake environment, ``BBSERVER`` points to the
773      BitBake remote server.
774
775      Use the following format to export the variable to the BitBake
776      environment:
777      ::
778
779         export BBSERVER=localhost:$port
780
781      By default, ``BBSERVER`` also appears in
782      :term:`bitbake:BB_HASHBASE_WHITELIST`.
783      Consequently, ``BBSERVER`` is excluded from checksum and dependency
784      data.
785
786   :term:`BINCONFIG`
787      When inheriting the
788      :ref:`binconfig-disabled <ref-classes-binconfig-disabled>` class,
789      this variable specifies binary configuration scripts to disable in
790      favor of using ``pkg-config`` to query the information. The
791      ``binconfig-disabled`` class will modify the specified scripts to
792      return an error so that calls to them can be easily found and
793      replaced.
794
795      To add multiple scripts, separate them by spaces. Here is an example
796      from the ``libpng`` recipe:
797      ::
798
799         BINCONFIG = "${bindir}/libpng-config ${bindir}/libpng16-config"
800
801   :term:`BINCONFIG_GLOB`
802      When inheriting the :ref:`binconfig <ref-classes-binconfig>` class,
803      this variable specifies a wildcard for configuration scripts that
804      need editing. The scripts are edited to correct any paths that have
805      been set up during compilation so that they are correct for use when
806      installed into the sysroot and called by the build processes of other
807      recipes.
808
809      .. note::
810
811         The ``BINCONFIG_GLOB`` variable uses
812         `shell globbing <https://tldp.org/LDP/abs/html/globbingref.html>`__,
813         which is recognition and expansion of wildcards during pattern
814         matching. Shell globbing is very similar to
815         `fnmatch <https://docs.python.org/3/library/fnmatch.html#module-fnmatch>`__
816         and `glob <https://docs.python.org/3/library/glob.html>`__.
817
818      For more information on how this variable works, see
819      ``meta/classes/binconfig.bbclass`` in the :term:`Source Directory`.
820      You can also find general
821      information on the class in the
822      ":ref:`binconfig.bbclass <ref-classes-binconfig>`" section.
823
824   :term:`BP`
825      The base recipe name and version but without any special recipe name
826      suffix (i.e. ``-native``, ``lib64-``, and so forth). ``BP`` is
827      comprised of the following:
828      ::
829
830         ${BPN}-${PV}
831
832   :term:`BPN`
833      This variable is a version of the :term:`PN` variable with
834      common prefixes and suffixes removed, such as ``nativesdk-``,
835      ``-cross``, ``-native``, and multilib's ``lib64-`` and ``lib32-``.
836      The exact lists of prefixes and suffixes removed are specified by the
837      :term:`MLPREFIX` and
838      :term:`SPECIAL_PKGSUFFIX` variables,
839      respectively.
840
841   :term:`BUGTRACKER`
842      Specifies a URL for an upstream bug tracking website for a recipe.
843      The OpenEmbedded build system does not use this variable. Rather, the
844      variable is a useful pointer in case a bug in the software being
845      built needs to be manually reported.
846
847   :term:`BUILD_ARCH`
848      Specifies the architecture of the build host (e.g. ``i686``). The
849      OpenEmbedded build system sets the value of ``BUILD_ARCH`` from the
850      machine name reported by the ``uname`` command.
851
852   :term:`BUILD_AS_ARCH`
853      Specifies the architecture-specific assembler flags for the build
854      host. By default, the value of ``BUILD_AS_ARCH`` is empty.
855
856   :term:`BUILD_CC_ARCH`
857      Specifies the architecture-specific C compiler flags for the build
858      host. By default, the value of ``BUILD_CC_ARCH`` is empty.
859
860   :term:`BUILD_CCLD`
861      Specifies the linker command to be used for the build host when the C
862      compiler is being used as the linker. By default, ``BUILD_CCLD``
863      points to GCC and passes as arguments the value of
864      :term:`BUILD_CC_ARCH`, assuming
865      ``BUILD_CC_ARCH`` is set.
866
867   :term:`BUILD_CFLAGS`
868      Specifies the flags to pass to the C compiler when building for the
869      build host. When building in the ``-native`` context,
870      :term:`CFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable by
871      default.
872
873   :term:`BUILD_CPPFLAGS`
874      Specifies the flags to pass to the C preprocessor (i.e. to both the C
875      and the C++ compilers) when building for the build host. When
876      building in the ``-native`` context, :term:`CPPFLAGS`
877      is set to the value of this variable by default.
878
879   :term:`BUILD_CXXFLAGS`
880      Specifies the flags to pass to the C++ compiler when building for the
881      build host. When building in the ``-native`` context,
882      :term:`CXXFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable
883      by default.
884
885   :term:`BUILD_FC`
886      Specifies the Fortran compiler command for the build host. By
887      default, ``BUILD_FC`` points to Gfortran and passes as arguments the
888      value of :term:`BUILD_CC_ARCH`, assuming
889      ``BUILD_CC_ARCH`` is set.
890
891   :term:`BUILD_LD`
892      Specifies the linker command for the build host. By default,
893      ``BUILD_LD`` points to the GNU linker (ld) and passes as arguments
894      the value of :term:`BUILD_LD_ARCH`, assuming
895      ``BUILD_LD_ARCH`` is set.
896
897   :term:`BUILD_LD_ARCH`
898      Specifies architecture-specific linker flags for the build host. By
899      default, the value of ``BUILD_LD_ARCH`` is empty.
900
901   :term:`BUILD_LDFLAGS`
902      Specifies the flags to pass to the linker when building for the build
903      host. When building in the ``-native`` context,
904      :term:`LDFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable
905      by default.
906
907   :term:`BUILD_OPTIMIZATION`
908      Specifies the optimization flags passed to the C compiler when
909      building for the build host or the SDK. The flags are passed through
910      the :term:`BUILD_CFLAGS` and
911      :term:`BUILDSDK_CFLAGS` default values.
912
913      The default value of the ``BUILD_OPTIMIZATION`` variable is "-O2
914      -pipe".
915
916   :term:`BUILD_OS`
917      Specifies the operating system in use on the build host (e.g.
918      "linux"). The OpenEmbedded build system sets the value of
919      ``BUILD_OS`` from the OS reported by the ``uname`` command - the
920      first word, converted to lower-case characters.
921
922   :term:`BUILD_PREFIX`
923      The toolchain binary prefix used for native recipes. The OpenEmbedded
924      build system uses the ``BUILD_PREFIX`` value to set the
925      :term:`TARGET_PREFIX` when building for
926      ``native`` recipes.
927
928   :term:`BUILD_STRIP`
929      Specifies the command to be used to strip debugging symbols from
930      binaries produced for the build host. By default, ``BUILD_STRIP``
931      points to
932      ``${``\ :term:`BUILD_PREFIX`\ ``}strip``.
933
934   :term:`BUILD_SYS`
935      Specifies the system, including the architecture and the operating
936      system, to use when building for the build host (i.e. when building
937      ``native`` recipes).
938
939      The OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets this variable based
940      on :term:`BUILD_ARCH`,
941      :term:`BUILD_VENDOR`, and
942      :term:`BUILD_OS`. You do not need to set the
943      ``BUILD_SYS`` variable yourself.
944
945   :term:`BUILD_VENDOR`
946      Specifies the vendor name to use when building for the build host.
947      The default value is an empty string ("").
948
949   :term:`BUILDDIR`
950      Points to the location of the :term:`Build Directory`.
951      You can define this directory indirectly through the
952      :ref:`structure-core-script` script by passing in a Build
953      Directory path when you run the script. If you run the script and do
954      not provide a Build Directory path, the ``BUILDDIR`` defaults to
955      ``build`` in the current directory.
956
957   :term:`BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT`
958      When inheriting the :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>`
959      class, this variable specifies whether or not to commit the build
960      history output in a local Git repository. If set to "1", this local
961      repository will be maintained automatically by the ``buildhistory``
962      class and a commit will be created on every build for changes to each
963      top-level subdirectory of the build history output (images, packages,
964      and sdk). If you want to track changes to build history over time,
965      you should set this value to "1".
966
967      By default, the ``buildhistory`` class does not commit the build
968      history output in a local Git repository:
969      ::
970
971         BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT ?= "0"
972
973   :term:`BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT_AUTHOR`
974      When inheriting the :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>`
975      class, this variable specifies the author to use for each Git commit.
976      In order for the ``BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT_AUTHOR`` variable to work, the
977      :term:`BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT` variable must
978      be set to "1".
979
980      Git requires that the value you provide for the
981      ``BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT_AUTHOR`` variable takes the form of "name
982      email@host". Providing an email address or host that is not valid
983      does not produce an error.
984
985      By default, the ``buildhistory`` class sets the variable as follows:
986      ::
987
988         BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT_AUTHOR ?= "buildhistory <buildhistory@${DISTRO}>"
989
990   :term:`BUILDHISTORY_DIR`
991      When inheriting the :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>`
992      class, this variable specifies the directory in which build history
993      information is kept. For more information on how the variable works,
994      see the ``buildhistory.class``.
995
996      By default, the ``buildhistory`` class sets the directory as follows:
997      ::
998
999         BUILDHISTORY_DIR ?= "${TOPDIR}/buildhistory"
1000
1001   :term:`BUILDHISTORY_FEATURES`
1002      When inheriting the :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>`
1003      class, this variable specifies the build history features to be
1004      enabled. For more information on how build history works, see the
1005      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:maintaining build output quality`"
1006      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
1007
1008      You can specify these features in the form of a space-separated list:
1009
1010      -  *image:* Analysis of the contents of images, which includes the
1011         list of installed packages among other things.
1012
1013      -  *package:* Analysis of the contents of individual packages.
1014
1015      -  *sdk:* Analysis of the contents of the software development kit
1016         (SDK).
1017
1018      -  *task:* Save output file signatures for
1019         :ref:`shared state <overview-manual/concepts:shared state cache>`
1020         (sstate) tasks.
1021         This saves one file per task and lists the SHA-256 checksums for
1022         each file staged (i.e. the output of the task).
1023
1024      By default, the ``buildhistory`` class enables the following
1025      features:
1026      ::
1027
1028         BUILDHISTORY_FEATURES ?= "image package sdk"
1029
1030   :term:`BUILDHISTORY_IMAGE_FILES`
1031      When inheriting the :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>`
1032      class, this variable specifies a list of paths to files copied from
1033      the image contents into the build history directory under an
1034      "image-files" directory in the directory for the image, so that you
1035      can track the contents of each file. The default is to copy
1036      ``/etc/passwd`` and ``/etc/group``, which allows you to monitor for
1037      changes in user and group entries. You can modify the list to include
1038      any file. Specifying an invalid path does not produce an error.
1039      Consequently, you can include files that might not always be present.
1040
1041      By default, the ``buildhistory`` class provides paths to the
1042      following files:
1043      ::
1044
1045         BUILDHISTORY_IMAGE_FILES ?= "/etc/passwd /etc/group"
1046
1047   :term:`BUILDHISTORY_PUSH_REPO`
1048      When inheriting the :ref:`buildhistory <ref-classes-buildhistory>`
1049      class, this variable optionally specifies a remote repository to
1050      which build history pushes Git changes. In order for
1051      ``BUILDHISTORY_PUSH_REPO`` to work,
1052      :term:`BUILDHISTORY_COMMIT` must be set to
1053      "1".
1054
1055      The repository should correspond to a remote address that specifies a
1056      repository as understood by Git, or alternatively to a remote name
1057      that you have set up manually using ``git remote`` within the local
1058      repository.
1059
1060      By default, the ``buildhistory`` class sets the variable as follows:
1061      ::
1062
1063         BUILDHISTORY_PUSH_REPO ?= ""
1064
1065   :term:`BUILDSDK_CFLAGS`
1066      Specifies the flags to pass to the C compiler when building for the
1067      SDK. When building in the ``nativesdk-`` context,
1068      :term:`CFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable by
1069      default.
1070
1071   :term:`BUILDSDK_CPPFLAGS`
1072      Specifies the flags to pass to the C pre-processor (i.e. to both the
1073      C and the C++ compilers) when building for the SDK. When building in
1074      the ``nativesdk-`` context, :term:`CPPFLAGS` is set
1075      to the value of this variable by default.
1076
1077   :term:`BUILDSDK_CXXFLAGS`
1078      Specifies the flags to pass to the C++ compiler when building for the
1079      SDK. When building in the ``nativesdk-`` context,
1080      :term:`CXXFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable
1081      by default.
1082
1083   :term:`BUILDSDK_LDFLAGS`
1084      Specifies the flags to pass to the linker when building for the SDK.
1085      When building in the ``nativesdk-`` context,
1086      :term:`LDFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable
1087      by default.
1088
1089   :term:`BUILDSTATS_BASE`
1090      Points to the location of the directory that holds build statistics
1091      when you use and enable the
1092      :ref:`buildstats <ref-classes-buildstats>` class. The
1093      ``BUILDSTATS_BASE`` directory defaults to
1094      ``${``\ :term:`TMPDIR`\ ``}/buildstats/``.
1095
1096   :term:`BUSYBOX_SPLIT_SUID`
1097      For the BusyBox recipe, specifies whether to split the output
1098      executable file into two parts: one for features that require
1099      ``setuid root``, and one for the remaining features (i.e. those that
1100      do not require ``setuid root``).
1101
1102      The ``BUSYBOX_SPLIT_SUID`` variable defaults to "1", which results in
1103      splitting the output executable file. Set the variable to "0" to get
1104      a single output executable file.
1105
1106   :term:`CACHE`
1107      Specifies the directory BitBake uses to store a cache of the
1108      :term:`Metadata` so it does not need to be parsed every time
1109      BitBake is started.
1110
1111   :term:`CC`
1112      The minimal command and arguments used to run the C compiler.
1113
1114   :term:`CFLAGS`
1115      Specifies the flags to pass to the C compiler. This variable is
1116      exported to an environment variable and thus made visible to the
1117      software being built during the compilation step.
1118
1119      Default initialization for ``CFLAGS`` varies depending on what is
1120      being built:
1121
1122      -  :term:`TARGET_CFLAGS` when building for the
1123         target
1124
1125      -  :term:`BUILD_CFLAGS` when building for the
1126         build host (i.e. ``-native``)
1127
1128      -  :term:`BUILDSDK_CFLAGS` when building for
1129         an SDK (i.e. ``nativesdk-``)
1130
1131   :term:`CLASSOVERRIDE`
1132      An internal variable specifying the special class override that
1133      should currently apply (e.g. "class-target", "class-native", and so
1134      forth). The classes that use this variable (e.g.
1135      :ref:`native <ref-classes-native>`,
1136      :ref:`nativesdk <ref-classes-nativesdk>`, and so forth) set the
1137      variable to appropriate values.
1138
1139      .. note::
1140
1141         ``CLASSOVERRIDE`` gets its default "class-target" value from the
1142         ``bitbake.conf`` file.
1143
1144      As an example, the following override allows you to install extra
1145      files, but only when building for the target:
1146      ::
1147
1148         do_install_append_class-target() {
1149             install my-extra-file ${D}${sysconfdir}
1150         }
1151
1152      Here is an example where ``FOO`` is set to
1153      "native" when building for the build host, and to "other" when not
1154      building for the build host:
1155      ::
1156
1157         FOO_class-native = "native"
1158         FOO = "other"
1159
1160      The underlying mechanism behind ``CLASSOVERRIDE`` is simply
1161      that it is included in the default value of
1162      :term:`OVERRIDES`.
1163
1164   :term:`CLEANBROKEN`
1165      If set to "1" within a recipe, ``CLEANBROKEN`` specifies that the
1166      ``make clean`` command does not work for the software being built.
1167      Consequently, the OpenEmbedded build system will not try to run
1168      ``make clean`` during the :ref:`ref-tasks-configure`
1169      task, which is the default behavior.
1170
1171   :term:`COMBINED_FEATURES`
1172      Provides a list of hardware features that are enabled in both
1173      :term:`MACHINE_FEATURES` and
1174      :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES`. This select list of
1175      features contains features that make sense to be controlled both at
1176      the machine and distribution configuration level. For example, the
1177      "bluetooth" feature requires hardware support but should also be
1178      optional at the distribution level, in case the hardware supports
1179      Bluetooth but you do not ever intend to use it.
1180
1181   :term:`COMMON_LICENSE_DIR`
1182      Points to ``meta/files/common-licenses`` in the
1183      :term:`Source Directory`, which is where generic license
1184      files reside.
1185
1186   :term:`COMPATIBLE_HOST`
1187      A regular expression that resolves to one or more hosts (when the
1188      recipe is native) or one or more targets (when the recipe is
1189      non-native) with which a recipe is compatible. The regular expression
1190      is matched against :term:`HOST_SYS`. You can use the
1191      variable to stop recipes from being built for classes of systems with
1192      which the recipes are not compatible. Stopping these builds is
1193      particularly useful with kernels. The variable also helps to increase
1194      parsing speed since the build system skips parsing recipes not
1195      compatible with the current system.
1196
1197   :term:`COMPATIBLE_MACHINE`
1198      A regular expression that resolves to one or more target machines
1199      with which a recipe is compatible. The regular expression is matched
1200      against :term:`MACHINEOVERRIDES`. You can use
1201      the variable to stop recipes from being built for machines with which
1202      the recipes are not compatible. Stopping these builds is particularly
1203      useful with kernels. The variable also helps to increase parsing
1204      speed since the build system skips parsing recipes not compatible
1205      with the current machine.
1206
1207   :term:`COMPLEMENTARY_GLOB`
1208      Defines wildcards to match when installing a list of complementary
1209      packages for all the packages explicitly (or implicitly) installed in
1210      an image.
1211
1212      .. note::
1213
1214         The ``COMPLEMENTARY_GLOB`` variable uses Unix filename pattern matching
1215         (`fnmatch <https://docs.python.org/3/library/fnmatch.html#module-fnmatch>`__),
1216         which is similar to the Unix style pathname pattern expansion
1217         (`glob <https://docs.python.org/3/library/glob.html>`__).
1218
1219      The resulting list of complementary packages is associated with an
1220      item that can be added to
1221      :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES`. An example usage of
1222      this is the "dev-pkgs" item that when added to ``IMAGE_FEATURES``
1223      will install -dev packages (containing headers and other development
1224      files) for every package in the image.
1225
1226      To add a new feature item pointing to a wildcard, use a variable flag
1227      to specify the feature item name and use the value to specify the
1228      wildcard. Here is an example:
1229      ::
1230
1231         COMPLEMENTARY_GLOB[dev-pkgs] = '*-dev'
1232
1233   :term:`COMPONENTS_DIR`
1234      Stores sysroot components for each recipe. The OpenEmbedded build
1235      system uses ``COMPONENTS_DIR`` when constructing recipe-specific
1236      sysroots for other recipes.
1237
1238      The default is
1239      "``${``\ :term:`STAGING_DIR`\ ``}-components``."
1240      (i.e.
1241      "``${``\ :term:`TMPDIR`\ ``}/sysroots-components``").
1242
1243   :term:`CONF_VERSION`
1244      Tracks the version of the local configuration file (i.e.
1245      ``local.conf``). The value for ``CONF_VERSION`` increments each time
1246      ``build/conf/`` compatibility changes.
1247
1248   :term:`CONFFILES`
1249      Identifies editable or configurable files that are part of a package.
1250      If the Package Management System (PMS) is being used to update
1251      packages on the target system, it is possible that configuration
1252      files you have changed after the original installation and that you
1253      now want to remain unchanged are overwritten. In other words,
1254      editable files might exist in the package that you do not want reset
1255      as part of the package update process. You can use the ``CONFFILES``
1256      variable to list the files in the package that you wish to prevent
1257      the PMS from overwriting during this update process.
1258
1259      To use the ``CONFFILES`` variable, provide a package name override
1260      that identifies the resulting package. Then, provide a
1261      space-separated list of files. Here is an example:
1262      ::
1263
1264         CONFFILES_${PN} += "${sysconfdir}/file1 \
1265             ${sysconfdir}/file2 ${sysconfdir}/file3"
1266
1267      A relationship exists between the ``CONFFILES`` and ``FILES``
1268      variables. The files listed within ``CONFFILES`` must be a subset of
1269      the files listed within ``FILES``. Because the configuration files
1270      you provide with ``CONFFILES`` are simply being identified so that
1271      the PMS will not overwrite them, it makes sense that the files must
1272      already be included as part of the package through the ``FILES``
1273      variable.
1274
1275      .. note::
1276
1277         When specifying paths as part of the ``CONFFILES`` variable, it is
1278         good practice to use appropriate path variables.
1279         For example, ``${sysconfdir}`` rather than ``/etc`` or ``${bindir}``
1280         rather than ``/usr/bin``. You can find a list of these variables at
1281         the top of the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` file in the
1282         :term:`Source Directory`.
1283
1284   :term:`CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE`
1285      Identifies the initial RAM filesystem (initramfs) source files. The
1286      OpenEmbedded build system receives and uses this kernel Kconfig
1287      variable as an environment variable. By default, the variable is set
1288      to null ("").
1289
1290      The ``CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE`` can be either a single cpio archive
1291      with a ``.cpio`` suffix or a space-separated list of directories and
1292      files for building the initramfs image. A cpio archive should contain
1293      a filesystem archive to be used as an initramfs image. Directories
1294      should contain a filesystem layout to be included in the initramfs
1295      image. Files should contain entries according to the format described
1296      by the ``usr/gen_init_cpio`` program in the kernel tree.
1297
1298      If you specify multiple directories and files, the initramfs image
1299      will be the aggregate of all of them.
1300
1301      For information on creating an initramfs, see the
1302      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building an initial ram filesystem (initramfs) image`" section
1303      in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
1304
1305   :term:`CONFIG_SITE`
1306      A list of files that contains ``autoconf`` test results relevant to
1307      the current build. This variable is used by the Autotools utilities
1308      when running ``configure``.
1309
1310   :term:`CONFIGURE_FLAGS`
1311      The minimal arguments for GNU configure.
1312
1313   :term:`CONFLICT_DISTRO_FEATURES`
1314      When inheriting the
1315      :ref:`features_check <ref-classes-features_check>`
1316      class, this variable identifies distribution features that would be
1317      in conflict should the recipe be built. In other words, if the
1318      ``CONFLICT_DISTRO_FEATURES`` variable lists a feature that also
1319      appears in ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` within the current configuration, then
1320      the recipe will be skipped, and if the build system attempts to build
1321      the recipe then an error will be triggered.
1322
1323   :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_EXCLUDE`
1324      A space-separated list of licenses to exclude from the source
1325      archived by the :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class. In
1326      other words, if a license in a recipe's
1327      :term:`LICENSE` value is in the value of
1328      ``COPYLEFT_LICENSE_EXCLUDE``, then its source is not archived by the
1329      class.
1330
1331      .. note::
1332
1333         The ``COPYLEFT_LICENSE_EXCLUDE`` variable takes precedence over the
1334         :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_INCLUDE` variable.
1335
1336      The default value, which is "CLOSED Proprietary", for
1337      ``COPYLEFT_LICENSE_EXCLUDE`` is set by the
1338      :ref:`copyleft_filter <ref-classes-copyleft_filter>` class, which
1339      is inherited by the ``archiver`` class.
1340
1341   :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_INCLUDE`
1342      A space-separated list of licenses to include in the source archived
1343      by the :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class. In other
1344      words, if a license in a recipe's :term:`LICENSE`
1345      value is in the value of ``COPYLEFT_LICENSE_INCLUDE``, then its
1346      source is archived by the class.
1347
1348      The default value is set by the
1349      :ref:`copyleft_filter <ref-classes-copyleft_filter>` class, which
1350      is inherited by the ``archiver`` class. The default value includes
1351      "GPL*", "LGPL*", and "AGPL*".
1352
1353   :term:`COPYLEFT_PN_EXCLUDE`
1354      A list of recipes to exclude in the source archived by the
1355      :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class. The
1356      ``COPYLEFT_PN_EXCLUDE`` variable overrides the license inclusion and
1357      exclusion caused through the
1358      :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_INCLUDE` and
1359      :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_EXCLUDE`
1360      variables, respectively.
1361
1362      The default value, which is "" indicating to not explicitly exclude
1363      any recipes by name, for ``COPYLEFT_PN_EXCLUDE`` is set by the
1364      :ref:`copyleft_filter <ref-classes-copyleft_filter>` class, which
1365      is inherited by the ``archiver`` class.
1366
1367   :term:`COPYLEFT_PN_INCLUDE`
1368      A list of recipes to include in the source archived by the
1369      :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class. The
1370      ``COPYLEFT_PN_INCLUDE`` variable overrides the license inclusion and
1371      exclusion caused through the
1372      :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_INCLUDE` and
1373      :term:`COPYLEFT_LICENSE_EXCLUDE`
1374      variables, respectively.
1375
1376      The default value, which is "" indicating to not explicitly include
1377      any recipes by name, for ``COPYLEFT_PN_INCLUDE`` is set by the
1378      :ref:`copyleft_filter <ref-classes-copyleft_filter>` class, which
1379      is inherited by the ``archiver`` class.
1380
1381   :term:`COPYLEFT_RECIPE_TYPES`
1382      A space-separated list of recipe types to include in the source
1383      archived by the :ref:`archiver <ref-classes-archiver>` class.
1384      Recipe types are ``target``, ``native``, ``nativesdk``, ``cross``,
1385      ``crosssdk``, and ``cross-canadian``.
1386
1387      The default value, which is "target*", for ``COPYLEFT_RECIPE_TYPES``
1388      is set by the :ref:`copyleft_filter <ref-classes-copyleft_filter>`
1389      class, which is inherited by the ``archiver`` class.
1390
1391   :term:`COPY_LIC_DIRS`
1392      If set to "1" along with the
1393      :term:`COPY_LIC_MANIFEST` variable, the
1394      OpenEmbedded build system copies into the image the license files,
1395      which are located in ``/usr/share/common-licenses``, for each
1396      package. The license files are placed in directories within the image
1397      itself during build time.
1398
1399      .. note::
1400
1401         The ``COPY_LIC_DIRS`` does not offer a path for adding licenses for
1402         newly installed packages to an image, which might be most suitable for
1403         read-only filesystems that cannot be upgraded. See the
1404         :term:`LICENSE_CREATE_PACKAGE` variable for additional information.
1405         You can also reference the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:providing license text`"
1406         section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for
1407         information on providing license text.
1408
1409   :term:`COPY_LIC_MANIFEST`
1410      If set to "1", the OpenEmbedded build system copies the license
1411      manifest for the image to
1412      ``/usr/share/common-licenses/license.manifest`` within the image
1413      itself during build time.
1414
1415      .. note::
1416
1417         The ``COPY_LIC_MANIFEST`` does not offer a path for adding licenses for
1418         newly installed packages to an image, which might be most suitable for
1419         read-only filesystems that cannot be upgraded. See the
1420         :term:`LICENSE_CREATE_PACKAGE` variable for additional information.
1421         You can also reference the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:providing license text`"
1422         section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for
1423         information on providing license text.
1424
1425   :term:`CORE_IMAGE_EXTRA_INSTALL`
1426      Specifies the list of packages to be added to the image. You should
1427      only set this variable in the ``local.conf`` configuration file found
1428      in the :term:`Build Directory`.
1429
1430      This variable replaces ``POKY_EXTRA_INSTALL``, which is no longer
1431      supported.
1432
1433   :term:`COREBASE`
1434      Specifies the parent directory of the OpenEmbedded-Core Metadata
1435      layer (i.e. ``meta``).
1436
1437      It is an important distinction that ``COREBASE`` points to the parent
1438      of this layer and not the layer itself. Consider an example where you
1439      have cloned the Poky Git repository and retained the ``poky`` name
1440      for your local copy of the repository. In this case, ``COREBASE``
1441      points to the ``poky`` folder because it is the parent directory of
1442      the ``poky/meta`` layer.
1443
1444   :term:`COREBASE_FILES`
1445      Lists files from the :term:`COREBASE` directory that
1446      should be copied other than the layers listed in the
1447      ``bblayers.conf`` file. The ``COREBASE_FILES`` variable exists for
1448      the purpose of copying metadata from the OpenEmbedded build system
1449      into the extensible SDK.
1450
1451      Explicitly listing files in ``COREBASE`` is needed because it
1452      typically contains build directories and other files that should not
1453      normally be copied into the extensible SDK. Consequently, the value
1454      of ``COREBASE_FILES`` is used in order to only copy the files that
1455      are actually needed.
1456
1457   :term:`CPP`
1458      The minimal command and arguments used to run the C preprocessor.
1459
1460   :term:`CPPFLAGS`
1461      Specifies the flags to pass to the C pre-processor (i.e. to both the
1462      C and the C++ compilers). This variable is exported to an environment
1463      variable and thus made visible to the software being built during the
1464      compilation step.
1465
1466      Default initialization for ``CPPFLAGS`` varies depending on what is
1467      being built:
1468
1469      -  :term:`TARGET_CPPFLAGS` when building for
1470         the target
1471
1472      -  :term:`BUILD_CPPFLAGS` when building for the
1473         build host (i.e. ``-native``)
1474
1475      -  :term:`BUILDSDK_CPPFLAGS` when building
1476         for an SDK (i.e. ``nativesdk-``)
1477
1478   :term:`CROSS_COMPILE`
1479      The toolchain binary prefix for the target tools. The
1480      ``CROSS_COMPILE`` variable is the same as the
1481      :term:`TARGET_PREFIX` variable.
1482
1483      .. note::
1484
1485         The OpenEmbedded build system sets the ``CROSS_COMPILE``
1486         variable only in certain contexts (e.g. when building for kernel
1487         and kernel module recipes).
1488
1489   :term:`CVSDIR`
1490      The directory in which files checked out under the CVS system are
1491      stored.
1492
1493   :term:`CXX`
1494      The minimal command and arguments used to run the C++ compiler.
1495
1496   :term:`CXXFLAGS`
1497      Specifies the flags to pass to the C++ compiler. This variable is
1498      exported to an environment variable and thus made visible to the
1499      software being built during the compilation step.
1500
1501      Default initialization for ``CXXFLAGS`` varies depending on what is
1502      being built:
1503
1504      -  :term:`TARGET_CXXFLAGS` when building for
1505         the target
1506
1507      -  :term:`BUILD_CXXFLAGS` when building for the
1508         build host (i.e. ``-native``)
1509
1510      -  :term:`BUILDSDK_CXXFLAGS` when building
1511         for an SDK (i.e. ``nativesdk-``)
1512
1513   :term:`D`
1514      The destination directory. The location in the :term:`Build Directory`
1515      where components are installed by the
1516      :ref:`ref-tasks-install` task. This location defaults
1517      to:
1518      ::
1519
1520         ${WORKDIR}/image
1521
1522      .. note::
1523
1524         Tasks that read from or write to this directory should run under
1525         :ref:`fakeroot <overview-manual/concepts:fakeroot and pseudo>`.
1526
1527   :term:`DATE`
1528      The date the build was started. Dates appear using the year, month,
1529      and day (YMD) format (e.g. "20150209" for February 9th, 2015).
1530
1531   :term:`DATETIME`
1532      The date and time on which the current build started. The format is
1533      suitable for timestamps.
1534
1535   :term:`DEBIAN_NOAUTONAME`
1536      When the :ref:`debian <ref-classes-debian>` class is inherited,
1537      which is the default behavior, ``DEBIAN_NOAUTONAME`` specifies a
1538      particular package should not be renamed according to Debian library
1539      package naming. You must use the package name as an override when you
1540      set this variable. Here is an example from the ``fontconfig`` recipe:
1541      ::
1542
1543         DEBIAN_NOAUTONAME_fontconfig-utils = "1"
1544
1545   :term:`DEBIANNAME`
1546      When the :ref:`debian <ref-classes-debian>` class is inherited,
1547      which is the default behavior, ``DEBIANNAME`` allows you to override
1548      the library name for an individual package. Overriding the library
1549      name in these cases is rare. You must use the package name as an
1550      override when you set this variable. Here is an example from the
1551      ``dbus`` recipe:
1552      ::
1553
1554         DEBIANNAME_${PN} = "dbus-1"
1555
1556   :term:`DEBUG_BUILD`
1557      Specifies to build packages with debugging information. This
1558      influences the value of the ``SELECTED_OPTIMIZATION`` variable.
1559
1560   :term:`DEBUG_OPTIMIZATION`
1561      The options to pass in ``TARGET_CFLAGS`` and ``CFLAGS`` when
1562      compiling a system for debugging. This variable defaults to "-O
1563      -fno-omit-frame-pointer ${DEBUG_FLAGS} -pipe".
1564
1565   :term:`DEFAULT_PREFERENCE`
1566      Specifies a weak bias for recipe selection priority.
1567
1568      The most common usage of this is variable is to set it to "-1" within
1569      a recipe for a development version of a piece of software. Using the
1570      variable in this way causes the stable version of the recipe to build
1571      by default in the absence of ``PREFERRED_VERSION`` being used to
1572      build the development version.
1573
1574      .. note::
1575
1576         The bias provided by ``DEFAULT_PREFERENCE`` is weak and is overridden
1577         by :term:`BBFILE_PRIORITY` if that variable is different between two
1578         layers that contain different versions of the same recipe.
1579
1580   :term:`DEFAULTTUNE`
1581      The default CPU and Application Binary Interface (ABI) tunings (i.e.
1582      the "tune") used by the OpenEmbedded build system. The
1583      ``DEFAULTTUNE`` helps define
1584      :term:`TUNE_FEATURES`.
1585
1586      The default tune is either implicitly or explicitly set by the
1587      machine (:term:`MACHINE`). However, you can override
1588      the setting using available tunes as defined with
1589      :term:`AVAILTUNES`.
1590
1591   :term:`DEPENDS`
1592      Lists a recipe's build-time dependencies. These are dependencies on
1593      other recipes whose contents (e.g. headers and shared libraries) are
1594      needed by the recipe at build time.
1595
1596      As an example, consider a recipe ``foo`` that contains the following
1597      assignment:
1598      ::
1599
1600          DEPENDS = "bar"
1601
1602      The practical effect of the previous
1603      assignment is that all files installed by bar will be available in
1604      the appropriate staging sysroot, given by the
1605      :term:`STAGING_DIR* <STAGING_DIR>` variables, by the time the
1606      :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` task for ``foo`` runs.
1607      This mechanism is implemented by having ``do_configure`` depend on
1608      the :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task of
1609      each recipe listed in ``DEPENDS``, through a
1610      ``[``\ :ref:`deptask <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:variable flags>`\ ``]``
1611      declaration in the :ref:`base <ref-classes-base>` class.
1612
1613      .. note::
1614
1615         It seldom is necessary to reference, for example, ``STAGING_DIR_HOST``
1616         explicitly. The standard classes and build-related variables are
1617         configured to automatically use the appropriate staging sysroots.
1618
1619      As another example, ``DEPENDS`` can also be used to add utilities
1620      that run on the build machine during the build. For example, a recipe
1621      that makes use of a code generator built by the recipe ``codegen``
1622      might have the following:
1623      ::
1624
1625         DEPENDS = "codegen-native"
1626
1627      For more
1628      information, see the :ref:`native <ref-classes-native>` class and
1629      the :term:`EXTRANATIVEPATH` variable.
1630
1631      .. note::
1632
1633         -  ``DEPENDS`` is a list of recipe names. Or, to be more precise,
1634            it is a list of :term:`PROVIDES` names, which
1635            usually match recipe names. Putting a package name such as
1636            "foo-dev" in ``DEPENDS`` does not make sense. Use "foo"
1637            instead, as this will put files from all the packages that make
1638            up ``foo``, which includes those from ``foo-dev``, into the
1639            sysroot.
1640
1641         -  One recipe having another recipe in ``DEPENDS`` does not by
1642            itself add any runtime dependencies between the packages
1643            produced by the two recipes. However, as explained in the
1644            ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:automatically added runtime dependencies`"
1645            section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual,
1646            runtime dependencies will often be added automatically, meaning
1647            ``DEPENDS`` alone is sufficient for most recipes.
1648
1649         -  Counterintuitively, ``DEPENDS`` is often necessary even for
1650            recipes that install precompiled components. For example, if
1651            ``libfoo`` is a precompiled library that links against
1652            ``libbar``, then linking against ``libfoo`` requires both
1653            ``libfoo`` and ``libbar`` to be available in the sysroot.
1654            Without a ``DEPENDS`` from the recipe that installs ``libfoo``
1655            to the recipe that installs ``libbar``, other recipes might
1656            fail to link against ``libfoo``.
1657
1658      For information on runtime dependencies, see the
1659      :term:`RDEPENDS` variable. You can also see the
1660      ":ref:`Tasks <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:tasks>`" and
1661      ":ref:`Dependencies <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-execution:dependencies>`" sections in the
1662      BitBake User Manual for additional information on tasks and
1663      dependencies.
1664
1665   :term:`DEPLOY_DIR`
1666      Points to the general area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to
1667      place images, packages, SDKs, and other output files that are ready
1668      to be used outside of the build system. By default, this directory
1669      resides within the :term:`Build Directory` as
1670      ``${TMPDIR}/deploy``.
1671
1672      For more information on the structure of the Build Directory, see
1673      ":ref:`ref-manual/structure:the build directory - \`\`build/\`\``" section.
1674      For more detail on the contents of the ``deploy`` directory, see the
1675      ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:images`",
1676      ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:package feeds`", and
1677      ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:application development sdk`" sections all in the
1678      Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual.
1679
1680   :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_DEB`
1681      Points to the area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to place
1682      Debian packages that are ready to be used outside of the build
1683      system. This variable applies only when
1684      :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES` contains
1685      "package_deb".
1686
1687      The BitBake configuration file initially defines the
1688      ``DEPLOY_DIR_DEB`` variable as a sub-folder of
1689      :term:`DEPLOY_DIR`:
1690      ::
1691
1692         DEPLOY_DIR_DEB = "${DEPLOY_DIR}/deb"
1693
1694      The :ref:`package_deb <ref-classes-package_deb>` class uses the
1695      ``DEPLOY_DIR_DEB`` variable to make sure the
1696      :ref:`ref-tasks-package_write_deb` task
1697      writes Debian packages into the appropriate folder. For more
1698      information on how packaging works, see the
1699      ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:package feeds`" section
1700      in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual.
1701
1702   :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE`
1703      Points to the area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to place
1704      images and other associated output files that are ready to be
1705      deployed onto the target machine. The directory is machine-specific
1706      as it contains the ``${MACHINE}`` name. By default, this directory
1707      resides within the :term:`Build Directory` as
1708      ``${DEPLOY_DIR}/images/${MACHINE}/``.
1709
1710      For more information on the structure of the Build Directory, see
1711      ":ref:`ref-manual/structure:the build directory - \`\`build/\`\``" section.
1712      For more detail on the contents of the ``deploy`` directory, see the
1713      ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:images`" and
1714      ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:application development sdk`" sections both in
1715      the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual.
1716
1717   :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_IPK`
1718      Points to the area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to place
1719      IPK packages that are ready to be used outside of the build system.
1720      This variable applies only when
1721      :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES` contains
1722      "package_ipk".
1723
1724      The BitBake configuration file initially defines this variable as a
1725      sub-folder of :term:`DEPLOY_DIR`:
1726      ::
1727
1728         DEPLOY_DIR_IPK = "${DEPLOY_DIR}/ipk"
1729
1730      The :ref:`package_ipk <ref-classes-package_ipk>` class uses the
1731      ``DEPLOY_DIR_IPK`` variable to make sure the
1732      :ref:`ref-tasks-package_write_ipk` task
1733      writes IPK packages into the appropriate folder. For more information
1734      on how packaging works, see the
1735      ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:package feeds`" section
1736      in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual.
1737
1738   :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_RPM`
1739      Points to the area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to place
1740      RPM packages that are ready to be used outside of the build system.
1741      This variable applies only when
1742      :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES` contains
1743      "package_rpm".
1744
1745      The BitBake configuration file initially defines this variable as a
1746      sub-folder of :term:`DEPLOY_DIR`:
1747      ::
1748
1749         DEPLOY_DIR_RPM = "${DEPLOY_DIR}/rpm"
1750
1751      The :ref:`package_rpm <ref-classes-package_rpm>` class uses the
1752      ``DEPLOY_DIR_RPM`` variable to make sure the
1753      :ref:`ref-tasks-package_write_rpm` task
1754      writes RPM packages into the appropriate folder. For more information
1755      on how packaging works, see the
1756      ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:package feeds`" section
1757      in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual.
1758
1759   :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_TAR`
1760      Points to the area that the OpenEmbedded build system uses to place
1761      tarballs that are ready to be used outside of the build system. This
1762      variable applies only when
1763      :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES` contains
1764      "package_tar".
1765
1766      The BitBake configuration file initially defines this variable as a
1767      sub-folder of :term:`DEPLOY_DIR`:
1768      ::
1769
1770         DEPLOY_DIR_TAR = "${DEPLOY_DIR}/tar"
1771
1772      The :ref:`package_tar <ref-classes-package_tar>` class uses the
1773      ``DEPLOY_DIR_TAR`` variable to make sure the
1774      :ref:`ref-tasks-package_write_tar` task
1775      writes TAR packages into the appropriate folder. For more information
1776      on how packaging works, see the
1777      ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:package feeds`" section
1778      in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual.
1779
1780   :term:`DEPLOYDIR`
1781      When inheriting the :ref:`deploy <ref-classes-deploy>` class, the
1782      ``DEPLOYDIR`` points to a temporary work area for deployed files that
1783      is set in the ``deploy`` class as follows:
1784      ::
1785
1786         DEPLOYDIR = "${WORKDIR}/deploy-${PN}"
1787
1788      Recipes inheriting the ``deploy`` class should copy files to be
1789      deployed into ``DEPLOYDIR``, and the class will take care of copying
1790      them into :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE`
1791      afterwards.
1792
1793   :term:`DESCRIPTION`
1794      The package description used by package managers. If not set,
1795      ``DESCRIPTION`` takes the value of the :term:`SUMMARY`
1796      variable.
1797
1798   :term:`DISTRO`
1799      The short name of the distribution. For information on the long name
1800      of the distribution, see the :term:`DISTRO_NAME`
1801      variable.
1802
1803      The ``DISTRO`` variable corresponds to a distribution configuration
1804      file whose root name is the same as the variable's argument and whose
1805      filename extension is ``.conf``. For example, the distribution
1806      configuration file for the Poky distribution is named ``poky.conf``
1807      and resides in the ``meta-poky/conf/distro`` directory of the
1808      :term:`Source Directory`.
1809
1810      Within that ``poky.conf`` file, the ``DISTRO`` variable is set as
1811      follows:
1812      ::
1813
1814         DISTRO = "poky"
1815
1816      Distribution configuration files are located in a ``conf/distro``
1817      directory within the :term:`Metadata` that contains the
1818      distribution configuration. The value for ``DISTRO`` must not contain
1819      spaces, and is typically all lower-case.
1820
1821      .. note::
1822
1823         If the ``DISTRO`` variable is blank, a set of default configurations
1824         are used, which are specified within
1825         ``meta/conf/distro/defaultsetup.conf`` also in the Source Directory.
1826
1827   :term:`DISTRO_CODENAME`
1828      Specifies a codename for the distribution being built.
1829
1830   :term:`DISTRO_EXTRA_RDEPENDS`
1831      Specifies a list of distro-specific packages to add to all images.
1832      This variable takes affect through ``packagegroup-base`` so the
1833      variable only really applies to the more full-featured images that
1834      include ``packagegroup-base``. You can use this variable to keep
1835      distro policy out of generic images. As with all other distro
1836      variables, you set this variable in the distro ``.conf`` file.
1837
1838   :term:`DISTRO_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS`
1839      Specifies a list of distro-specific packages to add to all images if
1840      the packages exist. The packages might not exist or be empty (e.g.
1841      kernel modules). The list of packages are automatically installed but
1842      you can remove them.
1843
1844   :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES`
1845      The software support you want in your distribution for various
1846      features. You define your distribution features in the distribution
1847      configuration file.
1848
1849      In most cases, the presence or absence of a feature in
1850      ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` is translated to the appropriate option supplied
1851      to the configure script during the
1852      :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` task for recipes that
1853      optionally support the feature. For example, specifying "x11" in
1854      ``DISTRO_FEATURES``, causes every piece of software built for the
1855      target that can optionally support X11 to have its X11 support
1856      enabled.
1857
1858      Two more examples are Bluetooth and NFS support. For a more complete
1859      list of features that ships with the Yocto Project and that you can
1860      provide with this variable, see the ":ref:`ref-features-distro`" section.
1861
1862   :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL`
1863      Features to be added to ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` if not also present in
1864      ``DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED``.
1865
1866      This variable is set in the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` file. It is
1867      not intended to be user-configurable. It is best to just reference
1868      the variable to see which distro features are being backfilled for
1869      all distro configurations. See the ":ref:`ref-features-backfill`" section
1870      for more information.
1871
1872   :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED`
1873      Features from ``DISTRO_FEATURES_BACKFILL`` that should not be
1874      backfilled (i.e. added to ``DISTRO_FEATURES``) during the build. See
1875      the ":ref:`ref-features-backfill`" section for more information.
1876
1877   :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_DEFAULT`
1878      A convenience variable that gives you the default list of distro
1879      features with the exception of any features specific to the C library
1880      (``libc``).
1881
1882      When creating a custom distribution, you might find it useful to be
1883      able to reuse the default
1884      :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` options without the
1885      need to write out the full set. Here is an example that uses
1886      ``DISTRO_FEATURES_DEFAULT`` from a custom distro configuration file:
1887      ::
1888
1889         DISTRO_FEATURES ?= "${DISTRO_FEATURES_DEFAULT} myfeature"
1890
1891   :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_FILTER_NATIVE`
1892      Specifies a list of features that if present in the target
1893      :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` value should be
1894      included in ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` when building native recipes. This
1895      variable is used in addition to the features filtered using the
1896      :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_NATIVE`
1897      variable.
1898
1899   :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_FILTER_NATIVESDK`
1900      Specifies a list of features that if present in the target
1901      :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` value should be
1902      included in ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` when building nativesdk recipes. This
1903      variable is used in addition to the features filtered using the
1904      :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_NATIVESDK`
1905      variable.
1906
1907   :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_NATIVE`
1908      Specifies a list of features that should be included in
1909      :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` when building native
1910      recipes. This variable is used in addition to the features filtered
1911      using the
1912      :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_FILTER_NATIVE`
1913      variable.
1914
1915   :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_NATIVESDK`
1916      Specifies a list of features that should be included in
1917      :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES` when building
1918      nativesdk recipes. This variable is used in addition to the features
1919      filtered using the
1920      :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES_FILTER_NATIVESDK`
1921      variable.
1922
1923   :term:`DISTRO_NAME`
1924      The long name of the distribution. For information on the short name
1925      of the distribution, see the :term:`DISTRO` variable.
1926
1927      The ``DISTRO_NAME`` variable corresponds to a distribution
1928      configuration file whose root name is the same as the variable's
1929      argument and whose filename extension is ``.conf``. For example, the
1930      distribution configuration file for the Poky distribution is named
1931      ``poky.conf`` and resides in the ``meta-poky/conf/distro`` directory
1932      of the :term:`Source Directory`.
1933
1934      Within that ``poky.conf`` file, the ``DISTRO_NAME`` variable is set
1935      as follows:
1936      ::
1937
1938         DISTRO_NAME = "Poky (Yocto Project Reference Distro)"
1939
1940      Distribution configuration files are located in a ``conf/distro``
1941      directory within the :term:`Metadata` that contains the
1942      distribution configuration.
1943
1944      .. note::
1945
1946         If the ``DISTRO_NAME`` variable is blank, a set of default
1947         configurations are used, which are specified within
1948         ``meta/conf/distro/defaultsetup.conf`` also in the Source Directory.
1949
1950   :term:`DISTRO_VERSION`
1951      The version of the distribution.
1952
1953   :term:`DISTROOVERRIDES`
1954      A colon-separated list of overrides specific to the current
1955      distribution. By default, this list includes the value of
1956      :term:`DISTRO`.
1957
1958      You can extend ``DISTROOVERRIDES`` to add extra overrides that should
1959      apply to the distribution.
1960
1961      The underlying mechanism behind ``DISTROOVERRIDES`` is simply that it
1962      is included in the default value of
1963      :term:`OVERRIDES`.
1964
1965   :term:`DL_DIR`
1966      The central download directory used by the build process to store
1967      downloads. By default, ``DL_DIR`` gets files suitable for mirroring
1968      for everything except Git repositories. If you want tarballs of Git
1969      repositories, use the
1970      :term:`BB_GENERATE_MIRROR_TARBALLS`
1971      variable.
1972
1973      You can set this directory by defining the ``DL_DIR`` variable in the
1974      ``conf/local.conf`` file. This directory is self-maintaining and you
1975      should not have to touch it. By default, the directory is
1976      ``downloads`` in the :term:`Build Directory`.
1977      ::
1978
1979         #DL_DIR ?= "${TOPDIR}/downloads"
1980
1981      To specify a different download directory,
1982      simply remove the comment from the line and provide your directory.
1983
1984      During a first build, the system downloads many different source code
1985      tarballs from various upstream projects. Downloading can take a
1986      while, particularly if your network connection is slow. Tarballs are
1987      all stored in the directory defined by ``DL_DIR`` and the build
1988      system looks there first to find source tarballs.
1989
1990      .. note::
1991
1992         When wiping and rebuilding, you can preserve this directory to
1993         speed up this part of subsequent builds.
1994
1995      You can safely share this directory between multiple builds on the
1996      same development machine. For additional information on how the build
1997      process gets source files when working behind a firewall or proxy
1998      server, see this specific question in the ":doc:`faq`"
1999      chapter. You can also refer to the
2000      ":yocto_wiki:`Working Behind a Network Proxy </Working_Behind_a_Network_Proxy>`"
2001      Wiki page.
2002
2003   :term:`DOC_COMPRESS`
2004      When inheriting the :ref:`compress_doc <ref-classes-compress_doc>`
2005      class, this variable sets the compression policy used when the
2006      OpenEmbedded build system compresses man pages and info pages. By
2007      default, the compression method used is gz (gzip). Other policies
2008      available are xz and bz2.
2009
2010      For information on policies and on how to use this variable, see the
2011      comments in the ``meta/classes/compress_doc.bbclass`` file.
2012
2013   :term:`EFI_PROVIDER`
2014      When building bootable images (i.e. where ``hddimg``, ``iso``, or
2015      ``wic.vmdk`` is in :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES`), the
2016      ``EFI_PROVIDER`` variable specifies the EFI bootloader to use. The
2017      default is "grub-efi", but "systemd-boot" can be used instead.
2018
2019      See the :ref:`systemd-boot <ref-classes-systemd-boot>` and
2020      :ref:`image-live <ref-classes-image-live>` classes for more
2021      information.
2022
2023   :term:`ENABLE_BINARY_LOCALE_GENERATION`
2024      Variable that controls which locales for ``glibc`` are generated
2025      during the build (useful if the target device has 64Mbytes of RAM or
2026      less).
2027
2028   :term:`ERR_REPORT_DIR`
2029      When used with the :ref:`report-error <ref-classes-report-error>`
2030      class, specifies the path used for storing the debug files created by
2031      the :ref:`error reporting
2032      tool <dev-manual/common-tasks:using the error reporting tool>`, which
2033      allows you to submit build errors you encounter to a central
2034      database. By default, the value of this variable is
2035      ``${``\ :term:`LOG_DIR`\ ``}/error-report``.
2036
2037      You can set ``ERR_REPORT_DIR`` to the path you want the error
2038      reporting tool to store the debug files as follows in your
2039      ``local.conf`` file:
2040      ::
2041
2042         ERR_REPORT_DIR = "path"
2043
2044   :term:`ERROR_QA`
2045      Specifies the quality assurance checks whose failures are reported as
2046      errors by the OpenEmbedded build system. You set this variable in
2047      your distribution configuration file. For a list of the checks you
2048      can control with this variable, see the
2049      ":ref:`insane.bbclass <ref-classes-insane>`" section.
2050
2051   :term:`EXCLUDE_FROM_SHLIBS`
2052      Triggers the OpenEmbedded build system's shared libraries resolver to
2053      exclude an entire package when scanning for shared libraries.
2054
2055      .. note::
2056
2057         The shared libraries resolver's functionality results in part from
2058         the internal function ``package_do_shlibs``, which is part of the
2059         :ref:`ref-tasks-package` task. You should be aware that the shared
2060         libraries resolver might implicitly define some dependencies between
2061         packages.
2062
2063      The ``EXCLUDE_FROM_SHLIBS`` variable is similar to the
2064      :term:`PRIVATE_LIBS` variable, which excludes a
2065      package's particular libraries only and not the whole package.
2066
2067      Use the ``EXCLUDE_FROM_SHLIBS`` variable by setting it to "1" for a
2068      particular package:
2069      ::
2070
2071         EXCLUDE_FROM_SHLIBS = "1"
2072
2073   :term:`EXCLUDE_FROM_WORLD`
2074      Directs BitBake to exclude a recipe from world builds (i.e.
2075      ``bitbake world``). During world builds, BitBake locates, parses and
2076      builds all recipes found in every layer exposed in the
2077      ``bblayers.conf`` configuration file.
2078
2079      To exclude a recipe from a world build using this variable, set the
2080      variable to "1" in the recipe.
2081
2082      .. note::
2083
2084         Recipes added to ``EXCLUDE_FROM_WORLD`` may still be built during a
2085         world build in order to satisfy dependencies of other recipes. Adding
2086         a recipe to ``EXCLUDE_FROM_WORLD`` only ensures that the recipe is not
2087         explicitly added to the list of build targets in a world build.
2088
2089   :term:`EXTENDPE`
2090      Used with file and pathnames to create a prefix for a recipe's
2091      version based on the recipe's :term:`PE` value. If ``PE``
2092      is set and greater than zero for a recipe, ``EXTENDPE`` becomes that
2093      value (e.g if ``PE`` is equal to "1" then ``EXTENDPE`` becomes "1").
2094      If a recipe's ``PE`` is not set (the default) or is equal to zero,
2095      ``EXTENDPE`` becomes "".
2096
2097      See the :term:`STAMP` variable for an example.
2098
2099   :term:`EXTENDPKGV`
2100      The full package version specification as it appears on the final
2101      packages produced by a recipe. The variable's value is normally used
2102      to fix a runtime dependency to the exact same version of another
2103      package in the same recipe:
2104      ::
2105
2106         RDEPENDS_${PN}-additional-module = "${PN} (= ${EXTENDPKGV})"
2107
2108      The dependency relationships are intended to force the package
2109      manager to upgrade these types of packages in lock-step.
2110
2111   :term:`EXTERNAL_KERNEL_TOOLS`
2112      When set, the ``EXTERNAL_KERNEL_TOOLS`` variable indicates that these
2113      tools are not in the source tree.
2114
2115      When kernel tools are available in the tree, they are preferred over
2116      any externally installed tools. Setting the ``EXTERNAL_KERNEL_TOOLS``
2117      variable tells the OpenEmbedded build system to prefer the installed
2118      external tools. See the
2119      :ref:`kernel-yocto <ref-classes-kernel-yocto>` class in
2120      ``meta/classes`` to see how the variable is used.
2121
2122   :term:`EXTERNALSRC`
2123      When inheriting the :ref:`externalsrc <ref-classes-externalsrc>`
2124      class, this variable points to the source tree, which is outside of
2125      the OpenEmbedded build system. When set, this variable sets the
2126      :term:`S` variable, which is what the OpenEmbedded build
2127      system uses to locate unpacked recipe source code.
2128
2129      For more information on ``externalsrc.bbclass``, see the
2130      ":ref:`externalsrc.bbclass <ref-classes-externalsrc>`" section. You
2131      can also find information on how to use this variable in the
2132      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building software from an external source`"
2133      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
2134
2135   :term:`EXTERNALSRC_BUILD`
2136      When inheriting the :ref:`externalsrc <ref-classes-externalsrc>`
2137      class, this variable points to the directory in which the recipe's
2138      source code is built, which is outside of the OpenEmbedded build
2139      system. When set, this variable sets the :term:`B` variable,
2140      which is what the OpenEmbedded build system uses to locate the Build
2141      Directory.
2142
2143      For more information on ``externalsrc.bbclass``, see the
2144      ":ref:`externalsrc.bbclass <ref-classes-externalsrc>`" section. You
2145      can also find information on how to use this variable in the
2146      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building software from an external source`"
2147      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
2148
2149   :term:`EXTRA_AUTORECONF`
2150      For recipes inheriting the :ref:`autotools <ref-classes-autotools>`
2151      class, you can use ``EXTRA_AUTORECONF`` to specify extra options to
2152      pass to the ``autoreconf`` command that is executed during the
2153      :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` task.
2154
2155      The default value is "--exclude=autopoint".
2156
2157   :term:`EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES`
2158      A list of additional features to include in an image. When listing
2159      more than one feature, separate them with a space.
2160
2161      Typically, you configure this variable in your ``local.conf`` file,
2162      which is found in the :term:`Build Directory`.
2163      Although you can use this variable from within a recipe, best
2164      practices dictate that you do not.
2165
2166      .. note::
2167
2168         To enable primary features from within the image recipe, use the
2169         :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES` variable.
2170
2171      Here are some examples of features you can add:
2172
2173        - "dbg-pkgs" - Adds -dbg packages for all installed packages including
2174          symbol information for debugging and profiling.
2175
2176        - "debug-tweaks" - Makes an image suitable for debugging. For example, allows root logins without passwords and
2177          enables post-installation logging. See the 'allow-empty-password' and
2178          'post-install-logging' features in the ":ref:`ref-features-image`"
2179          section for more information.
2180        - "dev-pkgs" - Adds -dev packages for all installed packages. This is
2181          useful if you want to develop against the libraries in the image.
2182        - "read-only-rootfs" - Creates an image whose root filesystem is
2183          read-only. See the
2184          ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:creating a read-only root filesystem`"
2185          section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for more
2186          information
2187        - "tools-debug" - Adds debugging tools such as gdb and strace.
2188        - "tools-sdk" - Adds development tools such as gcc, make,
2189          pkgconfig and so forth.
2190        - "tools-testapps" - Adds useful testing tools
2191          such as ts_print, aplay, arecord and so forth.
2192
2193      For a complete list of image features that ships with the Yocto
2194      Project, see the ":ref:`ref-features-image`" section.
2195
2196      For an example that shows how to customize your image by using this
2197      variable, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:customizing images using custom \`\`image_features\`\` and \`\`extra_image_features\`\``"
2198      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
2199
2200   :term:`EXTRA_IMAGECMD`
2201      Specifies additional options for the image creation command that has
2202      been specified in :term:`IMAGE_CMD`. When setting
2203      this variable, use an override for the associated image type. Here is
2204      an example:
2205      ::
2206
2207         EXTRA_IMAGECMD_ext3 ?= "-i 4096"
2208
2209   :term:`EXTRA_IMAGEDEPENDS`
2210      A list of recipes to build that do not provide packages for
2211      installing into the root filesystem.
2212
2213      Sometimes a recipe is required to build the final image but is not
2214      needed in the root filesystem. You can use the ``EXTRA_IMAGEDEPENDS``
2215      variable to list these recipes and thus specify the dependencies. A
2216      typical example is a required bootloader in a machine configuration.
2217
2218      .. note::
2219
2220         To add packages to the root filesystem, see the various
2221         \*:term:`RDEPENDS` and \*:term:`RRECOMMENDS` variables.
2222
2223   :term:`EXTRANATIVEPATH`
2224      A list of subdirectories of
2225      ``${``\ :term:`STAGING_BINDIR_NATIVE`\ ``}``
2226      added to the beginning of the environment variable ``PATH``. As an
2227      example, the following prepends
2228      "${STAGING_BINDIR_NATIVE}/foo:${STAGING_BINDIR_NATIVE}/bar:" to
2229      ``PATH``:
2230      ::
2231
2232         EXTRANATIVEPATH = "foo bar"
2233
2234   :term:`EXTRA_OECMAKE`
2235      Additional `CMake <https://cmake.org/overview/>`__ options. See the
2236      :ref:`cmake <ref-classes-cmake>` class for additional information.
2237
2238   :term:`EXTRA_OECONF`
2239      Additional ``configure`` script options. See
2240      :term:`PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS` for
2241      additional information on passing configure script options.
2242
2243   :term:`EXTRA_OEMAKE`
2244      Additional GNU ``make`` options.
2245
2246      Because the ``EXTRA_OEMAKE`` defaults to "", you need to set the
2247      variable to specify any required GNU options.
2248
2249      :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE` and
2250      :term:`PARALLEL_MAKEINST` also make use of
2251      ``EXTRA_OEMAKE`` to pass the required flags.
2252
2253   :term:`EXTRA_OESCONS`
2254      When inheriting the :ref:`scons <ref-classes-scons>` class, this
2255      variable specifies additional configuration options you want to pass
2256      to the ``scons`` command line.
2257
2258   :term:`EXTRA_USERS_PARAMS`
2259      When inheriting the :ref:`extrausers <ref-classes-extrausers>`
2260      class, this variable provides image level user and group operations.
2261      This is a more global method of providing user and group
2262      configuration as compared to using the
2263      :ref:`useradd <ref-classes-useradd>` class, which ties user and
2264      group configurations to a specific recipe.
2265
2266      The set list of commands you can configure using the
2267      ``EXTRA_USERS_PARAMS`` is shown in the ``extrausers`` class. These
2268      commands map to the normal Unix commands of the same names:
2269      ::
2270
2271         # EXTRA_USERS_PARAMS = "\
2272         # useradd -p '' tester; \
2273         # groupadd developers; \
2274         # userdel nobody; \
2275         # groupdel -g video; \
2276         # groupmod -g 1020 developers; \
2277         # usermod -s /bin/sh tester; \
2278         # "
2279
2280   :term:`FEATURE_PACKAGES`
2281      Defines one or more packages to include in an image when a specific
2282      item is included in :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES`.
2283      When setting the value, ``FEATURE_PACKAGES`` should have the name of
2284      the feature item as an override. Here is an example:
2285      ::
2286
2287         FEATURE_PACKAGES_widget = "package1 package2"
2288
2289      In this example, if "widget" were added to ``IMAGE_FEATURES``,
2290      package1 and package2 would be included in the image.
2291
2292      .. note::
2293
2294         Packages installed by features defined through ``FEATURE_PACKAGES``
2295         are often package groups. While similarly named, you should not
2296         confuse the ``FEATURE_PACKAGES`` variable with package groups, which
2297         are discussed elsewhere in the documentation.
2298
2299   :term:`FEED_DEPLOYDIR_BASE_URI`
2300      Points to the base URL of the server and location within the
2301      document-root that provides the metadata and packages required by
2302      OPKG to support runtime package management of IPK packages. You set
2303      this variable in your ``local.conf`` file.
2304
2305      Consider the following example:
2306      ::
2307
2308         FEED_DEPLOYDIR_BASE_URI = "http://192.168.7.1/BOARD-dir"
2309
2310      This example assumes you are serving
2311      your packages over HTTP and your databases are located in a directory
2312      named ``BOARD-dir``, which is underneath your HTTP server's
2313      document-root. In this case, the OpenEmbedded build system generates
2314      a set of configuration files for you in your target that work with
2315      the feed.
2316
2317   :term:`FILES`
2318      The list of files and directories that are placed in a package. The
2319      :term:`PACKAGES` variable lists the packages
2320      generated by a recipe.
2321
2322      To use the ``FILES`` variable, provide a package name override that
2323      identifies the resulting package. Then, provide a space-separated
2324      list of files or paths that identify the files you want included as
2325      part of the resulting package. Here is an example:
2326      ::
2327
2328         FILES_${PN} += "${bindir}/mydir1 ${bindir}/mydir2/myfile"
2329
2330      .. note::
2331
2332         -  When specifying files or paths, you can pattern match using
2333            Python's
2334            `glob <https://docs.python.org/3/library/glob.html>`_
2335            syntax. For details on the syntax, see the documentation by
2336            following the previous link.
2337
2338         -  When specifying paths as part of the ``FILES`` variable, it is
2339            good practice to use appropriate path variables. For example,
2340            use ``${sysconfdir}`` rather than ``/etc``, or ``${bindir}``
2341            rather than ``/usr/bin``. You can find a list of these
2342            variables at the top of the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` file in
2343            the :term:`Source Directory`. You will also
2344            find the default values of the various ``FILES_*`` variables in
2345            this file.
2346
2347      If some of the files you provide with the ``FILES`` variable are
2348      editable and you know they should not be overwritten during the
2349      package update process by the Package Management System (PMS), you
2350      can identify these files so that the PMS will not overwrite them. See
2351      the :term:`CONFFILES` variable for information on
2352      how to identify these files to the PMS.
2353
2354   :term:`FILES_SOLIBSDEV`
2355      Defines the file specification to match
2356      :term:`SOLIBSDEV`. In other words,
2357      ``FILES_SOLIBSDEV`` defines the full path name of the development
2358      symbolic link (symlink) for shared libraries on the target platform.
2359
2360      The following statement from the ``bitbake.conf`` shows how it is
2361      set:
2362      ::
2363
2364         FILES_SOLIBSDEV ?= "${base_libdir}/lib*${SOLIBSDEV} ${libdir}/lib*${SOLIBSDEV}"
2365
2366   :term:`FILESEXTRAPATHS`
2367      Extends the search path the OpenEmbedded build system uses when
2368      looking for files and patches as it processes recipes and append
2369      files. The default directories BitBake uses when it processes recipes
2370      are initially defined by the :term:`FILESPATH`
2371      variable. You can extend ``FILESPATH`` variable by using
2372      ``FILESEXTRAPATHS``.
2373
2374      Best practices dictate that you accomplish this by using
2375      ``FILESEXTRAPATHS`` from within a ``.bbappend`` file and that you
2376      prepend paths as follows:
2377      ::
2378
2379         FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend := "${THISDIR}/${PN}:"
2380
2381      In the above example, the build system first
2382      looks for files in a directory that has the same name as the
2383      corresponding append file.
2384
2385      .. note::
2386
2387         When extending ``FILESEXTRAPATHS``, be sure to use the immediate
2388         expansion (``:=``) operator. Immediate expansion makes sure that
2389         BitBake evaluates :term:`THISDIR` at the time the
2390         directive is encountered rather than at some later time when
2391         expansion might result in a directory that does not contain the
2392         files you need.
2393
2394         Also, include the trailing separating colon character if you are
2395         prepending. The trailing colon character is necessary because you
2396         are directing BitBake to extend the path by prepending directories
2397         to the search path.
2398
2399      Here is another common use:
2400      ::
2401
2402         FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend := "${THISDIR}/files:"
2403
2404      In this example, the build system extends the
2405      ``FILESPATH`` variable to include a directory named ``files`` that is
2406      in the same directory as the corresponding append file.
2407
2408      This next example specifically adds three paths:
2409      ::
2410
2411         FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend := "path_1:path_2:path_3:"
2412
2413      A final example shows how you can extend the search path and include
2414      a :term:`MACHINE`-specific override, which is useful
2415      in a BSP layer:
2416      ::
2417
2418          FILESEXTRAPATHS_prepend_intel-x86-common := "${THISDIR}/${PN}:"
2419
2420      The previous statement appears in the
2421      ``linux-yocto-dev.bbappend`` file, which is found in the
2422      :ref:`overview-manual/development-environment:yocto project source repositories` in
2423      ``meta-intel/common/recipes-kernel/linux``. Here, the machine
2424      override is a special :term:`PACKAGE_ARCH`
2425      definition for multiple ``meta-intel`` machines.
2426
2427      .. note::
2428
2429         For a layer that supports a single BSP, the override could just be
2430         the value of ``MACHINE``.
2431
2432      By prepending paths in ``.bbappend`` files, you allow multiple append
2433      files that reside in different layers but are used for the same
2434      recipe to correctly extend the path.
2435
2436   :term:`FILESOVERRIDES`
2437      A subset of :term:`OVERRIDES` used by the
2438      OpenEmbedded build system for creating
2439      :term:`FILESPATH`. The ``FILESOVERRIDES`` variable
2440      uses overrides to automatically extend the
2441      :term:`FILESPATH` variable. For an example of how
2442      that works, see the :term:`FILESPATH` variable
2443      description. Additionally, you find more information on how overrides
2444      are handled in the
2445      ":ref:`bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:conditional syntax (overrides)`"
2446      section of the BitBake User Manual.
2447
2448      By default, the ``FILESOVERRIDES`` variable is defined as:
2449      ::
2450
2451         FILESOVERRIDES = "${TRANSLATED_TARGET_ARCH}:${MACHINEOVERRIDES}:${DISTROOVERRIDES}"
2452
2453      .. note::
2454
2455         Do not hand-edit the ``FILESOVERRIDES`` variable. The values match up
2456         with expected overrides and are used in an expected manner by the
2457         build system.
2458
2459   :term:`FILESPATH`
2460      The default set of directories the OpenEmbedded build system uses
2461      when searching for patches and files.
2462
2463      During the build process, BitBake searches each directory in
2464      ``FILESPATH`` in the specified order when looking for files and
2465      patches specified by each ``file://`` URI in a recipe's
2466      :term:`SRC_URI` statements.
2467
2468      The default value for the ``FILESPATH`` variable is defined in the
2469      ``base.bbclass`` class found in ``meta/classes`` in the
2470      :term:`Source Directory`:
2471      ::
2472
2473         FILESPATH = "${@base_set_filespath(["${FILE_DIRNAME}/${BP}", \
2474             "${FILE_DIRNAME}/${BPN}", "${FILE_DIRNAME}/files"], d)}"
2475
2476      The
2477      ``FILESPATH`` variable is automatically extended using the overrides
2478      from the :term:`FILESOVERRIDES` variable.
2479
2480      .. note::
2481
2482         -  Do not hand-edit the ``FILESPATH`` variable. If you want the
2483            build system to look in directories other than the defaults,
2484            extend the ``FILESPATH`` variable by using the
2485            :term:`FILESEXTRAPATHS` variable.
2486
2487         -  Be aware that the default ``FILESPATH`` directories do not map
2488            to directories in custom layers where append files
2489            (``.bbappend``) are used. If you want the build system to find
2490            patches or files that reside with your append files, you need
2491            to extend the ``FILESPATH`` variable by using the
2492            ``FILESEXTRAPATHS`` variable.
2493
2494      You can take advantage of this searching behavior in useful ways. For
2495      example, consider a case where the following directory structure
2496      exists for general and machine-specific configurations:
2497      ::
2498
2499         files/defconfig
2500         files/MACHINEA/defconfig
2501         files/MACHINEB/defconfig
2502
2503      Also in the example, the ``SRC_URI`` statement contains
2504      "file://defconfig". Given this scenario, you can set
2505      :term:`MACHINE` to "MACHINEA" and cause the build
2506      system to use files from ``files/MACHINEA``. Set ``MACHINE`` to
2507      "MACHINEB" and the build system uses files from ``files/MACHINEB``.
2508      Finally, for any machine other than "MACHINEA" and "MACHINEB", the
2509      build system uses files from ``files/defconfig``.
2510
2511      You can find out more about the patching process in the
2512      ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:patching`" section
2513      in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual and the
2514      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:patching code`" section in
2515      the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. See the
2516      :ref:`ref-tasks-patch` task as well.
2517
2518   :term:`FILESYSTEM_PERMS_TABLES`
2519      Allows you to define your own file permissions settings table as part
2520      of your configuration for the packaging process. For example, suppose
2521      you need a consistent set of custom permissions for a set of groups
2522      and users across an entire work project. It is best to do this in the
2523      packages themselves but this is not always possible.
2524
2525      By default, the OpenEmbedded build system uses the ``fs-perms.txt``,
2526      which is located in the ``meta/files`` folder in the :term:`Source Directory`.
2527      If you create your own file
2528      permissions setting table, you should place it in your layer or the
2529      distro's layer.
2530
2531      You define the ``FILESYSTEM_PERMS_TABLES`` variable in the
2532      ``conf/local.conf`` file, which is found in the :term:`Build Directory`,
2533      to point to your custom
2534      ``fs-perms.txt``. You can specify more than a single file permissions
2535      setting table. The paths you specify to these files must be defined
2536      within the :term:`BBPATH` variable.
2537
2538      For guidance on how to create your own file permissions settings
2539      table file, examine the existing ``fs-perms.txt``.
2540
2541   :term:`FIT_GENERATE_KEYS`
2542      Decides whether to generate the keys for signing fitImage if they
2543      don't already exist. The keys are created in ``UBOOT_SIGN_KEYDIR``.
2544      The default value is 0.
2545
2546   :term:`FIT_HASH_ALG`
2547      Specifies the hash algorithm used in creating the FIT Image. For e.g. sha256.
2548
2549   :term:`FIT_KEY_GENRSA_ARGS`
2550      Arguments to openssl genrsa for generating RSA private key for signing
2551      fitImage. The default value is "-F4". i.e. the public exponent 65537 to
2552      use.
2553
2554   :term:`FIT_KEY_REQ_ARGS`
2555      Arguments to openssl req for generating certificate for signing fitImage.
2556      The default value is "-batch -new". batch for non interactive mode
2557      and new for generating new keys.
2558
2559   :term:`FIT_KEY_SIGN_PKCS`
2560      Format for public key ceritifcate used in signing fitImage.
2561      The default value is "x509".
2562
2563   :term:`FIT_SIGN_ALG`
2564      Specifies the signature algorithm used in creating the FIT Image.
2565      For e.g. rsa2048.
2566
2567   :term:`FIT_SIGN_NUMBITS`
2568      Size of private key in number of bits used in fitImage. The default
2569      value is "2048".
2570
2571   :term:`FONT_EXTRA_RDEPENDS`
2572      When inheriting the :ref:`fontcache <ref-classes-fontcache>` class,
2573      this variable specifies the runtime dependencies for font packages.
2574      By default, the ``FONT_EXTRA_RDEPENDS`` is set to "fontconfig-utils".
2575
2576   :term:`FONT_PACKAGES`
2577      When inheriting the :ref:`fontcache <ref-classes-fontcache>` class,
2578      this variable identifies packages containing font files that need to
2579      be cached by Fontconfig. By default, the ``fontcache`` class assumes
2580      that fonts are in the recipe's main package (i.e.
2581      ``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}``). Use this variable if fonts you
2582      need are in a package other than that main package.
2583
2584   :term:`FORCE_RO_REMOVE`
2585      Forces the removal of the packages listed in ``ROOTFS_RO_UNNEEDED``
2586      during the generation of the root filesystem.
2587
2588      Set the variable to "1" to force the removal of these packages.
2589
2590   :term:`FULL_OPTIMIZATION`
2591      The options to pass in ``TARGET_CFLAGS`` and ``CFLAGS`` when
2592      compiling an optimized system. This variable defaults to "-O2 -pipe
2593      ${DEBUG_FLAGS}".
2594
2595   :term:`GCCPIE`
2596      Enables Position Independent Executables (PIE) within the GNU C
2597      Compiler (GCC). Enabling PIE in the GCC makes Return Oriented
2598      Programming (ROP) attacks much more difficult to execute.
2599
2600      By default the ``security_flags.inc`` file enables PIE by setting the
2601      variable as follows:
2602      ::
2603
2604         GCCPIE ?= "--enable-default-pie"
2605
2606   :term:`GCCVERSION`
2607      Specifies the default version of the GNU C Compiler (GCC) used for
2608      compilation. By default, ``GCCVERSION`` is set to "8.x" in the
2609      ``meta/conf/distro/include/tcmode-default.inc`` include file:
2610      ::
2611
2612         GCCVERSION ?= "8.%"
2613
2614      You can override this value by setting it in a
2615      configuration file such as the ``local.conf``.
2616
2617   :term:`GDB`
2618      The minimal command and arguments to run the GNU Debugger.
2619
2620   :term:`GITDIR`
2621      The directory in which a local copy of a Git repository is stored
2622      when it is cloned.
2623
2624   :term:`GLIBC_GENERATE_LOCALES`
2625      Specifies the list of GLIBC locales to generate should you not wish
2626      to generate all LIBC locals, which can be time consuming.
2627
2628      .. note::
2629
2630         If you specifically remove the locale ``en_US.UTF-8``, you must set
2631         :term:`IMAGE_LINGUAS` appropriately.
2632
2633      You can set ``GLIBC_GENERATE_LOCALES`` in your ``local.conf`` file.
2634      By default, all locales are generated.
2635      ::
2636
2637         GLIBC_GENERATE_LOCALES = "en_GB.UTF-8 en_US.UTF-8"
2638
2639   :term:`GROUPADD_PARAM`
2640      When inheriting the :ref:`useradd <ref-classes-useradd>` class,
2641      this variable specifies for a package what parameters should be
2642      passed to the ``groupadd`` command if you wish to add a group to the
2643      system when the package is installed.
2644
2645      Here is an example from the ``dbus`` recipe:
2646      ::
2647
2648         GROUPADD_PARAM_${PN} = "-r netdev"
2649
2650      For information on the standard Linux shell command
2651      ``groupadd``, see http://linux.die.net/man/8/groupadd.
2652
2653   :term:`GROUPMEMS_PARAM`
2654      When inheriting the :ref:`useradd <ref-classes-useradd>` class,
2655      this variable specifies for a package what parameters should be
2656      passed to the ``groupmems`` command if you wish to modify the members
2657      of a group when the package is installed.
2658
2659      For information on the standard Linux shell command ``groupmems``,
2660      see http://linux.die.net/man/8/groupmems.
2661
2662   :term:`GRUB_GFXSERIAL`
2663      Configures the GNU GRand Unified Bootloader (GRUB) to have graphics
2664      and serial in the boot menu. Set this variable to "1" in your
2665      ``local.conf`` or distribution configuration file to enable graphics
2666      and serial in the menu.
2667
2668      See the :ref:`grub-efi <ref-classes-grub-efi>` class for more
2669      information on how this variable is used.
2670
2671   :term:`GRUB_OPTS`
2672      Additional options to add to the GNU GRand Unified Bootloader (GRUB)
2673      configuration. Use a semi-colon character (``;``) to separate
2674      multiple options.
2675
2676      The ``GRUB_OPTS`` variable is optional. See the
2677      :ref:`grub-efi <ref-classes-grub-efi>` class for more information
2678      on how this variable is used.
2679
2680   :term:`GRUB_TIMEOUT`
2681      Specifies the timeout before executing the default ``LABEL`` in the
2682      GNU GRand Unified Bootloader (GRUB).
2683
2684      The ``GRUB_TIMEOUT`` variable is optional. See the
2685      :ref:`grub-efi <ref-classes-grub-efi>` class for more information
2686      on how this variable is used.
2687
2688   :term:`GTKIMMODULES_PACKAGES`
2689      When inheriting the
2690      :ref:`gtk-immodules-cache <ref-classes-gtk-immodules-cache>` class,
2691      this variable specifies the packages that contain the GTK+ input
2692      method modules being installed when the modules are in packages other
2693      than the main package.
2694
2695   :term:`HOMEPAGE`
2696      Website where more information about the software the recipe is
2697      building can be found.
2698
2699   :term:`HOST_ARCH`
2700      The name of the target architecture, which is normally the same as
2701      :term:`TARGET_ARCH`. The OpenEmbedded build system
2702      supports many architectures. Here is an example list of architectures
2703      supported. This list is by no means complete as the architecture is
2704      configurable:
2705
2706      - arm
2707      - i586
2708      - x86_64
2709      - powerpc
2710      - powerpc64
2711      - mips
2712      - mipsel
2713
2714   :term:`HOST_CC_ARCH`
2715      Specifies architecture-specific compiler flags that are passed to the
2716      C compiler.
2717
2718      Default initialization for ``HOST_CC_ARCH`` varies depending on what
2719      is being built:
2720
2721      -  :term:`TARGET_CC_ARCH` when building for the
2722         target
2723
2724      -  :term:`BUILD_CC_ARCH` when building for the build host (i.e.
2725         ``-native``)
2726
2727      -  ``BUILDSDK_CC_ARCH`` when building for an SDK (i.e.
2728         ``nativesdk-``)
2729
2730   :term:`HOST_OS`
2731      Specifies the name of the target operating system, which is normally
2732      the same as the :term:`TARGET_OS`. The variable can
2733      be set to "linux" for ``glibc``-based systems and to "linux-musl" for
2734      ``musl``. For ARM/EABI targets, there are also "linux-gnueabi" and
2735      "linux-musleabi" values possible.
2736
2737   :term:`HOST_PREFIX`
2738      Specifies the prefix for the cross-compile toolchain. ``HOST_PREFIX``
2739      is normally the same as :term:`TARGET_PREFIX`.
2740
2741   :term:`HOST_SYS`
2742      Specifies the system, including the architecture and the operating
2743      system, for which the build is occurring in the context of the
2744      current recipe.
2745
2746      The OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets this variable based
2747      on :term:`HOST_ARCH`,
2748      :term:`HOST_VENDOR`, and
2749      :term:`HOST_OS` variables.
2750
2751      .. note::
2752
2753         You do not need to set the variable yourself.
2754
2755      Consider these two examples:
2756
2757      -  Given a native recipe on a 32-bit x86 machine running Linux, the
2758         value is "i686-linux".
2759
2760      -  Given a recipe being built for a little-endian MIPS target running
2761         Linux, the value might be "mipsel-linux".
2762
2763   :term:`HOSTTOOLS`
2764      A space-separated list (filter) of tools on the build host that
2765      should be allowed to be called from within build tasks. Using this
2766      filter helps reduce the possibility of host contamination. If a tool
2767      specified in the value of ``HOSTTOOLS`` is not found on the build
2768      host, the OpenEmbedded build system produces an error and the build
2769      is not started.
2770
2771      For additional information, see
2772      :term:`HOSTTOOLS_NONFATAL`.
2773
2774   :term:`HOSTTOOLS_NONFATAL`
2775      A space-separated list (filter) of tools on the build host that
2776      should be allowed to be called from within build tasks. Using this
2777      filter helps reduce the possibility of host contamination. Unlike
2778      :term:`HOSTTOOLS`, the OpenEmbedded build system
2779      does not produce an error if a tool specified in the value of
2780      ``HOSTTOOLS_NONFATAL`` is not found on the build host. Thus, you can
2781      use ``HOSTTOOLS_NONFATAL`` to filter optional host tools.
2782
2783   :term:`HOST_VENDOR`
2784      Specifies the name of the vendor. ``HOST_VENDOR`` is normally the
2785      same as :term:`TARGET_VENDOR`.
2786
2787   :term:`ICECC_DISABLED`
2788      Disables or enables the ``icecc`` (Icecream) function. For more
2789      information on this function and best practices for using this
2790      variable, see the ":ref:`icecc.bbclass <ref-classes-icecc>`"
2791      section.
2792
2793      Setting this variable to "1" in your ``local.conf`` disables the
2794      function:
2795      ::
2796
2797         ICECC_DISABLED ??= "1"
2798
2799      To enable the function, set the variable as follows:
2800      ::
2801
2802         ICECC_DISABLED = ""
2803
2804   :term:`ICECC_ENV_EXEC`
2805      Points to the ``icecc-create-env`` script that you provide. This
2806      variable is used by the :ref:`icecc <ref-classes-icecc>` class. You
2807      set this variable in your ``local.conf`` file.
2808
2809      If you do not point to a script that you provide, the OpenEmbedded
2810      build system uses the default script provided by the
2811      ``icecc-create-env.bb`` recipe, which is a modified version and not
2812      the one that comes with ``icecc``.
2813
2814   :term:`ICECC_PARALLEL_MAKE`
2815      Extra options passed to the ``make`` command during the
2816      :ref:`ref-tasks-compile` task that specify parallel
2817      compilation. This variable usually takes the form of "-j x", where x
2818      represents the maximum number of parallel threads ``make`` can run.
2819
2820      .. note::
2821
2822         The options passed affect builds on all enabled machines on the
2823         network, which are machines running the ``iceccd`` daemon.
2824
2825      If your enabled machines support multiple cores, coming up with the
2826      maximum number of parallel threads that gives you the best
2827      performance could take some experimentation since machine speed,
2828      network lag, available memory, and existing machine loads can all
2829      affect build time. Consequently, unlike the
2830      :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE` variable, there is no
2831      rule-of-thumb for setting ``ICECC_PARALLEL_MAKE`` to achieve optimal
2832      performance.
2833
2834      If you do not set ``ICECC_PARALLEL_MAKE``, the build system does not
2835      use it (i.e. the system does not detect and assign the number of
2836      cores as is done with ``PARALLEL_MAKE``).
2837
2838   :term:`ICECC_PATH`
2839      The location of the ``icecc`` binary. You can set this variable in
2840      your ``local.conf`` file. If your ``local.conf`` file does not define
2841      this variable, the :ref:`icecc <ref-classes-icecc>` class attempts
2842      to define it by locating ``icecc`` using ``which``.
2843
2844   :term:`ICECC_USER_CLASS_BL`
2845      Identifies user classes that you do not want the Icecream distributed
2846      compile support to consider. This variable is used by the
2847      :ref:`icecc <ref-classes-icecc>` class. You set this variable in
2848      your ``local.conf`` file.
2849
2850      When you list classes using this variable, you are "blacklisting"
2851      them from distributed compilation across remote hosts. Any classes
2852      you list will be distributed and compiled locally.
2853
2854   :term:`ICECC_USER_PACKAGE_BL`
2855      Identifies user recipes that you do not want the Icecream distributed
2856      compile support to consider. This variable is used by the
2857      :ref:`icecc <ref-classes-icecc>` class. You set this variable in
2858      your ``local.conf`` file.
2859
2860      When you list packages using this variable, you are "blacklisting"
2861      them from distributed compilation across remote hosts. Any packages
2862      you list will be distributed and compiled locally.
2863
2864   :term:`ICECC_USER_PACKAGE_WL`
2865      Identifies user recipes that use an empty
2866      :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE` variable that you want to
2867      force remote distributed compilation on using the Icecream
2868      distributed compile support. This variable is used by the
2869      :ref:`icecc <ref-classes-icecc>` class. You set this variable in
2870      your ``local.conf`` file.
2871
2872   :term:`IMAGE_BASENAME`
2873      The base name of image output files. This variable defaults to the
2874      recipe name (``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}``).
2875
2876   :term:`IMAGE_EFI_BOOT_FILES`
2877      A space-separated list of files installed into the boot partition
2878      when preparing an image using the Wic tool with the
2879      ``bootimg-efi`` source plugin. By default,
2880      the files are
2881      installed under the same name as the source files. To change the
2882      installed name, separate it from the original name with a semi-colon
2883      (;). Source files need to be located in
2884      :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE`. Here are two
2885      examples:
2886      ::
2887
2888         IMAGE_EFI_BOOT_FILES = "${KERNEL_IMAGETYPE};bz2"
2889         IMAGE_EFI_BOOT_FILES = "${KERNEL_IMAGETYPE} microcode.cpio"
2890
2891      Alternatively, source files can be picked up using a glob pattern. In
2892      this case, the destination file must have the same name as the base
2893      name of the source file path. To install files into a directory
2894      within the target location, pass its name after a semi-colon (;).
2895      Here are two examples:
2896      ::
2897
2898         IMAGE_EFI_BOOT_FILES = "boot/loader/*"
2899         IMAGE_EFI_BOOT_FILES = "boot/loader/*;boot/"
2900
2901      The first example
2902      installs all files from ``${DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE}/boot/loader/``
2903      into the root of the target partition. The second example installs
2904      the same files into a ``boot`` directory within the target partition.
2905
2906      You can find information on how to use the Wic tool in the
2907      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:creating partitioned images using wic`"
2908      section of the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. Reference
2909      material for Wic is located in the
2910      ":doc:`/ref-manual/kickstart`" chapter.
2911
2912   :term:`IMAGE_BOOT_FILES`
2913      A space-separated list of files installed into the boot partition
2914      when preparing an image using the Wic tool with the
2915      ``bootimg-partition`` source plugin. By default,
2916      the files are
2917      installed under the same name as the source files. To change the
2918      installed name, separate it from the original name with a semi-colon
2919      (;). Source files need to be located in
2920      :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE`. Here are two
2921      examples:
2922      ::
2923
2924         IMAGE_BOOT_FILES = "u-boot.img uImage;kernel"
2925         IMAGE_BOOT_FILES = "u-boot.${UBOOT_SUFFIX} ${KERNEL_IMAGETYPE}"
2926
2927      Alternatively, source files can be picked up using a glob pattern. In
2928      this case, the destination file must have the same name as the base
2929      name of the source file path. To install files into a directory
2930      within the target location, pass its name after a semi-colon (;).
2931      Here are two examples:
2932      ::
2933
2934         IMAGE_BOOT_FILES = "bcm2835-bootfiles/*"
2935         IMAGE_BOOT_FILES = "bcm2835-bootfiles/*;boot/"
2936
2937      The first example
2938      installs all files from ``${DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE}/bcm2835-bootfiles``
2939      into the root of the target partition. The second example installs
2940      the same files into a ``boot`` directory within the target partition.
2941
2942      You can find information on how to use the Wic tool in the
2943      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:creating partitioned images using wic`"
2944      section of the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. Reference
2945      material for Wic is located in the
2946      ":doc:`/ref-manual/kickstart`" chapter.
2947
2948   :term:`IMAGE_CLASSES`
2949      A list of classes that all images should inherit. You typically use
2950      this variable to specify the list of classes that register the
2951      different types of images the OpenEmbedded build system creates.
2952
2953      The default value for ``IMAGE_CLASSES`` is ``image_types``. You can
2954      set this variable in your ``local.conf`` or in a distribution
2955      configuration file.
2956
2957      For more information, see ``meta/classes/image_types.bbclass`` in the
2958      :term:`Source Directory`.
2959
2960   :term:`IMAGE_CMD`
2961      Specifies the command to create the image file for a specific image
2962      type, which corresponds to the value set set in
2963      :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES`, (e.g. ``ext3``,
2964      ``btrfs``, and so forth). When setting this variable, you should use
2965      an override for the associated type. Here is an example:
2966      ::
2967
2968         IMAGE_CMD_jffs2 = "mkfs.jffs2 --root=${IMAGE_ROOTFS} \
2969             --faketime --output=${DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE}/${IMAGE_NAME}.rootfs.jffs2 \
2970             ${EXTRA_IMAGECMD}"
2971
2972      You typically do not need to set this variable unless you are adding
2973      support for a new image type. For more examples on how to set this
2974      variable, see the :ref:`image_types <ref-classes-image_types>`
2975      class file, which is ``meta/classes/image_types.bbclass``.
2976
2977   :term:`IMAGE_DEVICE_TABLES`
2978      Specifies one or more files that contain custom device tables that
2979      are passed to the ``makedevs`` command as part of creating an image.
2980      These files list basic device nodes that should be created under
2981      ``/dev`` within the image. If ``IMAGE_DEVICE_TABLES`` is not set,
2982      ``files/device_table-minimal.txt`` is used, which is located by
2983      :term:`BBPATH`. For details on how you should write
2984      device table files, see ``meta/files/device_table-minimal.txt`` as an
2985      example.
2986
2987   :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES`
2988      The primary list of features to include in an image. Typically, you
2989      configure this variable in an image recipe. Although you can use this
2990      variable from your ``local.conf`` file, which is found in the
2991      :term:`Build Directory`, best practices dictate that you do
2992      not.
2993
2994      .. note::
2995
2996         To enable extra features from outside the image recipe, use the
2997         :term:`EXTRA_IMAGE_FEATURES` variable.
2998
2999      For a list of image features that ships with the Yocto Project, see
3000      the ":ref:`ref-features-image`" section.
3001
3002      For an example that shows how to customize your image by using this
3003      variable, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:customizing images using custom \`\`image_features\`\` and \`\`extra_image_features\`\``"
3004      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
3005
3006   :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES`
3007      Specifies the formats the OpenEmbedded build system uses during the
3008      build when creating the root filesystem. For example, setting
3009      ``IMAGE_FSTYPES`` as follows causes the build system to create root
3010      filesystems using two formats: ``.ext3`` and ``.tar.bz2``:
3011      ::
3012
3013         IMAGE_FSTYPES = "ext3 tar.bz2"
3014
3015      For the complete list of supported image formats from which you can
3016      choose, see :term:`IMAGE_TYPES`.
3017
3018      .. note::
3019
3020         -  If an image recipe uses the "inherit image" line and you are
3021            setting ``IMAGE_FSTYPES`` inside the recipe, you must set
3022            ``IMAGE_FSTYPES`` prior to using the "inherit image" line.
3023
3024         -  Due to the way the OpenEmbedded build system processes this
3025            variable, you cannot update its contents by using ``_append``
3026            or ``_prepend``. You must use the ``+=`` operator to add one or
3027            more options to the ``IMAGE_FSTYPES`` variable.
3028
3029   :term:`IMAGE_INSTALL`
3030      Used by recipes to specify the packages to install into an image
3031      through the :ref:`image <ref-classes-image>` class. Use the
3032      ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` variable with care to avoid ordering issues.
3033
3034      Image recipes set ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` to specify the packages to
3035      install into an image through ``image.bbclass``. Additionally,
3036      "helper" classes such as the
3037      :ref:`core-image <ref-classes-core-image>` class exist that can
3038      take lists used with ``IMAGE_FEATURES`` and turn them into
3039      auto-generated entries in ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` in addition to its
3040      default contents.
3041
3042      When you use this variable, it is best to use it as follows:
3043      ::
3044
3045         IMAGE_INSTALL_append = " package-name"
3046
3047      Be sure to include the space
3048      between the quotation character and the start of the package name or
3049      names.
3050
3051      .. note::
3052
3053         -  When working with a
3054            :ref:`core-image-minimal-initramfs <ref-manual/images:images>`
3055            image, do not use the ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` variable to specify
3056            packages for installation. Instead, use the
3057            :term:`PACKAGE_INSTALL` variable, which
3058            allows the initial RAM filesystem (initramfs) recipe to use a
3059            fixed set of packages and not be affected by ``IMAGE_INSTALL``.
3060            For information on creating an initramfs, see the
3061            ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building an initial ram filesystem (initramfs) image`"
3062            section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
3063
3064         -  Using ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` with the
3065            :ref:`+= <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:appending (+=) and prepending (=+) with spaces>`
3066            BitBake operator within the ``/conf/local.conf`` file or from
3067            within an image recipe is not recommended. Use of this operator
3068            in these ways can cause ordering issues. Since
3069            ``core-image.bbclass`` sets ``IMAGE_INSTALL`` to a default
3070            value using the
3071            :ref:`?= <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:setting a default value (?=)>`
3072            operator, using a ``+=`` operation against ``IMAGE_INSTALL``
3073            results in unexpected behavior when used within
3074            ``conf/local.conf``. Furthermore, the same operation from
3075            within an image recipe may or may not succeed depending on the
3076            specific situation. In both these cases, the behavior is
3077            contrary to how most users expect the ``+=`` operator to work.
3078
3079   :term:`IMAGE_LINGUAS`
3080      Specifies the list of locales to install into the image during the
3081      root filesystem construction process. The OpenEmbedded build system
3082      automatically splits locale files, which are used for localization,
3083      into separate packages. Setting the ``IMAGE_LINGUAS`` variable
3084      ensures that any locale packages that correspond to packages already
3085      selected for installation into the image are also installed. Here is
3086      an example:
3087      ::
3088
3089         IMAGE_LINGUAS = "pt-br de-de"
3090
3091      In this example, the build system ensures any Brazilian Portuguese
3092      and German locale files that correspond to packages in the image are
3093      installed (i.e. ``*-locale-pt-br`` and ``*-locale-de-de`` as well as
3094      ``*-locale-pt`` and ``*-locale-de``, since some software packages
3095      only provide locale files by language and not by country-specific
3096      language).
3097
3098      See the :term:`GLIBC_GENERATE_LOCALES`
3099      variable for information on generating GLIBC locales.
3100
3101
3102   :term:`IMAGE_LINK_NAME`
3103      The name of the output image symlink (which does not include
3104      the version part as :term:`IMAGE_NAME` does). The default value
3105      is derived using the :term:`IMAGE_BASENAME` and :term:`MACHINE`
3106      variables:
3107      ::
3108
3109         IMAGE_LINK_NAME ?= "${IMAGE_BASENAME}-${MACHINE}"
3110
3111
3112   :term:`IMAGE_MANIFEST`
3113      The manifest file for the image. This file lists all the installed
3114      packages that make up the image. The file contains package
3115      information on a line-per-package basis as follows:
3116      ::
3117
3118          packagename packagearch version
3119
3120      The :ref:`image <ref-classes-image>` class defines the manifest
3121      file as follows:
3122      ::
3123
3124         IMAGE_MANIFEST ="${DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE}/${IMAGE_NAME}.rootfs.manifest"
3125
3126      The location is
3127      derived using the :term:`DEPLOY_DIR_IMAGE`
3128      and :term:`IMAGE_NAME` variables. You can find
3129      information on how the image is created in the ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:image generation`"
3130      section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual.
3131
3132   :term:`IMAGE_NAME`
3133      The name of the output image files minus the extension. This variable
3134      is derived using the :term:`IMAGE_BASENAME`,
3135      :term:`MACHINE`, and :term:`IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX`
3136      variables:
3137      ::
3138
3139         IMAGE_NAME ?= "${IMAGE_BASENAME}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}"
3140
3141   :term:`IMAGE_NAME_SUFFIX`
3142      Suffix used for the image output file name - defaults to ``".rootfs"``
3143      to distinguish the image file from other files created during image
3144      building; however if this suffix is redundant or not desired you can
3145      clear the value of this variable (set the value to ""). For example,
3146      this is typically cleared in initramfs image recipes.
3147
3148   :term:`IMAGE_OVERHEAD_FACTOR`
3149      Defines a multiplier that the build system applies to the initial
3150      image size for cases when the multiplier times the returned disk
3151      usage value for the image is greater than the sum of
3152      ``IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE`` and ``IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE``. The result of
3153      the multiplier applied to the initial image size creates free disk
3154      space in the image as overhead. By default, the build process uses a
3155      multiplier of 1.3 for this variable. This default value results in
3156      30% free disk space added to the image when this method is used to
3157      determine the final generated image size. You should be aware that
3158      post install scripts and the package management system uses disk
3159      space inside this overhead area. Consequently, the multiplier does
3160      not produce an image with all the theoretical free disk space. See
3161      ``IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE`` for information on how the build system
3162      determines the overall image size.
3163
3164      The default 30% free disk space typically gives the image enough room
3165      to boot and allows for basic post installs while still leaving a
3166      small amount of free disk space. If 30% free space is inadequate, you
3167      can increase the default value. For example, the following setting
3168      gives you 50% free space added to the image:
3169      ::
3170
3171         IMAGE_OVERHEAD_FACTOR = "1.5"
3172
3173      Alternatively, you can ensure a specific amount of free disk space is
3174      added to the image by using the ``IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE``
3175      variable.
3176
3177   :term:`IMAGE_PKGTYPE`
3178      Defines the package type (i.e. DEB, RPM, IPK, or TAR) used by the
3179      OpenEmbedded build system. The variable is defined appropriately by
3180      the :ref:`package_deb <ref-classes-package_deb>`,
3181      :ref:`package_rpm <ref-classes-package_rpm>`,
3182      :ref:`package_ipk <ref-classes-package_ipk>`, or
3183      :ref:`package_tar <ref-classes-package_tar>` class.
3184
3185      .. note::
3186
3187         The ``package_tar`` class is broken and is not supported. It is
3188         recommended that you do not use it.
3189
3190      The :ref:`populate_sdk_* <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` and
3191      :ref:`image <ref-classes-image>` classes use the ``IMAGE_PKGTYPE``
3192      for packaging up images and SDKs.
3193
3194      You should not set the ``IMAGE_PKGTYPE`` manually. Rather, the
3195      variable is set indirectly through the appropriate
3196      :ref:`package_* <ref-classes-package>` class using the
3197      :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES` variable. The
3198      OpenEmbedded build system uses the first package type (e.g. DEB, RPM,
3199      or IPK) that appears with the variable
3200
3201      .. note::
3202
3203         Files using the ``.tar`` format are never used as a substitute
3204         packaging format for DEB, RPM, and IPK formatted files for your image
3205         or SDK.
3206
3207   :term:`IMAGE_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND`
3208      Specifies a list of functions to call once the OpenEmbedded build
3209      system creates the final image output files. You can specify
3210      functions separated by semicolons:
3211      ::
3212
3213         IMAGE_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND += "function; ... "
3214
3215      If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command within the
3216      function, you can use ``${IMAGE_ROOTFS}``, which points to the
3217      directory that becomes the root filesystem image. See the
3218      :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` variable for more
3219      information.
3220
3221   :term:`IMAGE_PREPROCESS_COMMAND`
3222      Specifies a list of functions to call before the OpenEmbedded build
3223      system creates the final image output files. You can specify
3224      functions separated by semicolons:
3225      ::
3226
3227         IMAGE_PREPROCESS_COMMAND += "function; ... "
3228
3229      If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command within the
3230      function, you can use ``${IMAGE_ROOTFS}``, which points to the
3231      directory that becomes the root filesystem image. See the
3232      :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` variable for more
3233      information.
3234
3235   :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS`
3236      The location of the root filesystem while it is under construction
3237      (i.e. during the :ref:`ref-tasks-rootfs` task). This
3238      variable is not configurable. Do not change it.
3239
3240   :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS_ALIGNMENT`
3241      Specifies the alignment for the output image file in Kbytes. If the
3242      size of the image is not a multiple of this value, then the size is
3243      rounded up to the nearest multiple of the value. The default value is
3244      "1". See :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE` for
3245      additional information.
3246
3247   :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE`
3248      Defines additional free disk space created in the image in Kbytes. By
3249      default, this variable is set to "0". This free disk space is added
3250      to the image after the build system determines the image size as
3251      described in ``IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE``.
3252
3253      This variable is particularly useful when you want to ensure that a
3254      specific amount of free disk space is available on a device after an
3255      image is installed and running. For example, to be sure 5 Gbytes of
3256      free disk space is available, set the variable as follows:
3257      ::
3258
3259         IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE = "5242880"
3260
3261      For example, the Yocto Project Build Appliance specifically requests
3262      40 Gbytes of extra space with the line:
3263      ::
3264
3265         IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE = "41943040"
3266
3267   :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE`
3268      Defines the size in Kbytes for the generated image. The OpenEmbedded
3269      build system determines the final size for the generated image using
3270      an algorithm that takes into account the initial disk space used for
3271      the generated image, a requested size for the image, and requested
3272      additional free disk space to be added to the image. Programatically,
3273      the build system determines the final size of the generated image as
3274      follows:
3275      ::
3276
3277         if (image-du * overhead) < rootfs-size:
3278             internal-rootfs-size = rootfs-size + xspace
3279         else:
3280             internal-rootfs-size = (image-du * overhead) + xspace
3281         where:
3282             image-du = Returned value of the du command on the image.
3283             overhead = IMAGE_OVERHEAD_FACTOR
3284             rootfs-size = IMAGE_ROOTFS_SIZE
3285             internal-rootfs-size = Initial root filesystem size before any modifications.
3286             xspace = IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE
3287
3288      See the :term:`IMAGE_OVERHEAD_FACTOR`
3289      and :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS_EXTRA_SPACE`
3290      variables for related information.
3291
3292   :term:`IMAGE_TYPEDEP`
3293      Specifies a dependency from one image type on another. Here is an
3294      example from the :ref:`image-live <ref-classes-image-live>` class:
3295      ::
3296
3297         IMAGE_TYPEDEP_live = "ext3"
3298
3299      In the previous example, the variable ensures that when "live" is
3300      listed with the :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` variable,
3301      the OpenEmbedded build system produces an ``ext3`` image first since
3302      one of the components of the live image is an ``ext3`` formatted
3303      partition containing the root filesystem.
3304
3305   :term:`IMAGE_TYPES`
3306      Specifies the complete list of supported image types by default:
3307
3308      - btrfs
3309      - container
3310      - cpio
3311      - cpio.gz
3312      - cpio.lz4
3313      - cpio.lzma
3314      - cpio.xz
3315      - cramfs
3316      - ext2
3317      - ext2.bz2
3318      - ext2.gz
3319      - ext2.lzma
3320      - ext3
3321      - ext3.gz
3322      - ext4
3323      - ext4.gz
3324      - f2fs
3325      - hddimg
3326      - iso
3327      - jffs2
3328      - jffs2.sum
3329      - multiubi
3330      - squashfs
3331      - squashfs-lz4
3332      - squashfs-lzo
3333      - squashfs-xz
3334      - tar
3335      - tar.bz2
3336      - tar.gz
3337      - tar.lz4
3338      - tar.xz
3339      - tar.zst
3340      - ubi
3341      - ubifs
3342      - wic
3343      - wic.bz2
3344      - wic.gz
3345      - wic.lzma
3346
3347      For more information about these types of images, see
3348      ``meta/classes/image_types*.bbclass`` in the :term:`Source Directory`.
3349
3350   :term:`IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX`
3351      Version suffix that is part of the default :term:`IMAGE_NAME` and
3352      :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME` values.
3353      Defaults to ``"-${DATETIME}"``, however you could set this to a
3354      version string that comes from your external build environment if
3355      desired, and this suffix would then be used consistently across
3356      the build artifacts.
3357
3358   :term:`INC_PR`
3359      Helps define the recipe revision for recipes that share a common
3360      ``include`` file. You can think of this variable as part of the
3361      recipe revision as set from within an include file.
3362
3363      Suppose, for example, you have a set of recipes that are used across
3364      several projects. And, within each of those recipes the revision (its
3365      :term:`PR` value) is set accordingly. In this case, when
3366      the revision of those recipes changes, the burden is on you to find
3367      all those recipes and be sure that they get changed to reflect the
3368      updated version of the recipe. In this scenario, it can get
3369      complicated when recipes that are used in many places and provide
3370      common functionality are upgraded to a new revision.
3371
3372      A more efficient way of dealing with this situation is to set the
3373      ``INC_PR`` variable inside the ``include`` files that the recipes
3374      share and then expand the ``INC_PR`` variable within the recipes to
3375      help define the recipe revision.
3376
3377      The following provides an example that shows how to use the
3378      ``INC_PR`` variable given a common ``include`` file that defines the
3379      variable. Once the variable is defined in the ``include`` file, you
3380      can use the variable to set the ``PR`` values in each recipe. You
3381      will notice that when you set a recipe's ``PR`` you can provide more
3382      granular revisioning by appending values to the ``INC_PR`` variable:
3383      ::
3384
3385         recipes-graphics/xorg-font/xorg-font-common.inc:INC_PR = "r2"
3386         recipes-graphics/xorg-font/encodings_1.0.4.bb:PR = "${INC_PR}.1"
3387         recipes-graphics/xorg-font/font-util_1.3.0.bb:PR = "${INC_PR}.0"
3388         recipes-graphics/xorg-font/font-alias_1.0.3.bb:PR = "${INC_PR}.3"
3389
3390      The
3391      first line of the example establishes the baseline revision to be
3392      used for all recipes that use the ``include`` file. The remaining
3393      lines in the example are from individual recipes and show how the
3394      ``PR`` value is set.
3395
3396   :term:`INCOMPATIBLE_LICENSE`
3397      Specifies a space-separated list of license names (as they would
3398      appear in :term:`LICENSE`) that should be excluded
3399      from the build. Recipes that provide no alternatives to listed
3400      incompatible licenses are not built. Packages that are individually
3401      licensed with the specified incompatible licenses will be deleted.
3402
3403      .. note::
3404
3405         This functionality is only regularly tested using the following
3406         setting:
3407         ::
3408
3409                 INCOMPATIBLE_LICENSE = "GPL-3.0 LGPL-3.0 AGPL-3.0"
3410
3411
3412         Although you can use other settings, you might be required to
3413         remove dependencies on or provide alternatives to components that
3414         are required to produce a functional system image.
3415
3416      .. note::
3417
3418         It is possible to define a list of licenses that are allowed to be
3419         used instead of the licenses that are excluded. To do this, define
3420         a variable ``COMPATIBLE_LICENSES`` with the names of the licences
3421         that are allowed. Then define ``INCOMPATIBLE_LICENSE`` as:
3422         ::
3423
3424                 INCOMPATIBLE_LICENSE = "${@' '.join(sorted(set(d.getVar('AVAILABLE_LICENSES').split()) - set(d.getVar('COMPATIBLE_LICENSES').split())))}"
3425
3426
3427         This will result in ``INCOMPATIBLE_LICENSE`` containing the names of
3428         all licences from :term:`AVAILABLE_LICENSES` except the ones specified
3429         in ``COMPATIBLE_LICENSES`` , thus only allowing the latter licences to
3430         be used.
3431
3432   :term:`INHERIT`
3433      Causes the named class or classes to be inherited globally. Anonymous
3434      functions in the class or classes are not executed for the base
3435      configuration and in each individual recipe. The OpenEmbedded build
3436      system ignores changes to ``INHERIT`` in individual recipes.
3437
3438      For more information on ``INHERIT``, see the
3439      :ref:`bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:\`\`inherit\`\` configuration directive`"
3440      section in the Bitbake User Manual.
3441
3442   :term:`INHERIT_DISTRO`
3443      Lists classes that will be inherited at the distribution level. It is
3444      unlikely that you want to edit this variable.
3445
3446      The default value of the variable is set as follows in the
3447      ``meta/conf/distro/defaultsetup.conf`` file:
3448      ::
3449
3450         INHERIT_DISTRO ?= "debian devshell sstate license"
3451
3452   :term:`INHIBIT_DEFAULT_DEPS`
3453      Prevents the default dependencies, namely the C compiler and standard
3454      C library (libc), from being added to :term:`DEPENDS`.
3455      This variable is usually used within recipes that do not require any
3456      compilation using the C compiler.
3457
3458      Set the variable to "1" to prevent the default dependencies from
3459      being added.
3460
3461   :term:`INHIBIT_PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT`
3462      Prevents the OpenEmbedded build system from splitting out debug
3463      information during packaging. By default, the build system splits out
3464      debugging information during the
3465      :ref:`ref-tasks-package` task. For more information on
3466      how debug information is split out, see the
3467      :term:`PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT_STYLE`
3468      variable.
3469
3470      To prevent the build system from splitting out debug information
3471      during packaging, set the ``INHIBIT_PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT`` variable as
3472      follows:
3473      ::
3474
3475         INHIBIT_PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT = "1"
3476
3477   :term:`INHIBIT_PACKAGE_STRIP`
3478      If set to "1", causes the build to not strip binaries in resulting
3479      packages and prevents the ``-dbg`` package from containing the source
3480      files.
3481
3482      By default, the OpenEmbedded build system strips binaries and puts
3483      the debugging symbols into ``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}-dbg``.
3484      Consequently, you should not set ``INHIBIT_PACKAGE_STRIP`` when you
3485      plan to debug in general.
3486
3487   :term:`INHIBIT_SYSROOT_STRIP`
3488      If set to "1", causes the build to not strip binaries in the
3489      resulting sysroot.
3490
3491      By default, the OpenEmbedded build system strips binaries in the
3492      resulting sysroot. When you specifically set the
3493      ``INHIBIT_SYSROOT_STRIP`` variable to "1" in your recipe, you inhibit
3494      this stripping.
3495
3496      If you want to use this variable, include the
3497      :ref:`staging <ref-classes-staging>` class. This class uses a
3498      ``sys_strip()`` function to test for the variable and acts
3499      accordingly.
3500
3501      .. note::
3502
3503         Use of the ``INHIBIT_SYSROOT_STRIP`` variable occurs in rare and
3504         special circumstances. For example, suppose you are building
3505         bare-metal firmware by using an external GCC toolchain. Furthermore,
3506         even if the toolchain's binaries are strippable, other files exist
3507         that are needed for the build that are not strippable.
3508
3509   :term:`INITRAMFS_FSTYPES`
3510      Defines the format for the output image of an initial RAM filesystem
3511      (initramfs), which is used during boot. Supported formats are the
3512      same as those supported by the
3513      :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` variable.
3514
3515      The default value of this variable, which is set in the
3516      ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` configuration file in the
3517      :term:`Source Directory`, is "cpio.gz". The Linux kernel's
3518      initramfs mechanism, as opposed to the initial RAM filesystem
3519      `initrd <https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Initrd>`__ mechanism, expects
3520      an optionally compressed cpio archive.
3521
3522   :term:`INITRAMFS_IMAGE`
3523      Specifies the :term:`PROVIDES` name of an image
3524      recipe that is used to build an initial RAM filesystem (initramfs)
3525      image. In other words, the ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE`` variable causes an
3526      additional recipe to be built as a dependency to whatever root
3527      filesystem recipe you might be using (e.g. ``core-image-sato``). The
3528      initramfs image recipe you provide should set
3529      :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` to
3530      :term:`INITRAMFS_FSTYPES`.
3531
3532      An initramfs image provides a temporary root filesystem used for
3533      early system initialization (e.g. loading of modules needed to locate
3534      and mount the "real" root filesystem).
3535
3536      .. note::
3537
3538         See the ``meta/recipes-core/images/core-image-minimal-initramfs.bb``
3539         recipe in the :term:`Source Directory`
3540         for an example initramfs recipe. To select this sample recipe as
3541         the one built to provide the initramfs image, set ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE``
3542         to "core-image-minimal-initramfs".
3543
3544      You can also find more information by referencing the
3545      ``meta-poky/conf/local.conf.sample.extended`` configuration file in
3546      the Source Directory, the :ref:`image <ref-classes-image>` class,
3547      and the :ref:`kernel <ref-classes-kernel>` class to see how to use
3548      the ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE`` variable.
3549
3550      If ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE`` is empty, which is the default, then no
3551      initramfs image is built.
3552
3553      For more information, you can also see the
3554      :term:`INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE`
3555      variable, which allows the generated image to be bundled inside the
3556      kernel image. Additionally, for information on creating an initramfs
3557      image, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building an initial ram filesystem (initramfs) image`" section
3558      in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
3559
3560   :term:`INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE`
3561      Controls whether or not the image recipe specified by
3562      :term:`INITRAMFS_IMAGE` is run through an
3563      extra pass
3564      (:ref:`ref-tasks-bundle_initramfs`) during
3565      kernel compilation in order to build a single binary that contains
3566      both the kernel image and the initial RAM filesystem (initramfs)
3567      image. This makes use of the
3568      :term:`CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE` kernel
3569      feature.
3570
3571      .. note::
3572
3573         Using an extra compilation pass to bundle the initramfs avoids a
3574         circular dependency between the kernel recipe and the initramfs
3575         recipe should the initramfs include kernel modules. Should that be
3576         the case, the initramfs recipe depends on the kernel for the
3577         kernel modules, and the kernel depends on the initramfs recipe
3578         since the initramfs is bundled inside the kernel image.
3579
3580      The combined binary is deposited into the ``tmp/deploy`` directory,
3581      which is part of the :term:`Build Directory`.
3582
3583      Setting the variable to "1" in a configuration file causes the
3584      OpenEmbedded build system to generate a kernel image with the
3585      initramfs specified in ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE`` bundled within:
3586      ::
3587
3588         INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE = "1"
3589
3590      By default, the
3591      :ref:`kernel <ref-classes-kernel>` class sets this variable to a
3592      null string as follows:
3593      ::
3594
3595         INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE ?= ""
3596
3597      .. note::
3598
3599         You must set the ``INITRAMFS_IMAGE_BUNDLE`` variable in a
3600         configuration file. You cannot set the variable in a recipe file.
3601
3602      See the
3603      :yocto_git:`local.conf.sample.extended </poky/tree/meta-poky/conf/local.conf.sample.extended>`
3604      file for additional information. Also, for information on creating an
3605      initramfs, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building an initial ram filesystem (initramfs) image`" section
3606      in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
3607
3608   :term:`INITRAMFS_LINK_NAME`
3609      The link name of the initial RAM filesystem image. This variable is
3610      set in the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as
3611      follows:
3612      ::
3613
3614         INITRAMFS_LINK_NAME ?= "initramfs-${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME}"
3615
3616      The value of the
3617      ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME`` variable, which is set in the same
3618      file, has the following value:
3619      ::
3620
3621         KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME ?= "${MACHINE}"
3622
3623      See the :term:`MACHINE` variable for additional
3624      information.
3625
3626   :term:`INITRAMFS_NAME`
3627      The base name of the initial RAM filesystem image. This variable is
3628      set in the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as
3629      follows:
3630      ::
3631
3632         INITRAMFS_NAME ?= "initramfs-${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME}"
3633
3634      The value of the :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME`
3635      variable, which is set in the same file, has the following value:
3636      ::
3637
3638         KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME ?= "${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}"
3639
3640   :term:`INITRD`
3641      Indicates list of filesystem images to concatenate and use as an
3642      initial RAM disk (``initrd``).
3643
3644      The ``INITRD`` variable is an optional variable used with the
3645      :ref:`image-live <ref-classes-image-live>` class.
3646
3647   :term:`INITRD_IMAGE`
3648      When building a "live" bootable image (i.e. when
3649      :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` contains "live"),
3650      ``INITRD_IMAGE`` specifies the image recipe that should be built to
3651      provide the initial RAM disk image. The default value is
3652      "core-image-minimal-initramfs".
3653
3654      See the :ref:`image-live <ref-classes-image-live>` class for more
3655      information.
3656
3657   :term:`INITSCRIPT_NAME`
3658      The filename of the initialization script as installed to
3659      ``${sysconfdir}/init.d``.
3660
3661      This variable is used in recipes when using ``update-rc.d.bbclass``.
3662      The variable is mandatory.
3663
3664   :term:`INITSCRIPT_PACKAGES`
3665      A list of the packages that contain initscripts. If multiple packages
3666      are specified, you need to append the package name to the other
3667      ``INITSCRIPT_*`` as an override.
3668
3669      This variable is used in recipes when using ``update-rc.d.bbclass``.
3670      The variable is optional and defaults to the :term:`PN`
3671      variable.
3672
3673   :term:`INITSCRIPT_PARAMS`
3674      Specifies the options to pass to ``update-rc.d``. Here is an example:
3675      ::
3676
3677         INITSCRIPT_PARAMS = "start 99 5 2 . stop 20 0 1 6 ."
3678
3679      In this example, the script has a runlevel of 99, starts the script
3680      in initlevels 2 and 5, and stops the script in levels 0, 1 and 6.
3681
3682      The variable's default value is "defaults", which is set in the
3683      :ref:`update-rc.d <ref-classes-update-rc.d>` class.
3684
3685      The value in ``INITSCRIPT_PARAMS`` is passed through to the
3686      ``update-rc.d`` command. For more information on valid parameters,
3687      please see the ``update-rc.d`` manual page at
3688      https://manpages.debian.org/buster/init-system-helpers/update-rc.d.8.en.html
3689
3690   :term:`INSANE_SKIP`
3691      Specifies the QA checks to skip for a specific package within a
3692      recipe. For example, to skip the check for symbolic link ``.so``
3693      files in the main package of a recipe, add the following to the
3694      recipe. The package name override must be used, which in this example
3695      is ``${PN}``:
3696      ::
3697
3698         INSANE_SKIP_${PN} += "dev-so"
3699
3700      See the ":ref:`insane.bbclass <ref-classes-insane>`" section for a
3701      list of the valid QA checks you can specify using this variable.
3702
3703   :term:`INSTALL_TIMEZONE_FILE`
3704      By default, the ``tzdata`` recipe packages an ``/etc/timezone`` file.
3705      Set the ``INSTALL_TIMEZONE_FILE`` variable to "0" at the
3706      configuration level to disable this behavior.
3707
3708   :term:`IPK_FEED_URIS`
3709      When the IPK backend is in use and package management is enabled on
3710      the target, you can use this variable to set up ``opkg`` in the
3711      target image to point to package feeds on a nominated server. Once
3712      the feed is established, you can perform installations or upgrades
3713      using the package manager at runtime.
3714
3715   :term:`KARCH`
3716      Defines the kernel architecture used when assembling the
3717      configuration. Architectures supported for this release are:
3718
3719      - powerpc
3720      - i386
3721      - x86_64
3722      - arm
3723      - qemu
3724      - mips
3725
3726      You define the ``KARCH`` variable in the :ref:`kernel-dev/advanced:bsp descriptions`.
3727
3728   :term:`KBRANCH`
3729      A regular expression used by the build process to explicitly identify
3730      the kernel branch that is validated, patched, and configured during a
3731      build. You must set this variable to ensure the exact kernel branch
3732      you want is being used by the build process.
3733
3734      Values for this variable are set in the kernel's recipe file and the
3735      kernel's append file. For example, if you are using the
3736      ``linux-yocto_4.12`` kernel, the kernel recipe file is the
3737      ``meta/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-yocto_4.12.bb`` file. ``KBRANCH``
3738      is set as follows in that kernel recipe file:
3739      ::
3740
3741         KBRANCH ?= "standard/base"
3742
3743      This variable is also used from the kernel's append file to identify
3744      the kernel branch specific to a particular machine or target
3745      hardware. Continuing with the previous kernel example, the kernel's
3746      append file (i.e. ``linux-yocto_4.12.bbappend``) is located in the
3747      BSP layer for a given machine. For example, the append file for the
3748      Beaglebone, EdgeRouter, and generic versions of both 32 and 64-bit IA
3749      machines (``meta-yocto-bsp``) is named
3750      ``meta-yocto-bsp/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-yocto_4.12.bbappend``.
3751      Here are the related statements from that append file:
3752      ::
3753
3754         KBRANCH_genericx86 = "standard/base"
3755         KBRANCH_genericx86-64 = "standard/base"
3756         KBRANCH_edgerouter = "standard/edgerouter"
3757         KBRANCH_beaglebone = "standard/beaglebone"
3758
3759      The ``KBRANCH`` statements
3760      identify the kernel branch to use when building for each supported
3761      BSP.
3762
3763   :term:`KBUILD_DEFCONFIG`
3764      When used with the :ref:`kernel-yocto <ref-classes-kernel-yocto>`
3765      class, specifies an "in-tree" kernel configuration file for use
3766      during a kernel build.
3767
3768      Typically, when using a ``defconfig`` to configure a kernel during a
3769      build, you place the file in your layer in the same manner as you
3770      would place patch files and configuration fragment files (i.e.
3771      "out-of-tree"). However, if you want to use a ``defconfig`` file that
3772      is part of the kernel tree (i.e. "in-tree"), you can use the
3773      ``KBUILD_DEFCONFIG`` variable and append the
3774      :term:`KMACHINE` variable to point to the
3775      ``defconfig`` file.
3776
3777      To use the variable, set it in the append file for your kernel recipe
3778      using the following form:
3779      ::
3780
3781         KBUILD_DEFCONFIG_KMACHINE ?= defconfig_file
3782
3783      Here is an example from a "raspberrypi2" ``KMACHINE`` build that uses
3784      a ``defconfig`` file named "bcm2709_defconfig":
3785      ::
3786
3787         KBUILD_DEFCONFIG_raspberrypi2 = "bcm2709_defconfig"
3788
3789      As an alternative, you can use the following within your append file:
3790      ::
3791
3792         KBUILD_DEFCONFIG_pn-linux-yocto ?= defconfig_file
3793
3794      For more
3795      information on how to use the ``KBUILD_DEFCONFIG`` variable, see the
3796      ":ref:`kernel-dev/common:using an "in-tree" \`\`defconfig\`\` file`"
3797      section in the Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual.
3798
3799   :term:`KERNEL_ALT_IMAGETYPE`
3800      Specifies an alternate kernel image type for creation in addition to
3801      the kernel image type specified using the
3802      :term:`KERNEL_IMAGETYPE` variable.
3803
3804   :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME`
3805      Specifies the name of all of the build artifacts. You can change the
3806      name of the artifacts by changing the ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME``
3807      variable.
3808
3809      The value of ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME``, which is set in the
3810      ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file, has the
3811      following default value:
3812      ::
3813
3814         KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME ?= "${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}"
3815
3816      See the :term:`PKGE`, :term:`PKGV`, :term:`PKGR`, :term:`MACHINE`
3817      and :term:`IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX` variables for additional information.
3818
3819   :term:`KERNEL_CLASSES`
3820      A list of classes defining kernel image types that the
3821      :ref:`kernel <ref-classes-kernel>` class should inherit. You
3822      typically append this variable to enable extended image types. An
3823      example is the "kernel-fitimage", which enables fitImage support and
3824      resides in ``meta/classes/kernel-fitimage.bbclass``. You can register
3825      custom kernel image types with the ``kernel`` class using this
3826      variable.
3827
3828   :term:`KERNEL_DEVICETREE`
3829      Specifies the name of the generated Linux kernel device tree (i.e.
3830      the ``.dtb``) file.
3831
3832      .. note::
3833
3834         Legacy support exists for specifying the full path to the device
3835         tree. However, providing just the ``.dtb`` file is preferred.
3836
3837      In order to use this variable, the
3838      :ref:`kernel-devicetree <ref-classes-kernel-devicetree>` class must
3839      be inherited.
3840
3841   :term:`KERNEL_DTB_LINK_NAME`
3842      The link name of the kernel device tree binary (DTB). This variable
3843      is set in the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as
3844      follows:
3845      ::
3846
3847         KERNEL_DTB_LINK_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME}"
3848
3849      The
3850      value of the ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME`` variable, which is set in
3851      the same file, has the following value:
3852      ::
3853
3854         KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME ?= "${MACHINE}"
3855
3856      See the :term:`MACHINE` variable for additional
3857      information.
3858
3859   :term:`KERNEL_DTB_NAME`
3860      The base name of the kernel device tree binary (DTB). This variable
3861      is set in the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as
3862      follows:
3863      ::
3864
3865         KERNEL_DTB_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME}"
3866
3867      The value of the :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME`
3868      variable, which is set in the same file, has the following value:
3869      ::
3870
3871         KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME ?= "${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}"
3872
3873   :term:`KERNEL_EXTRA_ARGS`
3874      Specifies additional ``make`` command-line arguments the OpenEmbedded
3875      build system passes on when compiling the kernel.
3876
3877   :term:`KERNEL_FEATURES`
3878      Includes additional kernel metadata. In the OpenEmbedded build
3879      system, the default Board Support Packages (BSPs)
3880      :term:`Metadata` is provided through the
3881      :term:`KMACHINE` and :term:`KBRANCH`
3882      variables. You can use the ``KERNEL_FEATURES`` variable from within
3883      the kernel recipe or kernel append file to further add metadata for
3884      all BSPs or specific BSPs.
3885
3886      The metadata you add through this variable includes config fragments
3887      and features descriptions, which usually includes patches as well as
3888      config fragments. You typically override the ``KERNEL_FEATURES``
3889      variable for a specific machine. In this way, you can provide
3890      validated, but optional, sets of kernel configurations and features.
3891
3892      For example, the following example from the ``linux-yocto-rt_4.12``
3893      kernel recipe adds "netfilter" and "taskstats" features to all BSPs
3894      as well as "virtio" configurations to all QEMU machines. The last two
3895      statements add specific configurations to targeted machine types:
3896      ::
3897
3898         KERNEL_EXTRA_FEATURES ?= "features/netfilter/netfilter.scc features/taskstats/taskstats.scc"
3899         KERNEL_FEATURES_append = "${KERNEL_EXTRA_FEATURES}"
3900         KERNEL_FEATURES_append_qemuall = "cfg/virtio.scc"
3901         KERNEL_FEATURES_append_qemux86 = " cfg/sound.scc cfg/paravirt_kvm.scc"
3902         KERNEL_FEATURES_append_qemux86-64 = "cfg/sound.scc"
3903
3904   :term:`KERNEL_FIT_LINK_NAME`
3905      The link name of the kernel flattened image tree (FIT) image. This
3906      variable is set in the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass``
3907      file as follows:
3908      ::
3909
3910         KERNEL_FIT_LINK_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME}"
3911
3912      The value of the
3913      ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME`` variable, which is set in the same
3914      file, has the following value:
3915      ::
3916
3917         KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME ?= "${MACHINE}"
3918
3919      See the :term:`MACHINE` variable for additional
3920      information.
3921
3922   :term:`KERNEL_FIT_NAME`
3923      The base name of the kernel flattened image tree (FIT) image. This
3924      variable is set in the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass``
3925      file as follows:
3926      ::
3927
3928         KERNEL_FIT_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME}"
3929
3930      The value of the :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME`
3931      variable, which is set in the same file, has the following value:
3932      ::
3933
3934         KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME ?= "${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}"
3935
3936   :term:`KERNEL_IMAGE_LINK_NAME`
3937      The link name for the kernel image. This variable is set in the
3938      ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as follows:
3939      ::
3940
3941         KERNEL_IMAGE_LINK_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME}"
3942
3943      The value of
3944      the ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME`` variable, which is set in the same
3945      file, has the following value:
3946      ::
3947
3948         KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME ?= "${MACHINE}"
3949
3950      See the :term:`MACHINE` variable for additional
3951      information.
3952
3953   :term:`KERNEL_IMAGE_MAXSIZE`
3954      Specifies the maximum size of the kernel image file in kilobytes. If
3955      ``KERNEL_IMAGE_MAXSIZE`` is set, the size of the kernel image file is
3956      checked against the set value during the
3957      :ref:`ref-tasks-sizecheck` task. The task fails if
3958      the kernel image file is larger than the setting.
3959
3960      ``KERNEL_IMAGE_MAXSIZE`` is useful for target devices that have a
3961      limited amount of space in which the kernel image must be stored.
3962
3963      By default, this variable is not set, which means the size of the
3964      kernel image is not checked.
3965
3966   :term:`KERNEL_IMAGE_NAME`
3967      The base name of the kernel image. This variable is set in the
3968      ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as follows:
3969      ::
3970
3971         KERNEL_IMAGE_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME}"
3972
3973      The value of the
3974      :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME` variable,
3975      which is set in the same file, has the following value:
3976      ::
3977
3978         KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME ?= "${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}"
3979
3980   :term:`KERNEL_IMAGETYPE`
3981      The type of kernel to build for a device, usually set by the machine
3982      configuration files and defaults to "zImage". This variable is used
3983      when building the kernel and is passed to ``make`` as the target to
3984      build.
3985
3986      If you want to build an alternate kernel image type, use the
3987      :term:`KERNEL_ALT_IMAGETYPE` variable.
3988
3989   :term:`KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD`
3990      Lists kernel modules that need to be auto-loaded during boot.
3991
3992      .. note::
3993
3994         This variable replaces the deprecated :term:`module_autoload`
3995         variable.
3996
3997      You can use the ``KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD`` variable anywhere that it
3998      can be recognized by the kernel recipe or by an out-of-tree kernel
3999      module recipe (e.g. a machine configuration file, a distribution
4000      configuration file, an append file for the recipe, or the recipe
4001      itself).
4002
4003      Specify it as follows:
4004      ::
4005
4006         KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD += "module_name1 module_name2 module_name3"
4007
4008      Including ``KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD`` causes the OpenEmbedded build
4009      system to populate the ``/etc/modules-load.d/modname.conf`` file with
4010      the list of modules to be auto-loaded on boot. The modules appear
4011      one-per-line in the file. Here is an example of the most common use
4012      case:
4013      ::
4014
4015         KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD += "module_name"
4016
4017      For information on how to populate the ``modname.conf`` file with
4018      ``modprobe.d`` syntax lines, see the :term:`KERNEL_MODULE_PROBECONF` variable.
4019
4020   :term:`KERNEL_MODULE_PROBECONF`
4021      Provides a list of modules for which the OpenEmbedded build system
4022      expects to find ``module_conf_``\ modname values that specify
4023      configuration for each of the modules. For information on how to
4024      provide those module configurations, see the
4025      :term:`module_conf_* <module_conf>` variable.
4026
4027   :term:`KERNEL_PATH`
4028      The location of the kernel sources. This variable is set to the value
4029      of the :term:`STAGING_KERNEL_DIR` within
4030      the :ref:`module <ref-classes-module>` class. For information on
4031      how this variable is used, see the
4032      ":ref:`kernel-dev/common:incorporating out-of-tree modules`"
4033      section in the Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual.
4034
4035      To help maximize compatibility with out-of-tree drivers used to build
4036      modules, the OpenEmbedded build system also recognizes and uses the
4037      :term:`KERNEL_SRC` variable, which is identical to
4038      the ``KERNEL_PATH`` variable. Both variables are common variables
4039      used by external Makefiles to point to the kernel source directory.
4040
4041   :term:`KERNEL_SRC`
4042      The location of the kernel sources. This variable is set to the value
4043      of the :term:`STAGING_KERNEL_DIR` within
4044      the :ref:`module <ref-classes-module>` class. For information on
4045      how this variable is used, see the
4046      ":ref:`kernel-dev/common:incorporating out-of-tree modules`"
4047      section in the Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual.
4048
4049      To help maximize compatibility with out-of-tree drivers used to build
4050      modules, the OpenEmbedded build system also recognizes and uses the
4051      :term:`KERNEL_PATH` variable, which is identical
4052      to the ``KERNEL_SRC`` variable. Both variables are common variables
4053      used by external Makefiles to point to the kernel source directory.
4054
4055   :term:`KERNEL_VERSION`
4056      Specifies the version of the kernel as extracted from ``version.h``
4057      or ``utsrelease.h`` within the kernel sources. Effects of setting
4058      this variable do not take affect until the kernel has been
4059      configured. Consequently, attempting to refer to this variable in
4060      contexts prior to configuration will not work.
4061
4062   :term:`KERNELDEPMODDEPEND`
4063      Specifies whether the data referenced through
4064      :term:`PKGDATA_DIR` is needed or not. The
4065      ``KERNELDEPMODDEPEND`` does not control whether or not that data
4066      exists, but simply whether or not it is used. If you do not need to
4067      use the data, set the ``KERNELDEPMODDEPEND`` variable in your
4068      ``initramfs`` recipe. Setting the variable there when the data is not
4069      needed avoids a potential dependency loop.
4070
4071   :term:`KFEATURE_DESCRIPTION`
4072      Provides a short description of a configuration fragment. You use
4073      this variable in the ``.scc`` file that describes a configuration
4074      fragment file. Here is the variable used in a file named ``smp.scc``
4075      to describe SMP being enabled:
4076      ::
4077
4078          define KFEATURE_DESCRIPTION "Enable SMP"
4079
4080   :term:`KMACHINE`
4081      The machine as known by the kernel. Sometimes the machine name used
4082      by the kernel does not match the machine name used by the
4083      OpenEmbedded build system. For example, the machine name that the
4084      OpenEmbedded build system understands as ``core2-32-intel-common``
4085      goes by a different name in the Linux Yocto kernel. The kernel
4086      understands that machine as ``intel-core2-32``. For cases like these,
4087      the ``KMACHINE`` variable maps the kernel machine name to the
4088      OpenEmbedded build system machine name.
4089
4090      These mappings between different names occur in the Yocto Linux
4091      Kernel's ``meta`` branch. As an example take a look in the
4092      ``common/recipes-kernel/linux/linux-yocto_3.19.bbappend`` file:
4093      ::
4094
4095         LINUX_VERSION_core2-32-intel-common = "3.19.0"
4096         COMPATIBLE_MACHINE_core2-32-intel-common = "${MACHINE}"
4097         SRCREV_meta_core2-32-intel-common = "8897ef68b30e7426bc1d39895e71fb155d694974"
4098         SRCREV_machine_core2-32-intel-common = "43b9eced9ba8a57add36af07736344dcc383f711"
4099         KMACHINE_core2-32-intel-common = "intel-core2-32"
4100         KBRANCH_core2-32-intel-common = "standard/base"
4101         KERNEL_FEATURES_append_core2-32-intel-common = "${KERNEL_FEATURES_INTEL_COMMON}"
4102
4103      The ``KMACHINE`` statement says
4104      that the kernel understands the machine name as "intel-core2-32".
4105      However, the OpenEmbedded build system understands the machine as
4106      "core2-32-intel-common".
4107
4108   :term:`KTYPE`
4109      Defines the kernel type to be used in assembling the configuration.
4110      The linux-yocto recipes define "standard", "tiny", and "preempt-rt"
4111      kernel types. See the ":ref:`kernel-dev/advanced:kernel types`"
4112      section in the
4113      Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual for more information on
4114      kernel types.
4115
4116      You define the ``KTYPE`` variable in the
4117      :ref:`kernel-dev/advanced:bsp descriptions`. The
4118      value you use must match the value used for the
4119      :term:`LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE` value used by the
4120      kernel recipe.
4121
4122   :term:`LABELS`
4123      Provides a list of targets for automatic configuration.
4124
4125      See the :ref:`grub-efi <ref-classes-grub-efi>` class for more
4126      information on how this variable is used.
4127
4128   :term:`LAYERDEPENDS`
4129      Lists the layers, separated by spaces, on which this recipe depends.
4130      Optionally, you can specify a specific layer version for a dependency
4131      by adding it to the end of the layer name. Here is an example:
4132      ::
4133
4134         LAYERDEPENDS_mylayer = "anotherlayer (=3)"
4135
4136      In this previous example,
4137      version 3 of "anotherlayer" is compared against
4138      :term:`LAYERVERSION`\ ``_anotherlayer``.
4139
4140      An error is produced if any dependency is missing or the version
4141      numbers (if specified) do not match exactly. This variable is used in
4142      the ``conf/layer.conf`` file and must be suffixed with the name of
4143      the specific layer (e.g. ``LAYERDEPENDS_mylayer``).
4144
4145   :term:`LAYERDIR`
4146      When used inside the ``layer.conf`` configuration file, this variable
4147      provides the path of the current layer. This variable is not
4148      available outside of ``layer.conf`` and references are expanded
4149      immediately when parsing of the file completes.
4150
4151   :term:`LAYERRECOMMENDS`
4152      Lists the layers, separated by spaces, recommended for use with this
4153      layer.
4154
4155      Optionally, you can specify a specific layer version for a
4156      recommendation by adding the version to the end of the layer name.
4157      Here is an example:
4158      ::
4159
4160         LAYERRECOMMENDS_mylayer = "anotherlayer (=3)"
4161
4162      In this previous example, version 3 of "anotherlayer" is compared
4163      against ``LAYERVERSION_anotherlayer``.
4164
4165      This variable is used in the ``conf/layer.conf`` file and must be
4166      suffixed with the name of the specific layer (e.g.
4167      ``LAYERRECOMMENDS_mylayer``).
4168
4169   :term:`LAYERSERIES_COMPAT`
4170      Lists the versions of the :term:`OpenEmbedded-Core (OE-Core)` for which
4171      a layer is compatible. Using the ``LAYERSERIES_COMPAT`` variable
4172      allows the layer maintainer to indicate which combinations of the
4173      layer and OE-Core can be expected to work. The variable gives the
4174      system a way to detect when a layer has not been tested with new
4175      releases of OE-Core (e.g. the layer is not maintained).
4176
4177      To specify the OE-Core versions for which a layer is compatible, use
4178      this variable in your layer's ``conf/layer.conf`` configuration file.
4179      For the list, use the Yocto Project
4180      :yocto_wiki:`Release Name </Releases>` (e.g.
4181      DISTRO_NAME_NO_CAP). To specify multiple OE-Core versions for the
4182      layer, use a space-separated list:
4183      ::
4184
4185         LAYERSERIES_COMPAT_layer_root_name = "DISTRO_NAME_NO_CAP DISTRO_NAME_NO_CAP_MINUS_ONE"
4186
4187      .. note::
4188
4189         Setting ``LAYERSERIES_COMPAT`` is required by the Yocto Project
4190         Compatible version 2 standard.
4191         The OpenEmbedded build system produces a warning if the variable
4192         is not set for any given layer.
4193
4194      See the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:creating your own layer`"
4195      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
4196
4197   :term:`LAYERVERSION`
4198      Optionally specifies the version of a layer as a single number. You
4199      can use this within :term:`LAYERDEPENDS` for
4200      another layer in order to depend on a specific version of the layer.
4201      This variable is used in the ``conf/layer.conf`` file and must be
4202      suffixed with the name of the specific layer (e.g.
4203      ``LAYERVERSION_mylayer``).
4204
4205   :term:`LD`
4206      The minimal command and arguments used to run the linker.
4207
4208   :term:`LDFLAGS`
4209      Specifies the flags to pass to the linker. This variable is exported
4210      to an environment variable and thus made visible to the software
4211      being built during the compilation step.
4212
4213      Default initialization for ``LDFLAGS`` varies depending on what is
4214      being built:
4215
4216      -  :term:`TARGET_LDFLAGS` when building for the
4217         target
4218
4219      -  :term:`BUILD_LDFLAGS` when building for the
4220         build host (i.e. ``-native``)
4221
4222      -  :term:`BUILDSDK_LDFLAGS` when building for
4223         an SDK (i.e. ``nativesdk-``)
4224
4225   :term:`LEAD_SONAME`
4226      Specifies the lead (or primary) compiled library file (i.e. ``.so``)
4227      that the :ref:`debian <ref-classes-debian>` class applies its
4228      naming policy to given a recipe that packages multiple libraries.
4229
4230      This variable works in conjunction with the ``debian`` class.
4231
4232   :term:`LIC_FILES_CHKSUM`
4233      Checksums of the license text in the recipe source code.
4234
4235      This variable tracks changes in license text of the source code
4236      files. If the license text is changed, it will trigger a build
4237      failure, which gives the developer an opportunity to review any
4238      license change.
4239
4240      This variable must be defined for all recipes (unless
4241      :term:`LICENSE` is set to "CLOSED").
4242
4243      For more information, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:tracking license changes`"
4244      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
4245
4246   :term:`LICENSE`
4247      The list of source licenses for the recipe. Follow these rules:
4248
4249      -  Do not use spaces within individual license names.
4250
4251      -  Separate license names using \| (pipe) when there is a choice
4252         between licenses.
4253
4254      -  Separate license names using & (ampersand) when multiple licenses
4255         exist that cover different parts of the source.
4256
4257      -  You can use spaces between license names.
4258
4259      -  For standard licenses, use the names of the files in
4260         ``meta/files/common-licenses/`` or the
4261         :term:`SPDXLICENSEMAP` flag names defined in
4262         ``meta/conf/licenses.conf``.
4263
4264      Here are some examples:
4265      ::
4266
4267         LICENSE = "LGPLv2.1 | GPLv3"
4268         LICENSE = "MPL-1 & LGPLv2.1"
4269         LICENSE = "GPLv2+"
4270
4271      The first example is from the
4272      recipes for Qt, which the user may choose to distribute under either
4273      the LGPL version 2.1 or GPL version 3. The second example is from
4274      Cairo where two licenses cover different parts of the source code.
4275      The final example is from ``sysstat``, which presents a single
4276      license.
4277
4278      You can also specify licenses on a per-package basis to handle
4279      situations where components of the output have different licenses.
4280      For example, a piece of software whose code is licensed under GPLv2
4281      but has accompanying documentation licensed under the GNU Free
4282      Documentation License 1.2 could be specified as follows:
4283      ::
4284
4285         LICENSE = "GFDL-1.2 & GPLv2"
4286         LICENSE_${PN} = "GPLv2"
4287         LICENSE_${PN}-doc = "GFDL-1.2"
4288
4289   :term:`LICENSE_CREATE_PACKAGE`
4290      Setting ``LICENSE_CREATE_PACKAGE`` to "1" causes the OpenEmbedded
4291      build system to create an extra package (i.e.
4292      ``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}-lic``) for each recipe and to add
4293      those packages to the
4294      :term:`RRECOMMENDS`\ ``_${PN}``.
4295
4296      The ``${PN}-lic`` package installs a directory in
4297      ``/usr/share/licenses`` named ``${PN}``, which is the recipe's base
4298      name, and installs files in that directory that contain license and
4299      copyright information (i.e. copies of the appropriate license files
4300      from ``meta/common-licenses`` that match the licenses specified in
4301      the :term:`LICENSE` variable of the recipe metadata
4302      and copies of files marked in
4303      :term:`LIC_FILES_CHKSUM` as containing
4304      license text).
4305
4306      For related information on providing license text, see the
4307      :term:`COPY_LIC_DIRS` variable, the
4308      :term:`COPY_LIC_MANIFEST` variable, and the
4309      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:providing license text`"
4310      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
4311
4312   :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS`
4313      Specifies additional flags for a recipe you must whitelist through
4314      :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST` in
4315      order to allow the recipe to be built. When providing multiple flags,
4316      separate them with spaces.
4317
4318      This value is independent of :term:`LICENSE` and is
4319      typically used to mark recipes that might require additional licenses
4320      in order to be used in a commercial product. For more information,
4321      see the
4322      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling commercially licensed recipes`"
4323      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
4324
4325   :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS_WHITELIST`
4326      Lists license flags that when specified in
4327      :term:`LICENSE_FLAGS` within a recipe should not
4328      prevent that recipe from being built. This practice is otherwise
4329      known as "whitelisting" license flags. For more information, see the
4330      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling commercially licensed recipes`"
4331      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
4332
4333   :term:`LICENSE_PATH`
4334      Path to additional licenses used during the build. By default, the
4335      OpenEmbedded build system uses ``COMMON_LICENSE_DIR`` to define the
4336      directory that holds common license text used during the build. The
4337      ``LICENSE_PATH`` variable allows you to extend that location to other
4338      areas that have additional licenses:
4339      ::
4340
4341         LICENSE_PATH += "path-to-additional-common-licenses"
4342
4343   :term:`LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE`
4344      Defines the kernel type to be used in assembling the configuration.
4345      The linux-yocto recipes define "standard", "tiny", and "preempt-rt"
4346      kernel types. See the ":ref:`kernel-dev/advanced:kernel types`"
4347      section in the
4348      Yocto Project Linux Kernel Development Manual for more information on
4349      kernel types.
4350
4351      If you do not specify a ``LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE``, it defaults to
4352      "standard". Together with :term:`KMACHINE`, the
4353      ``LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE`` variable defines the search arguments used by
4354      the kernel tools to find the appropriate description within the
4355      kernel :term:`Metadata` with which to build out the sources
4356      and configuration.
4357
4358   :term:`LINUX_VERSION`
4359      The Linux version from ``kernel.org`` on which the Linux kernel image
4360      being built using the OpenEmbedded build system is based. You define
4361      this variable in the kernel recipe. For example, the
4362      ``linux-yocto-3.4.bb`` kernel recipe found in
4363      ``meta/recipes-kernel/linux`` defines the variables as follows:
4364      ::
4365
4366         LINUX_VERSION ?= "3.4.24"
4367
4368      The ``LINUX_VERSION`` variable is used to define :term:`PV`
4369      for the recipe:
4370      ::
4371
4372         PV = "${LINUX_VERSION}+git${SRCPV}"
4373
4374   :term:`LINUX_VERSION_EXTENSION`
4375      A string extension compiled into the version string of the Linux
4376      kernel built with the OpenEmbedded build system. You define this
4377      variable in the kernel recipe. For example, the linux-yocto kernel
4378      recipes all define the variable as follows:
4379      ::
4380
4381         LINUX_VERSION_EXTENSION ?= "-yocto-${LINUX_KERNEL_TYPE}"
4382
4383      Defining this variable essentially sets the Linux kernel
4384      configuration item ``CONFIG_LOCALVERSION``, which is visible through
4385      the ``uname`` command. Here is an example that shows the extension
4386      assuming it was set as previously shown:
4387      ::
4388
4389         $ uname -r
4390         3.7.0-rc8-custom
4391
4392   :term:`LOG_DIR`
4393      Specifies the directory to which the OpenEmbedded build system writes
4394      overall log files. The default directory is ``${TMPDIR}/log``.
4395
4396      For the directory containing logs specific to each task, see the
4397      :term:`T` variable.
4398
4399   :term:`MACHINE`
4400      Specifies the target device for which the image is built. You define
4401      ``MACHINE`` in the ``local.conf`` file found in the
4402      :term:`Build Directory`. By default, ``MACHINE`` is set to
4403      "qemux86", which is an x86-based architecture machine to be emulated
4404      using QEMU:
4405      ::
4406
4407         MACHINE ?= "qemux86"
4408
4409      The variable corresponds to a machine configuration file of the same
4410      name, through which machine-specific configurations are set. Thus,
4411      when ``MACHINE`` is set to "qemux86" there exists the corresponding
4412      ``qemux86.conf`` machine configuration file, which can be found in
4413      the :term:`Source Directory` in
4414      ``meta/conf/machine``.
4415
4416      The list of machines supported by the Yocto Project as shipped
4417      include the following:
4418      ::
4419
4420         MACHINE ?= "qemuarm"
4421         MACHINE ?= "qemuarm64"
4422         MACHINE ?= "qemumips"
4423         MACHINE ?= "qemumips64"
4424         MACHINE ?= "qemuppc"
4425         MACHINE ?= "qemux86"
4426         MACHINE ?= "qemux86-64"
4427         MACHINE ?= "genericx86"
4428         MACHINE ?= "genericx86-64"
4429         MACHINE ?= "beaglebone"
4430         MACHINE ?= "edgerouter"
4431
4432      The last five are Yocto Project reference hardware
4433      boards, which are provided in the ``meta-yocto-bsp`` layer.
4434
4435      .. note::
4436
4437         Adding additional Board Support Package (BSP) layers to your
4438         configuration adds new possible settings for ``MACHINE``.
4439
4440   :term:`MACHINE_ARCH`
4441      Specifies the name of the machine-specific architecture. This
4442      variable is set automatically from :term:`MACHINE` or
4443      :term:`TUNE_PKGARCH`. You should not hand-edit
4444      the ``MACHINE_ARCH`` variable.
4445
4446   :term:`MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RDEPENDS`
4447      A list of required machine-specific packages to install as part of
4448      the image being built. The build process depends on these packages
4449      being present. Furthermore, because this is a "machine-essential"
4450      variable, the list of packages are essential for the machine to boot.
4451      The impact of this variable affects images based on
4452      ``packagegroup-core-boot``, including the ``core-image-minimal``
4453      image.
4454
4455      This variable is similar to the
4456      ``MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS`` variable with the exception
4457      that the image being built has a build dependency on the variable's
4458      list of packages. In other words, the image will not build if a file
4459      in this list is not found.
4460
4461      As an example, suppose the machine for which you are building
4462      requires ``example-init`` to be run during boot to initialize the
4463      hardware. In this case, you would use the following in the machine's
4464      ``.conf`` configuration file:
4465      ::
4466
4467         MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RDEPENDS += "example-init"
4468
4469   :term:`MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS`
4470      A list of recommended machine-specific packages to install as part of
4471      the image being built. The build process does not depend on these
4472      packages being present. However, because this is a
4473      "machine-essential" variable, the list of packages are essential for
4474      the machine to boot. The impact of this variable affects images based
4475      on ``packagegroup-core-boot``, including the ``core-image-minimal``
4476      image.
4477
4478      This variable is similar to the ``MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RDEPENDS``
4479      variable with the exception that the image being built does not have
4480      a build dependency on the variable's list of packages. In other
4481      words, the image will still build if a package in this list is not
4482      found. Typically, this variable is used to handle essential kernel
4483      modules, whose functionality may be selected to be built into the
4484      kernel rather than as a module, in which case a package will not be
4485      produced.
4486
4487      Consider an example where you have a custom kernel where a specific
4488      touchscreen driver is required for the machine to be usable. However,
4489      the driver can be built as a module or into the kernel depending on
4490      the kernel configuration. If the driver is built as a module, you
4491      want it to be installed. But, when the driver is built into the
4492      kernel, you still want the build to succeed. This variable sets up a
4493      "recommends" relationship so that in the latter case, the build will
4494      not fail due to the missing package. To accomplish this, assuming the
4495      package for the module was called ``kernel-module-ab123``, you would
4496      use the following in the machine's ``.conf`` configuration file:
4497      ::
4498
4499         MACHINE_ESSENTIAL_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS += "kernel-module-ab123"
4500
4501      .. note::
4502
4503         In this example, the ``kernel-module-ab123`` recipe needs to
4504         explicitly set its :term:`PACKAGES` variable to ensure that BitBake
4505         does not use the kernel recipe's :term:`PACKAGES_DYNAMIC` variable to
4506         satisfy the dependency.
4507
4508      Some examples of these machine essentials are flash, screen,
4509      keyboard, mouse, or touchscreen drivers (depending on the machine).
4510
4511   :term:`MACHINE_EXTRA_RDEPENDS`
4512      A list of machine-specific packages to install as part of the image
4513      being built that are not essential for the machine to boot. However,
4514      the build process for more fully-featured images depends on the
4515      packages being present.
4516
4517      This variable affects all images based on ``packagegroup-base``,
4518      which does not include the ``core-image-minimal`` or
4519      ``core-image-full-cmdline`` images.
4520
4521      The variable is similar to the ``MACHINE_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS`` variable
4522      with the exception that the image being built has a build dependency
4523      on the variable's list of packages. In other words, the image will
4524      not build if a file in this list is not found.
4525
4526      An example is a machine that has WiFi capability but is not essential
4527      for the machine to boot the image. However, if you are building a
4528      more fully-featured image, you want to enable the WiFi. The package
4529      containing the firmware for the WiFi hardware is always expected to
4530      exist, so it is acceptable for the build process to depend upon
4531      finding the package. In this case, assuming the package for the
4532      firmware was called ``wifidriver-firmware``, you would use the
4533      following in the ``.conf`` file for the machine:
4534      ::
4535
4536         MACHINE_EXTRA_RDEPENDS += "wifidriver-firmware"
4537
4538   :term:`MACHINE_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS`
4539      A list of machine-specific packages to install as part of the image
4540      being built that are not essential for booting the machine. The image
4541      being built has no build dependency on this list of packages.
4542
4543      This variable affects only images based on ``packagegroup-base``,
4544      which does not include the ``core-image-minimal`` or
4545      ``core-image-full-cmdline`` images.
4546
4547      This variable is similar to the ``MACHINE_EXTRA_RDEPENDS`` variable
4548      with the exception that the image being built does not have a build
4549      dependency on the variable's list of packages. In other words, the
4550      image will build if a file in this list is not found.
4551
4552      An example is a machine that has WiFi capability but is not essential
4553      For the machine to boot the image. However, if you are building a
4554      more fully-featured image, you want to enable WiFi. In this case, the
4555      package containing the WiFi kernel module will not be produced if the
4556      WiFi driver is built into the kernel, in which case you still want
4557      the build to succeed instead of failing as a result of the package
4558      not being found. To accomplish this, assuming the package for the
4559      module was called ``kernel-module-examplewifi``, you would use the
4560      following in the ``.conf`` file for the machine:
4561      ::
4562
4563         MACHINE_EXTRA_RRECOMMENDS += "kernel-module-examplewifi"
4564
4565   :term:`MACHINE_FEATURES`
4566      Specifies the list of hardware features the
4567      :term:`MACHINE` is capable of supporting. For related
4568      information on enabling features, see the
4569      :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES`,
4570      :term:`COMBINED_FEATURES`, and
4571      :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES` variables.
4572
4573      For a list of hardware features supported by the Yocto Project as
4574      shipped, see the ":ref:`ref-features-machine`" section.
4575
4576   :term:`MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL`
4577      Features to be added to ``MACHINE_FEATURES`` if not also present in
4578      ``MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED``.
4579
4580      This variable is set in the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` file. It is
4581      not intended to be user-configurable. It is best to just reference
4582      the variable to see which machine features are being backfilled for
4583      all machine configurations. See the ":ref:`ref-features-backfill`"
4584      section for more information.
4585
4586   :term:`MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL_CONSIDERED`
4587      Features from ``MACHINE_FEATURES_BACKFILL`` that should not be
4588      backfilled (i.e. added to ``MACHINE_FEATURES``) during the build. See
4589      the ":ref:`ref-features-backfill`" section for more information.
4590
4591   :term:`MACHINEOVERRIDES`
4592      A colon-separated list of overrides that apply to the current
4593      machine. By default, this list includes the value of
4594      :term:`MACHINE`.
4595
4596      You can extend ``MACHINEOVERRIDES`` to add extra overrides that
4597      should apply to a machine. For example, all machines emulated in QEMU
4598      (e.g. ``qemuarm``, ``qemux86``, and so forth) include a file named
4599      ``meta/conf/machine/include/qemu.inc`` that prepends the following
4600      override to ``MACHINEOVERRIDES``:
4601      ::
4602
4603         MACHINEOVERRIDES =. "qemuall:"
4604
4605      This
4606      override allows variables to be overridden for all machines emulated
4607      in QEMU, like in the following example from the ``connman-conf``
4608      recipe:
4609      ::
4610
4611         SRC_URI_append_qemuall = " file://wired.config \
4612             file://wired-setup \
4613             "
4614
4615      The underlying mechanism behind
4616      ``MACHINEOVERRIDES`` is simply that it is included in the default
4617      value of :term:`OVERRIDES`.
4618
4619   :term:`MAINTAINER`
4620      The email address of the distribution maintainer.
4621
4622   :term:`MIRRORS`
4623      Specifies additional paths from which the OpenEmbedded build system
4624      gets source code. When the build system searches for source code, it
4625      first tries the local download directory. If that location fails, the
4626      build system tries locations defined by
4627      :term:`PREMIRRORS`, the upstream source, and then
4628      locations specified by ``MIRRORS`` in that order.
4629
4630      Assuming your distribution (:term:`DISTRO`) is "poky",
4631      the default value for ``MIRRORS`` is defined in the
4632      ``conf/distro/poky.conf`` file in the ``meta-poky`` Git repository.
4633
4634   :term:`MLPREFIX`
4635      Specifies a prefix has been added to :term:`PN` to create a
4636      special version of a recipe or package (i.e. a Multilib version). The
4637      variable is used in places where the prefix needs to be added to or
4638      removed from a the name (e.g. the :term:`BPN` variable).
4639      ``MLPREFIX`` gets set when a prefix has been added to ``PN``.
4640
4641      .. note::
4642
4643         The "ML" in ``MLPREFIX`` stands for "MultiLib". This representation is
4644         historical and comes from a time when ``nativesdk`` was a suffix
4645         rather than a prefix on the recipe name. When ``nativesdk`` was turned
4646         into a prefix, it made sense to set ``MLPREFIX`` for it as well.
4647
4648      To help understand when ``MLPREFIX`` might be needed, consider when
4649      :term:`BBCLASSEXTEND` is used to provide a
4650      ``nativesdk`` version of a recipe in addition to the target version.
4651      If that recipe declares build-time dependencies on tasks in other
4652      recipes by using :term:`DEPENDS`, then a dependency on
4653      "foo" will automatically get rewritten to a dependency on
4654      "nativesdk-foo". However, dependencies like the following will not
4655      get rewritten automatically:
4656      ::
4657
4658         do_foo[depends] += "recipe:do_foo"
4659
4660      If you want such a dependency to also get transformed, you can do the
4661      following:
4662      ::
4663
4664         do_foo[depends] += "${MLPREFIX}recipe:do_foo"
4665
4666   module_autoload
4667      This variable has been replaced by the ``KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD``
4668      variable. You should replace all occurrences of ``module_autoload``
4669      with additions to ``KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD``, for example:
4670      ::
4671
4672         module_autoload_rfcomm = "rfcomm"
4673
4674      should now be replaced with:
4675      ::
4676
4677         KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD += "rfcomm"
4678
4679      See the :term:`KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD` variable for more information.
4680
4681   module_conf
4682      Specifies `modprobe.d <http://linux.die.net/man/5/modprobe.d>`_
4683      syntax lines for inclusion in the ``/etc/modprobe.d/modname.conf``
4684      file.
4685
4686      You can use this variable anywhere that it can be recognized by the
4687      kernel recipe or out-of-tree kernel module recipe (e.g. a machine
4688      configuration file, a distribution configuration file, an append file
4689      for the recipe, or the recipe itself). If you use this variable, you
4690      must also be sure to list the module name in the
4691      :term:`KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD`
4692      variable.
4693
4694      Here is the general syntax:
4695      ::
4696
4697         module_conf_module_name = "modprobe.d-syntax"
4698
4699      You must use the kernel module name override.
4700
4701      Run ``man modprobe.d`` in the shell to find out more information on
4702      the exact syntax you want to provide with ``module_conf``.
4703
4704      Including ``module_conf`` causes the OpenEmbedded build system to
4705      populate the ``/etc/modprobe.d/modname.conf`` file with
4706      ``modprobe.d`` syntax lines. Here is an example that adds the options
4707      ``arg1`` and ``arg2`` to a module named ``mymodule``:
4708      ::
4709
4710         module_conf_mymodule = "options mymodule arg1=val1 arg2=val2"
4711
4712      For information on how to specify kernel modules to auto-load on
4713      boot, see the :term:`KERNEL_MODULE_AUTOLOAD` variable.
4714
4715   :term:`MODULE_TARBALL_DEPLOY`
4716      Controls creation of the ``modules-*.tgz`` file. Set this variable to
4717      "0" to disable creation of this file, which contains all of the
4718      kernel modules resulting from a kernel build.
4719
4720   :term:`MODULE_TARBALL_LINK_NAME`
4721      The link name of the kernel module tarball. This variable is set in
4722      the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as follows:
4723      ::
4724
4725         MODULE_TARBALL_LINK_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME}"
4726
4727      The value
4728      of the ``KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME`` variable, which is set in the
4729      same file, has the following value:
4730      ::
4731
4732         KERNEL_ARTIFACT_LINK_NAME ?= "${MACHINE}"
4733
4734      See the :term:`MACHINE` variable for additional information.
4735
4736   :term:`MODULE_TARBALL_NAME`
4737      The base name of the kernel module tarball. This variable is set in
4738      the ``meta/classes/kernel-artifact-names.bbclass`` file as follows:
4739      ::
4740
4741         MODULE_TARBALL_NAME ?= "${KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME}"
4742
4743      The value of the :term:`KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME` variable,
4744      which is set in the same file, has the following value:
4745      ::
4746
4747         KERNEL_ARTIFACT_NAME ?= "${PKGE}-${PKGV}-${PKGR}-${MACHINE}${IMAGE_VERSION_SUFFIX}"
4748
4749   :term:`MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS`
4750      Uniquely identifies the type of the target system for which packages
4751      are being built. This variable allows output for different types of
4752      target systems to be put into different subdirectories of the same
4753      output directory.
4754
4755      The default value of this variable is:
4756      ::
4757
4758         ${PACKAGE_ARCH}${TARGET_VENDOR}-${TARGET_OS}
4759
4760      Some classes (e.g.
4761      :ref:`cross-canadian <ref-classes-cross-canadian>`) modify the
4762      ``MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS`` value.
4763
4764      See the :term:`STAMP` variable for an example. See the
4765      :term:`STAGING_DIR_TARGET` variable for more information.
4766
4767   :term:`NATIVELSBSTRING`
4768      A string identifying the host distribution. Strings consist of the
4769      host distributor ID followed by the release, as reported by the
4770      ``lsb_release`` tool or as read from ``/etc/lsb-release``. For
4771      example, when running a build on Ubuntu 12.10, the value is
4772      "Ubuntu-12.10". If this information is unable to be determined, the
4773      value resolves to "Unknown".
4774
4775      This variable is used by default to isolate native shared state
4776      packages for different distributions (e.g. to avoid problems with
4777      ``glibc`` version incompatibilities). Additionally, the variable is
4778      checked against
4779      :term:`SANITY_TESTED_DISTROS` if that
4780      variable is set.
4781
4782   :term:`NM`
4783      The minimal command and arguments to run ``nm``.
4784
4785   :term:`NO_GENERIC_LICENSE`
4786      Avoids QA errors when you use a non-common, non-CLOSED license in a
4787      recipe. Packages exist, such as the linux-firmware package, with many
4788      licenses that are not in any way common. Also, new licenses are added
4789      occasionally to avoid introducing a lot of common license files,
4790      which are only applicable to a specific package.
4791      ``NO_GENERIC_LICENSE`` is used to allow copying a license that does
4792      not exist in common licenses.
4793
4794      The following example shows how to add ``NO_GENERIC_LICENSE`` to a
4795      recipe:
4796      ::
4797
4798         NO_GENERIC_LICENSE[license_name] = "license_file_in_fetched_source"
4799
4800      The following is an example that
4801      uses the ``LICENSE.Abilis.txt`` file as the license from the fetched
4802      source:
4803      ::
4804
4805         NO_GENERIC_LICENSE[Firmware-Abilis] = "LICENSE.Abilis.txt"
4806
4807   :term:`NO_RECOMMENDATIONS`
4808      Prevents installation of all "recommended-only" packages.
4809      Recommended-only packages are packages installed only through the
4810      :term:`RRECOMMENDS` variable). Setting the
4811      ``NO_RECOMMENDATIONS`` variable to "1" turns this feature on: ::
4812
4813         NO_RECOMMENDATIONS = "1"
4814
4815      You can set this variable globally in your ``local.conf`` file or you
4816      can attach it to a specific image recipe by using the recipe name
4817      override: ::
4818
4819         NO_RECOMMENDATIONS_pn-target_image = "1"
4820
4821      It is important to realize that if you choose to not install packages
4822      using this variable and some other packages are dependent on them
4823      (i.e. listed in a recipe's :term:`RDEPENDS`
4824      variable), the OpenEmbedded build system ignores your request and
4825      will install the packages to avoid dependency errors.
4826
4827      .. note::
4828
4829         Some recommended packages might be required for certain system
4830         functionality, such as kernel modules. It is up to you to add
4831         packages with the :term:`IMAGE_INSTALL` variable.
4832
4833      Support for this variable exists only when using the IPK and RPM
4834      packaging backend. Support does not exist for DEB.
4835
4836      See the :term:`BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS` and
4837      the :term:`PACKAGE_EXCLUDE` variables for
4838      related information.
4839
4840   :term:`NOAUTOPACKAGEDEBUG`
4841      Disables auto package from splitting ``.debug`` files. If a recipe
4842      requires ``FILES_${PN}-dbg`` to be set manually, the
4843      ``NOAUTOPACKAGEDEBUG`` can be defined allowing you to define the
4844      content of the debug package. For example:
4845      ::
4846
4847         NOAUTOPACKAGEDEBUG = "1"
4848         FILES_${PN}-dev = "${includedir}/${QT_DIR_NAME}/Qt/*"
4849         FILES_${PN}-dbg = "/usr/src/debug/"
4850         FILES_${QT_BASE_NAME}-demos-doc = "${docdir}/${QT_DIR_NAME}/qch/qt.qch"
4851
4852   :term:`OBJCOPY`
4853      The minimal command and arguments to run ``objcopy``.
4854
4855   :term:`OBJDUMP`
4856      The minimal command and arguments to run ``objdump``.
4857
4858   :term:`OE_BINCONFIG_EXTRA_MANGLE`
4859      When inheriting the :ref:`binconfig <ref-classes-binconfig>` class,
4860      this variable specifies additional arguments passed to the "sed"
4861      command. The sed command alters any paths in configuration scripts
4862      that have been set up during compilation. Inheriting this class
4863      results in all paths in these scripts being changed to point into the
4864      ``sysroots/`` directory so that all builds that use the script will
4865      use the correct directories for the cross compiling layout.
4866
4867      See the ``meta/classes/binconfig.bbclass`` in the
4868      :term:`Source Directory` for details on how this class
4869      applies these additional sed command arguments. For general
4870      information on the ``binconfig`` class, see the
4871      ":ref:`binconfig.bbclass <ref-classes-binconfig>`" section.
4872
4873   :term:`OE_IMPORTS`
4874      An internal variable used to tell the OpenEmbedded build system what
4875      Python modules to import for every Python function run by the system.
4876
4877      .. note::
4878
4879         Do not set this variable. It is for internal use only.
4880
4881   :term:`OE_INIT_ENV_SCRIPT`
4882      The name of the build environment setup script for the purposes of
4883      setting up the environment within the extensible SDK. The default
4884      value is "oe-init-build-env".
4885
4886      If you use a custom script to set up your build environment, set the
4887      ``OE_INIT_ENV_SCRIPT`` variable to its name.
4888
4889   :term:`OE_TERMINAL`
4890      Controls how the OpenEmbedded build system spawns interactive
4891      terminals on the host development system (e.g. using the BitBake
4892      command with the ``-c devshell`` command-line option). For more
4893      information, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:using a development shell`" section in
4894      the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
4895
4896      You can use the following values for the ``OE_TERMINAL`` variable:
4897
4898      - auto
4899      - gnome
4900      - xfce
4901      - rxvt
4902      - screen
4903      - konsole
4904      - none
4905
4906   :term:`OEROOT`
4907      The directory from which the top-level build environment setup script
4908      is sourced. The Yocto Project provides a top-level build environment
4909      setup script: :ref:`structure-core-script`. When you run this
4910      script, the ``OEROOT`` variable resolves to the directory that
4911      contains the script.
4912
4913      For additional information on how this variable is used, see the
4914      initialization script.
4915
4916   :term:`OLDEST_KERNEL`
4917      Declares the oldest version of the Linux kernel that the produced
4918      binaries must support. This variable is passed into the build of the
4919      Embedded GNU C Library (``glibc``).
4920
4921      The default for this variable comes from the
4922      ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` configuration file. You can override this
4923      default by setting the variable in a custom distribution
4924      configuration file.
4925
4926   :term:`OVERRIDES`
4927      A colon-separated list of overrides that currently apply. Overrides
4928      are a BitBake mechanism that allows variables to be selectively
4929      overridden at the end of parsing. The set of overrides in
4930      ``OVERRIDES`` represents the "state" during building, which includes
4931      the current recipe being built, the machine for which it is being
4932      built, and so forth.
4933
4934      As an example, if the string "an-override" appears as an element in
4935      the colon-separated list in ``OVERRIDES``, then the following
4936      assignment will override ``FOO`` with the value "overridden" at the
4937      end of parsing:
4938      ::
4939
4940         FOO_an-override = "overridden"
4941
4942      See the
4943      ":ref:`bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:conditional syntax (overrides)`"
4944      section in the BitBake User Manual for more information on the
4945      overrides mechanism.
4946
4947      The default value of ``OVERRIDES`` includes the values of the
4948      :term:`CLASSOVERRIDE`,
4949      :term:`MACHINEOVERRIDES`, and
4950      :term:`DISTROOVERRIDES` variables. Another
4951      important override included by default is ``pn-${PN}``. This override
4952      allows variables to be set for a single recipe within configuration
4953      (``.conf``) files. Here is an example:
4954      ::
4955
4956         FOO_pn-myrecipe = "myrecipe-specific value"
4957
4958      .. note::
4959
4960         An easy way to see what overrides apply is to search for ``OVERRIDES``
4961         in the output of the ``bitbake -e`` command. See the
4962         ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:viewing variable values`" section in the Yocto
4963         Project Development Tasks Manual for more information.
4964
4965   :term:`P`
4966      The recipe name and version. ``P`` is comprised of the following:
4967      ::
4968
4969         ${PN}-${PV}
4970
4971   :term:`PACKAGE_ADD_METADATA`
4972      This variable defines additional metdata to add to packages.
4973
4974      You may find you need to inject additional metadata into packages.
4975      This variable allows you to do that by setting the injected data as
4976      the value. Multiple fields can be added by splitting the content with
4977      the literal separator "\n".
4978
4979      The suffixes '_IPK', '_DEB', or '_RPM' can be applied to the variable
4980      to do package type specific settings. It can also be made package
4981      specific by using the package name as a suffix.
4982
4983      You can find out more about applying this variable in the
4984      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:adding custom metadata to packages`"
4985      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
4986
4987   :term:`PACKAGE_ARCH`
4988      The architecture of the resulting package or packages.
4989
4990      By default, the value of this variable is set to
4991      :term:`TUNE_PKGARCH` when building for the
4992      target, :term:`BUILD_ARCH` when building for the
4993      build host, and "${SDK_ARCH}-${SDKPKGSUFFIX}" when building for the
4994      SDK.
4995
4996      .. note::
4997
4998         See :term:`SDK_ARCH` for more information.
4999
5000      However, if your recipe's output packages are built specific to the
5001      target machine rather than generally for the architecture of the
5002      machine, you should set ``PACKAGE_ARCH`` to the value of
5003      :term:`MACHINE_ARCH` in the recipe as follows:
5004      ::
5005
5006         PACKAGE_ARCH = "${MACHINE_ARCH}"
5007
5008   :term:`PACKAGE_ARCHS`
5009      Specifies a list of architectures compatible with the target machine.
5010      This variable is set automatically and should not normally be
5011      hand-edited. Entries are separated using spaces and listed in order
5012      of priority. The default value for ``PACKAGE_ARCHS`` is "all any
5013      noarch ${PACKAGE_EXTRA_ARCHS} ${MACHINE_ARCH}".
5014
5015   :term:`PACKAGE_BEFORE_PN`
5016      Enables easily adding packages to ``PACKAGES`` before ``${PN}`` so
5017      that those added packages can pick up files that would normally be
5018      included in the default package.
5019
5020   :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES`
5021      This variable, which is set in the ``local.conf`` configuration file
5022      found in the ``conf`` folder of the
5023      :term:`Build Directory`, specifies the package manager the
5024      OpenEmbedded build system uses when packaging data.
5025
5026      You can provide one or more of the following arguments for the
5027      variable: PACKAGE_CLASSES ?= "package_rpm package_deb package_ipk
5028      package_tar"
5029
5030      .. note::
5031
5032         While it is a legal option, the ``package_tar``
5033         class has limited functionality due to no support for package
5034         dependencies by that backend. Therefore, it is recommended that
5035         you do not use it.
5036
5037      The build system uses only the first argument in the list as the
5038      package manager when creating your image or SDK. However, packages
5039      will be created using any additional packaging classes you specify.
5040      For example, if you use the following in your ``local.conf`` file:
5041      ::
5042
5043         PACKAGE_CLASSES ?= "package_ipk"
5044
5045      The OpenEmbedded build system uses
5046      the IPK package manager to create your image or SDK.
5047
5048      For information on packaging and build performance effects as a
5049      result of the package manager in use, see the
5050      ":ref:`package.bbclass <ref-classes-package>`" section.
5051
5052   :term:`PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT_STYLE`
5053      Determines how to split up the binary and debug information when
5054      creating ``*-dbg`` packages to be used with the GNU Project Debugger
5055      (GDB).
5056
5057      With the ``PACKAGE_DEBUG_SPLIT_STYLE`` variable, you can control
5058      where debug information, which can include or exclude source files,
5059      is stored:
5060
5061      -  ".debug": Debug symbol files are placed next to the binary in a
5062         ``.debug`` directory on the target. For example, if a binary is
5063         installed into ``/bin``, the corresponding debug symbol files are
5064         installed in ``/bin/.debug``. Source files are placed in
5065         ``/usr/src/debug``.
5066
5067      -  "debug-file-directory": Debug symbol files are placed under
5068         ``/usr/lib/debug`` on the target, and separated by the path from
5069         where the binary is installed. For example, if a binary is
5070         installed in ``/bin``, the corresponding debug symbols are
5071         installed in ``/usr/lib/debug/bin``. Source files are placed in
5072         ``/usr/src/debug``.
5073
5074      -  "debug-without-src": The same behavior as ".debug" previously
5075         described with the exception that no source files are installed.
5076
5077      -  "debug-with-srcpkg": The same behavior as ".debug" previously
5078         described with the exception that all source files are placed in a
5079         separate ``*-src`` pkg. This is the default behavior.
5080
5081      You can find out more about debugging using GDB by reading the
5082      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:debugging with the gnu project debugger (gdb) remotely`" section
5083      in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
5084
5085   :term:`PACKAGE_EXCLUDE_COMPLEMENTARY`
5086      Prevents specific packages from being installed when you are
5087      installing complementary packages.
5088
5089      You might find that you want to prevent installing certain packages
5090      when you are installing complementary packages. For example, if you
5091      are using :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES` to install
5092      ``dev-pkgs``, you might not want to install all packages from a
5093      particular multilib. If you find yourself in this situation, you can
5094      use the ``PACKAGE_EXCLUDE_COMPLEMENTARY`` variable to specify regular
5095      expressions to match the packages you want to exclude.
5096
5097   :term:`PACKAGE_EXCLUDE`
5098      Lists packages that should not be installed into an image. For
5099      example:
5100      ::
5101
5102         PACKAGE_EXCLUDE = "package_name package_name package_name ..."
5103
5104      You can set this variable globally in your ``local.conf`` file or you
5105      can attach it to a specific image recipe by using the recipe name
5106      override:
5107      ::
5108
5109         PACKAGE_EXCLUDE_pn-target_image = "package_name"
5110
5111      If you choose to not install a package using this variable and some
5112      other package is dependent on it (i.e. listed in a recipe's
5113      :term:`RDEPENDS` variable), the OpenEmbedded build
5114      system generates a fatal installation error. Because the build system
5115      halts the process with a fatal error, you can use the variable with
5116      an iterative development process to remove specific components from a
5117      system.
5118
5119      Support for this variable exists only when using the IPK and RPM
5120      packaging backend. Support does not exist for DEB.
5121
5122      See the :term:`NO_RECOMMENDATIONS` and the
5123      :term:`BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS` variables for
5124      related information.
5125
5126   :term:`PACKAGE_EXTRA_ARCHS`
5127      Specifies the list of architectures compatible with the device CPU.
5128      This variable is useful when you build for several different devices
5129      that use miscellaneous processors such as XScale and ARM926-EJS.
5130
5131   :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`
5132      Optionally specifies the package architectures used as part of the
5133      package feed URIs during the build. When used, the
5134      ``PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`` variable is appended to the final package feed
5135      URI, which is constructed using the
5136      :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_URIS` and
5137      :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS`
5138      variables.
5139
5140      .. note::
5141
5142         You can use the ``PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS``
5143         variable to whitelist specific package architectures. If you do
5144         not need to whitelist specific architectures, which is a common
5145         case, you can omit this variable. Omitting the variable results in
5146         all available architectures for the current machine being included
5147         into remote package feeds.
5148
5149      Consider the following example where the ``PACKAGE_FEED_URIS``,
5150      ``PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS``, and ``PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`` variables are
5151      defined in your ``local.conf`` file:
5152      ::
5153
5154         PACKAGE_FEED_URIS = "https://example.com/packagerepos/release \
5155                              https://example.com/packagerepos/updates"
5156         PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS = "rpm rpm-dev"
5157         PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS = "all core2-64"
5158
5159      Given these settings, the resulting package feeds are as follows:
5160
5161      .. code-block:: none
5162
5163         https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/all
5164         https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/core2-64
5165         https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/all
5166         https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/core2-64
5167         https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/all
5168         https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/core2-64
5169         https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/all
5170         https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/core2-64
5171
5172   :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS`
5173      Specifies the base path used when constructing package feed URIs. The
5174      ``PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS`` variable makes up the middle portion of a
5175      package feed URI used by the OpenEmbedded build system. The base path
5176      lies between the :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_URIS`
5177      and :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS` variables.
5178
5179      Consider the following example where the ``PACKAGE_FEED_URIS``,
5180      ``PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS``, and ``PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`` variables are
5181      defined in your ``local.conf`` file:
5182      ::
5183
5184         PACKAGE_FEED_URIS = "https://example.com/packagerepos/release \
5185                              https://example.com/packagerepos/updates"
5186         PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS = "rpm rpm-dev"
5187         PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS = "all core2-64"
5188
5189      Given these settings, the resulting package feeds are as follows:
5190
5191      .. code-block:: none
5192
5193         https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/all
5194         https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/core2-64
5195         https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/all
5196         https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/core2-64
5197         https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/all
5198         https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/core2-64
5199         https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/all
5200         https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/core2-64
5201
5202   :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_URIS`
5203      Specifies the front portion of the package feed URI used by the
5204      OpenEmbedded build system. Each final package feed URI is comprised
5205      of ``PACKAGE_FEED_URIS``,
5206      :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS`, and
5207      :term:`PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS` variables.
5208
5209      Consider the following example where the ``PACKAGE_FEED_URIS``,
5210      ``PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS``, and ``PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS`` variables are
5211      defined in your ``local.conf`` file:
5212      ::
5213
5214         PACKAGE_FEED_URIS = "https://example.com/packagerepos/release \
5215                              https://example.com/packagerepos/updates"
5216         PACKAGE_FEED_BASE_PATHS = "rpm rpm-dev"
5217         PACKAGE_FEED_ARCHS = "all core2-64"
5218
5219      Given these settings, the resulting package feeds are as follows:
5220
5221      .. code-block:: none
5222
5223         https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/all
5224         https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm/core2-64
5225         https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/all
5226         https://example.com/packagerepos/release/rpm-dev/core2-64
5227         https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/all
5228         https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm/core2-64
5229         https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/all
5230         https://example.com/packagerepos/updates/rpm-dev/core2-64
5231
5232   :term:`PACKAGE_INSTALL`
5233      The final list of packages passed to the package manager for
5234      installation into the image.
5235
5236      Because the package manager controls actual installation of all
5237      packages, the list of packages passed using ``PACKAGE_INSTALL`` is
5238      not the final list of packages that are actually installed. This
5239      variable is internal to the image construction code. Consequently, in
5240      general, you should use the
5241      :term:`IMAGE_INSTALL` variable to specify
5242      packages for installation. The exception to this is when working with
5243      the :ref:`core-image-minimal-initramfs <ref-manual/images:images>`
5244      image. When working with an initial RAM filesystem (initramfs) image,
5245      use the ``PACKAGE_INSTALL`` variable. For information on creating an
5246      initramfs, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:building an initial ram filesystem (initramfs) image`" section
5247      in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
5248
5249   :term:`PACKAGE_INSTALL_ATTEMPTONLY`
5250      Specifies a list of packages the OpenEmbedded build system attempts
5251      to install when creating an image. If a listed package fails to
5252      install, the build system does not generate an error. This variable
5253      is generally not user-defined.
5254
5255   :term:`PACKAGE_PREPROCESS_FUNCS`
5256      Specifies a list of functions run to pre-process the
5257      :term:`PKGD` directory prior to splitting the files out
5258      to individual packages.
5259
5260   :term:`PACKAGE_WRITE_DEPS`
5261      Specifies a list of dependencies for post-installation and
5262      pre-installation scripts on native/cross tools. If your
5263      post-installation or pre-installation script can execute at rootfs
5264      creation time rather than on the target but depends on a native tool
5265      in order to execute, you need to list the tools in
5266      ``PACKAGE_WRITE_DEPS``.
5267
5268      For information on running post-installation scripts, see the
5269      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:post-installation scripts`"
5270      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
5271
5272   :term:`PACKAGECONFIG`
5273      This variable provides a means of enabling or disabling features of a
5274      recipe on a per-recipe basis. ``PACKAGECONFIG`` blocks are defined in
5275      recipes when you specify features and then arguments that define
5276      feature behaviors. Here is the basic block structure (broken over
5277      multiple lines for readability):
5278      ::
5279
5280         PACKAGECONFIG ??= "f1 f2 f3 ..."
5281         PACKAGECONFIG[f1] = "\
5282             --with-f1, \
5283             --without-f1, \
5284             build-deps-for-f1, \
5285             runtime-deps-for-f1, \
5286             runtime-recommends-for-f1, \
5287             packageconfig-conflicts-for-f1"
5288         PACKAGECONFIG[f2] = "\
5289              ... and so on and so on ...
5290
5291      The ``PACKAGECONFIG`` variable itself specifies a space-separated
5292      list of the features to enable. Following the features, you can
5293      determine the behavior of each feature by providing up to six
5294      order-dependent arguments, which are separated by commas. You can
5295      omit any argument you like but must retain the separating commas. The
5296      order is important and specifies the following:
5297
5298      1. Extra arguments that should be added to the configure script
5299         argument list (:term:`EXTRA_OECONF` or
5300         :term:`PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS`) if
5301         the feature is enabled.
5302
5303      2. Extra arguments that should be added to ``EXTRA_OECONF`` or
5304         ``PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS`` if the feature is disabled.
5305
5306      3. Additional build dependencies (:term:`DEPENDS`)
5307         that should be added if the feature is enabled.
5308
5309      4. Additional runtime dependencies (:term:`RDEPENDS`)
5310         that should be added if the feature is enabled.
5311
5312      5. Additional runtime recommendations
5313         (:term:`RRECOMMENDS`) that should be added if
5314         the feature is enabled.
5315
5316      6. Any conflicting (that is, mutually exclusive) ``PACKAGECONFIG``
5317         settings for this feature.
5318
5319      Consider the following ``PACKAGECONFIG`` block taken from the
5320      ``librsvg`` recipe. In this example the feature is ``gtk``, which has
5321      three arguments that determine the feature's behavior.
5322      ::
5323
5324         PACKAGECONFIG[gtk] = "--with-gtk3,--without-gtk3,gtk+3"
5325
5326      The
5327      ``--with-gtk3`` and ``gtk+3`` arguments apply only if the feature is
5328      enabled. In this case, ``--with-gtk3`` is added to the configure
5329      script argument list and ``gtk+3`` is added to ``DEPENDS``. On the
5330      other hand, if the feature is disabled say through a ``.bbappend``
5331      file in another layer, then the second argument ``--without-gtk3`` is
5332      added to the configure script instead.
5333
5334      The basic ``PACKAGECONFIG`` structure previously described holds true
5335      regardless of whether you are creating a block or changing a block.
5336      When creating a block, use the structure inside your recipe.
5337
5338      If you want to change an existing ``PACKAGECONFIG`` block, you can do
5339      so one of two ways:
5340
5341      -  *Append file:* Create an append file named
5342         recipename\ ``.bbappend`` in your layer and override the value of
5343         ``PACKAGECONFIG``. You can either completely override the
5344         variable:
5345         ::
5346
5347            PACKAGECONFIG = "f4 f5"
5348
5349         Or, you can just append the variable:
5350         ::
5351
5352            PACKAGECONFIG_append = " f4"
5353
5354      -  *Configuration file:* This method is identical to changing the
5355         block through an append file except you edit your ``local.conf``
5356         or ``mydistro.conf`` file. As with append files previously
5357         described, you can either completely override the variable:
5358         ::
5359
5360            PACKAGECONFIG_pn-recipename = "f4 f5"
5361
5362         Or, you can just amend the variable:
5363         ::
5364
5365            PACKAGECONFIG_append_pn-recipename = " f4"
5366
5367   :term:`PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS`
5368      A space-separated list of configuration options generated from the
5369      :term:`PACKAGECONFIG` setting.
5370
5371      Classes such as :ref:`autotools <ref-classes-autotools>` and
5372      :ref:`cmake <ref-classes-cmake>` use ``PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS`` to
5373      pass ``PACKAGECONFIG`` options to ``configure`` and ``cmake``,
5374      respectively. If you are using ``PACKAGECONFIG`` but not a class that
5375      handles the ``do_configure`` task, then you need to use
5376      ``PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS`` appropriately.
5377
5378   :term:`PACKAGEGROUP_DISABLE_COMPLEMENTARY`
5379      For recipes inheriting the
5380      :ref:`packagegroup <ref-classes-packagegroup>` class, setting
5381      ``PACKAGEGROUP_DISABLE_COMPLEMENTARY`` to "1" specifies that the
5382      normal complementary packages (i.e. ``-dev``, ``-dbg``, and so forth)
5383      should not be automatically created by the ``packagegroup`` recipe,
5384      which is the default behavior.
5385
5386   :term:`PACKAGES`
5387      The list of packages the recipe creates. The default value is the
5388      following:
5389      ::
5390
5391         ${PN}-dbg ${PN}-staticdev ${PN}-dev ${PN}-doc ${PN}-locale ${PACKAGE_BEFORE_PN} ${PN}
5392
5393      During packaging, the :ref:`ref-tasks-package` task
5394      goes through ``PACKAGES`` and uses the :term:`FILES`
5395      variable corresponding to each package to assign files to the
5396      package. If a file matches the ``FILES`` variable for more than one
5397      package in ``PACKAGES``, it will be assigned to the earliest
5398      (leftmost) package.
5399
5400      Packages in the variable's list that are empty (i.e. where none of
5401      the patterns in ``FILES_``\ pkg match any files installed by the
5402      :ref:`ref-tasks-install` task) are not generated,
5403      unless generation is forced through the
5404      :term:`ALLOW_EMPTY` variable.
5405
5406   :term:`PACKAGES_DYNAMIC`
5407      A promise that your recipe satisfies runtime dependencies for
5408      optional modules that are found in other recipes.
5409      ``PACKAGES_DYNAMIC`` does not actually satisfy the dependencies, it
5410      only states that they should be satisfied. For example, if a hard,
5411      runtime dependency (:term:`RDEPENDS`) of another
5412      package is satisfied at build time through the ``PACKAGES_DYNAMIC``
5413      variable, but a package with the module name is never actually
5414      produced, then the other package will be broken. Thus, if you attempt
5415      to include that package in an image, you will get a dependency
5416      failure from the packaging system during the
5417      :ref:`ref-tasks-rootfs` task.
5418
5419      Typically, if there is a chance that such a situation can occur and
5420      the package that is not created is valid without the dependency being
5421      satisfied, then you should use :term:`RRECOMMENDS`
5422      (a soft runtime dependency) instead of ``RDEPENDS``.
5423
5424      For an example of how to use the ``PACKAGES_DYNAMIC`` variable when
5425      you are splitting packages, see the
5426      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:handling optional module packaging`"
5427      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
5428
5429   :term:`PACKAGESPLITFUNCS`
5430      Specifies a list of functions run to perform additional splitting of
5431      files into individual packages. Recipes can either prepend to this
5432      variable or prepend to the ``populate_packages`` function in order to
5433      perform additional package splitting. In either case, the function
5434      should set :term:`PACKAGES`,
5435      :term:`FILES`, :term:`RDEPENDS` and
5436      other packaging variables appropriately in order to perform the
5437      desired splitting.
5438
5439   :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE`
5440      Extra options passed to the ``make`` command during the
5441      :ref:`ref-tasks-compile` task in order to specify
5442      parallel compilation on the local build host. This variable is
5443      usually in the form "-j x", where x represents the maximum number of
5444      parallel threads ``make`` can run.
5445
5446      .. note::
5447
5448         In order for ``PARALLEL_MAKE`` to be effective, ``make`` must be
5449         called with ``${``\ :term:`EXTRA_OEMAKE`\ ``}``. An easy way to ensure
5450         this is to use the ``oe_runmake`` function.
5451
5452      By default, the OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets this
5453      variable to be equal to the number of cores the build system uses.
5454
5455      .. note::
5456
5457         If the software being built experiences dependency issues during
5458         the ``do_compile`` task that result in race conditions, you can clear
5459         the ``PARALLEL_MAKE`` variable within the recipe as a workaround. For
5460         information on addressing race conditions, see the
5461         ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:debugging parallel make races`"
5462         section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
5463
5464      For single socket systems (i.e. one CPU), you should not have to
5465      override this variable to gain optimal parallelism during builds.
5466      However, if you have very large systems that employ multiple physical
5467      CPUs, you might want to make sure the ``PARALLEL_MAKE`` variable is
5468      not set higher than "-j 20".
5469
5470      For more information on speeding up builds, see the
5471      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:speeding up a build`"
5472      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
5473
5474   :term:`PARALLEL_MAKEINST`
5475      Extra options passed to the ``make install`` command during the
5476      :ref:`ref-tasks-install` task in order to specify
5477      parallel installation. This variable defaults to the value of
5478      :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE`.
5479
5480      .. note::
5481
5482         In order for ``PARALLEL_MAKEINST`` to be effective, ``make`` must
5483         be called with
5484         ``${``\ :term:`EXTRA_OEMAKE`\ ``}``. An easy
5485         way to ensure this is to use the ``oe_runmake`` function.
5486
5487         If the software being built experiences dependency issues during
5488         the ``do_install`` task that result in race conditions, you can
5489         clear the ``PARALLEL_MAKEINST`` variable within the recipe as a
5490         workaround. For information on addressing race conditions, see the
5491         ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:debugging parallel make races`"
5492         section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
5493
5494   :term:`PATCHRESOLVE`
5495      Determines the action to take when a patch fails. You can set this
5496      variable to one of two values: "noop" and "user".
5497
5498      The default value of "noop" causes the build to simply fail when the
5499      OpenEmbedded build system cannot successfully apply a patch. Setting
5500      the value to "user" causes the build system to launch a shell and
5501      places you in the right location so that you can manually resolve the
5502      conflicts.
5503
5504      Set this variable in your ``local.conf`` file.
5505
5506   :term:`PATCHTOOL`
5507      Specifies the utility used to apply patches for a recipe during the
5508      :ref:`ref-tasks-patch` task. You can specify one of
5509      three utilities: "patch", "quilt", or "git". The default utility used
5510      is "quilt" except for the quilt-native recipe itself. Because the
5511      quilt tool is not available at the time quilt-native is being
5512      patched, it uses "patch".
5513
5514      If you wish to use an alternative patching tool, set the variable in
5515      the recipe using one of the following:
5516      ::
5517
5518         PATCHTOOL = "patch"
5519         PATCHTOOL = "quilt"
5520         PATCHTOOL = "git"
5521
5522   :term:`PE`
5523      The epoch of the recipe. By default, this variable is unset. The
5524      variable is used to make upgrades possible when the versioning scheme
5525      changes in some backwards incompatible way.
5526
5527      ``PE`` is the default value of the :term:`PKGE` variable.
5528
5529   :term:`PF`
5530      Specifies the recipe or package name and includes all version and
5531      revision numbers (i.e. ``glibc-2.13-r20+svnr15508/`` and
5532      ``bash-4.2-r1/``). This variable is comprised of the following:
5533      ${:term:`PN`}-${:term:`EXTENDPE`}${:term:`PV`}-${:term:`PR`}
5534
5535   :term:`PIXBUF_PACKAGES`
5536      When inheriting the :ref:`pixbufcache <ref-classes-pixbufcache>`
5537      class, this variable identifies packages that contain the pixbuf
5538      loaders used with ``gdk-pixbuf``. By default, the ``pixbufcache``
5539      class assumes that the loaders are in the recipe's main package (i.e.
5540      ``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}``). Use this variable if the
5541      loaders you need are in a package other than that main package.
5542
5543   :term:`PKG`
5544      The name of the resulting package created by the OpenEmbedded build
5545      system.
5546
5547      .. note::
5548
5549         When using the ``PKG`` variable, you must use a package name override.
5550
5551      For example, when the :ref:`debian <ref-classes-debian>` class
5552      renames the output package, it does so by setting
5553      ``PKG_packagename``.
5554
5555   :term:`PKG_CONFIG_PATH`
5556      The path to ``pkg-config`` files for the current build context.
5557      ``pkg-config`` reads this variable from the environment.
5558
5559   :term:`PKGD`
5560      Points to the destination directory for files to be packaged before
5561      they are split into individual packages. This directory defaults to
5562      the following:
5563      ::
5564
5565         ${WORKDIR}/package
5566
5567      Do not change this default.
5568
5569   :term:`PKGDATA_DIR`
5570      Points to a shared, global-state directory that holds data generated
5571      during the packaging process. During the packaging process, the
5572      :ref:`ref-tasks-packagedata` task packages data
5573      for each recipe and installs it into this temporary, shared area.
5574      This directory defaults to the following, which you should not
5575      change:
5576      ::
5577
5578         ${STAGING_DIR_HOST}/pkgdata
5579
5580      For examples of how this data is used, see the
5581      ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:automatically added runtime dependencies`"
5582      section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual and the
5583      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:viewing package information with \`\`oe-pkgdata-util\`\``"
5584      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. For more
5585      information on the shared, global-state directory, see
5586      :term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`.
5587
5588   :term:`PKGDEST`
5589      Points to the parent directory for files to be packaged after they
5590      have been split into individual packages. This directory defaults to
5591      the following:
5592      ::
5593
5594         ${WORKDIR}/packages-split
5595
5596      Under this directory, the build system creates directories for each
5597      package specified in :term:`PACKAGES`. Do not change
5598      this default.
5599
5600   :term:`PKGDESTWORK`
5601      Points to a temporary work area where the
5602      :ref:`ref-tasks-package` task saves package metadata.
5603      The ``PKGDESTWORK`` location defaults to the following:
5604      ::
5605
5606         ${WORKDIR}/pkgdata
5607
5608      Do not change this default.
5609
5610      The :ref:`ref-tasks-packagedata` task copies the
5611      package metadata from ``PKGDESTWORK`` to
5612      :term:`PKGDATA_DIR` to make it available globally.
5613
5614   :term:`PKGE`
5615      The epoch of the package(s) built by the recipe. By default, ``PKGE``
5616      is set to :term:`PE`.
5617
5618   :term:`PKGR`
5619      The revision of the package(s) built by the recipe. By default,
5620      ``PKGR`` is set to :term:`PR`.
5621
5622   :term:`PKGV`
5623      The version of the package(s) built by the recipe. By default,
5624      ``PKGV`` is set to :term:`PV`.
5625
5626   :term:`PN`
5627      This variable can have two separate functions depending on the
5628      context: a recipe name or a resulting package name.
5629
5630      ``PN`` refers to a recipe name in the context of a file used by the
5631      OpenEmbedded build system as input to create a package. The name is
5632      normally extracted from the recipe file name. For example, if the
5633      recipe is named ``expat_2.0.1.bb``, then the default value of ``PN``
5634      will be "expat".
5635
5636      The variable refers to a package name in the context of a file
5637      created or produced by the OpenEmbedded build system.
5638
5639      If applicable, the ``PN`` variable also contains any special suffix
5640      or prefix. For example, using ``bash`` to build packages for the
5641      native machine, ``PN`` is ``bash-native``. Using ``bash`` to build
5642      packages for the target and for Multilib, ``PN`` would be ``bash``
5643      and ``lib64-bash``, respectively.
5644
5645   :term:`PNBLACKLIST`
5646      Lists recipes you do not want the OpenEmbedded build system to build.
5647      This variable works in conjunction with the
5648      :ref:`blacklist <ref-classes-blacklist>` class, which is inherited
5649      globally.
5650
5651      To prevent a recipe from being built, use the ``PNBLACKLIST``
5652      variable in your ``local.conf`` file. Here is an example that
5653      prevents ``myrecipe`` from being built:
5654      ::
5655
5656         PNBLACKLIST[myrecipe] = "Not supported by our organization."
5657
5658   :term:`POPULATE_SDK_POST_HOST_COMMAND`
5659      Specifies a list of functions to call once the OpenEmbedded build
5660      system has created the host part of the SDK. You can specify
5661      functions separated by semicolons:
5662      ::
5663
5664          POPULATE_SDK_POST_HOST_COMMAND += "function; ... "
5665
5666      If you need to pass the SDK path to a command within a function, you
5667      can use ``${SDK_DIR}``, which points to the parent directory used by
5668      the OpenEmbedded build system when creating SDK output. See the
5669      :term:`SDK_DIR` variable for more information.
5670
5671   :term:`POPULATE_SDK_POST_TARGET_COMMAND`
5672      Specifies a list of functions to call once the OpenEmbedded build
5673      system has created the target part of the SDK. You can specify
5674      functions separated by semicolons:
5675      ::
5676
5677         POPULATE_SDK_POST_TARGET_COMMAND += "function; ... "
5678
5679      If you need to pass the SDK path to a command within a function, you
5680      can use ``${SDK_DIR}``, which points to the parent directory used by
5681      the OpenEmbedded build system when creating SDK output. See the
5682      :term:`SDK_DIR` variable for more information.
5683
5684   :term:`PR`
5685      The revision of the recipe. The default value for this variable is
5686      "r0". Subsequent revisions of the recipe conventionally have the
5687      values "r1", "r2", and so forth. When :term:`PV` increases,
5688      ``PR`` is conventionally reset to "r0".
5689
5690      .. note::
5691
5692         The OpenEmbedded build system does not need the aid of ``PR``
5693         to know when to rebuild a recipe. The build system uses the task
5694         :ref:`input checksums <overview-manual/concepts:checksums (signatures)>` along with the
5695         :ref:`stamp <structure-build-tmp-stamps>` and
5696         :ref:`overview-manual/concepts:shared state cache`
5697         mechanisms.
5698
5699      The ``PR`` variable primarily becomes significant when a package
5700      manager dynamically installs packages on an already built image. In
5701      this case, ``PR``, which is the default value of
5702      :term:`PKGR`, helps the package manager distinguish which
5703      package is the most recent one in cases where many packages have the
5704      same ``PV`` (i.e. ``PKGV``). A component having many packages with
5705      the same ``PV`` usually means that the packages all install the same
5706      upstream version, but with later (``PR``) version packages including
5707      packaging fixes.
5708
5709      .. note::
5710
5711         ``PR`` does not need to be increased for changes that do not change the
5712         package contents or metadata.
5713
5714      Because manually managing ``PR`` can be cumbersome and error-prone,
5715      an automated solution exists. See the
5716      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:working with a pr service`" section
5717      in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for more information.
5718
5719   :term:`PREFERRED_PROVIDER`
5720      If multiple recipes provide the same item, this variable determines
5721      which recipe is preferred and thus provides the item (i.e. the
5722      preferred provider). You should always suffix this variable with the
5723      name of the provided item. And, you should define the variable using
5724      the preferred recipe's name (:term:`PN`). Here is a common
5725      example:
5726      ::
5727
5728         PREFERRED_PROVIDER_virtual/kernel ?= "linux-yocto"
5729
5730      In the previous example, multiple recipes are providing "virtual/kernel".
5731      The ``PREFERRED_PROVIDER`` variable is set with the name (``PN``) of
5732      the recipe you prefer to provide "virtual/kernel".
5733
5734      Following are more examples:
5735      ::
5736
5737         PREFERRED_PROVIDER_virtual/xserver = "xserver-xf86"
5738         PREFERRED_PROVIDER_virtual/libgl ?= "mesa"
5739
5740      For more
5741      information, see the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:using virtual providers`"
5742      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
5743
5744      .. note::
5745
5746         If you use a ``virtual/\*`` item with ``PREFERRED_PROVIDER``, then any
5747         recipe that :term:`PROVIDES` that item but is not selected (defined)
5748         by ``PREFERRED_PROVIDER`` is prevented from building, which is usually
5749         desirable since this mechanism is designed to select between mutually
5750         exclusive alternative providers.
5751
5752   :term:`PREFERRED_VERSION`
5753      If multiple versions of recipes exist, this variable determines which
5754      version is given preference. You must always suffix the variable with
5755      the :term:`PN` you want to select, and you should set the
5756      :term:`PV` accordingly for precedence.
5757
5758      The ``PREFERRED_VERSION`` variable supports limited wildcard use
5759      through the "``%``" character. You can use the character to match any
5760      number of characters, which can be useful when specifying versions
5761      that contain long revision numbers that potentially change. Here are
5762      two examples:
5763      ::
5764
5765         PREFERRED_VERSION_python = "3.4.0"
5766         PREFERRED_VERSION_linux-yocto = "5.0%"
5767
5768      .. note::
5769
5770         The use of the "%" character is limited in that it only works at the end of the
5771         string. You cannot use the wildcard character in any other
5772         location of the string.
5773
5774      The specified version is matched against :term:`PV`, which
5775      does not necessarily match the version part of the recipe's filename.
5776      For example, consider two recipes ``foo_1.2.bb`` and ``foo_git.bb``
5777      where ``foo_git.bb`` contains the following assignment:
5778      ::
5779
5780         PV = "1.1+git${SRCPV}"
5781
5782      In this case, the correct way to select
5783      ``foo_git.bb`` is by using an assignment such as the following:
5784      ::
5785
5786         PREFERRED_VERSION_foo = "1.1+git%"
5787
5788      Compare that previous example
5789      against the following incorrect example, which does not work:
5790      ::
5791
5792         PREFERRED_VERSION_foo = "git"
5793
5794      Sometimes the ``PREFERRED_VERSION`` variable can be set by
5795      configuration files in a way that is hard to change. You can use
5796      :term:`OVERRIDES` to set a machine-specific
5797      override. Here is an example:
5798      ::
5799
5800         PREFERRED_VERSION_linux-yocto_qemux86 = "5.0%"
5801
5802      Although not recommended, worst case, you can also use the
5803      "forcevariable" override, which is the strongest override possible.
5804      Here is an example:
5805      ::
5806
5807         PREFERRED_VERSION_linux-yocto_forcevariable = "5.0%"
5808
5809      .. note::
5810
5811         The ``\_forcevariable`` override is not handled specially. This override
5812         only works because the default value of ``OVERRIDES`` includes "forcevariable".
5813
5814   :term:`PREMIRRORS`
5815      Specifies additional paths from which the OpenEmbedded build system
5816      gets source code. When the build system searches for source code, it
5817      first tries the local download directory. If that location fails, the
5818      build system tries locations defined by ``PREMIRRORS``, the upstream
5819      source, and then locations specified by
5820      :term:`MIRRORS` in that order.
5821
5822      Assuming your distribution (:term:`DISTRO`) is "poky",
5823      the default value for ``PREMIRRORS`` is defined in the
5824      ``conf/distro/poky.conf`` file in the ``meta-poky`` Git repository.
5825
5826      Typically, you could add a specific server for the build system to
5827      attempt before any others by adding something like the following to
5828      the ``local.conf`` configuration file in the
5829      :term:`Build Directory`:
5830      ::
5831
5832         PREMIRRORS_prepend = "\
5833             git://.*/.* http://www.yoctoproject.org/sources/ \n \
5834             ftp://.*/.* http://www.yoctoproject.org/sources/ \n \
5835             http://.*/.* http://www.yoctoproject.org/sources/ \n \
5836             https://.*/.* http://www.yoctoproject.org/sources/ \n"
5837
5838      These changes cause the
5839      build system to intercept Git, FTP, HTTP, and HTTPS requests and
5840      direct them to the ``http://`` sources mirror. You can use
5841      ``file://`` URLs to point to local directories or network shares as
5842      well.
5843
5844   :term:`PRIORITY`
5845      Indicates the importance of a package.
5846
5847      ``PRIORITY`` is considered to be part of the distribution policy
5848      because the importance of any given recipe depends on the purpose for
5849      which the distribution is being produced. Thus, ``PRIORITY`` is not
5850      normally set within recipes.
5851
5852      You can set ``PRIORITY`` to "required", "standard", "extra", and
5853      "optional", which is the default.
5854
5855   :term:`PRIVATE_LIBS`
5856      Specifies libraries installed within a recipe that should be ignored
5857      by the OpenEmbedded build system's shared library resolver. This
5858      variable is typically used when software being built by a recipe has
5859      its own private versions of a library normally provided by another
5860      recipe. In this case, you would not want the package containing the
5861      private libraries to be set as a dependency on other unrelated
5862      packages that should instead depend on the package providing the
5863      standard version of the library.
5864
5865      Libraries specified in this variable should be specified by their
5866      file name. For example, from the Firefox recipe in meta-browser:
5867      ::
5868
5869         PRIVATE_LIBS = "libmozjs.so \
5870                         libxpcom.so \
5871                         libnspr4.so \
5872                         libxul.so \
5873                         libmozalloc.so \
5874                         libplc4.so \
5875                         libplds4.so"
5876
5877      For more information, see the
5878      ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:automatically added runtime dependencies`"
5879      section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual.
5880
5881   :term:`PROVIDES`
5882      A list of aliases by which a particular recipe can be known. By
5883      default, a recipe's own ``PN`` is implicitly already in its
5884      ``PROVIDES`` list and therefore does not need to mention that it
5885      provides itself. If a recipe uses ``PROVIDES``, the additional
5886      aliases are synonyms for the recipe and can be useful for satisfying
5887      dependencies of other recipes during the build as specified by
5888      ``DEPENDS``.
5889
5890      Consider the following example ``PROVIDES`` statement from the recipe
5891      file ``eudev_3.2.9.bb``:
5892      ::
5893
5894         PROVIDES = "udev"
5895
5896      The ``PROVIDES`` statement
5897      results in the "eudev" recipe also being available as simply "udev".
5898
5899      .. note::
5900
5901         Given that a recipe's own recipe name is already implicitly in its
5902         own PROVIDES list, it is unnecessary to add aliases with the "+=" operator;
5903         using a simple assignment will be sufficient. In other words,
5904         while you could write:
5905         ::
5906
5907                 PROVIDES += "udev"
5908
5909
5910         in the above, the "+=" is overkill and unnecessary.
5911
5912      In addition to providing recipes under alternate names, the
5913      ``PROVIDES`` mechanism is also used to implement virtual targets. A
5914      virtual target is a name that corresponds to some particular
5915      functionality (e.g. a Linux kernel). Recipes that provide the
5916      functionality in question list the virtual target in ``PROVIDES``.
5917      Recipes that depend on the functionality in question can include the
5918      virtual target in ``DEPENDS`` to leave the choice of provider open.
5919
5920      Conventionally, virtual targets have names on the form
5921      "virtual/function" (e.g. "virtual/kernel"). The slash is simply part
5922      of the name and has no syntactical significance.
5923
5924      The :term:`PREFERRED_PROVIDER` variable is
5925      used to select which particular recipe provides a virtual target.
5926
5927      .. note::
5928
5929         A corresponding mechanism for virtual runtime dependencies
5930         (packages) exists. However, the mechanism does not depend on any
5931         special functionality beyond ordinary variable assignments. For
5932         example, ``VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_dev_manager`` refers to the package of
5933         the component that manages the ``/dev`` directory.
5934
5935         Setting the "preferred provider" for runtime dependencies is as
5936         simple as using the following assignment in a configuration file:
5937         ::
5938
5939                 VIRTUAL-RUNTIME_dev_manager = "udev"
5940
5941
5942   :term:`PRSERV_HOST`
5943      The network based :term:`PR` service host and port.
5944
5945      The ``conf/local.conf.sample.extended`` configuration file in the
5946      :term:`Source Directory` shows how the
5947      ``PRSERV_HOST`` variable is set:
5948      ::
5949
5950         PRSERV_HOST = "localhost:0"
5951
5952      You must
5953      set the variable if you want to automatically start a local :ref:`PR
5954      service <dev-manual/common-tasks:working with a pr service>`. You can
5955      set ``PRSERV_HOST`` to other values to use a remote PR service.
5956
5957
5958   :term:`PSEUDO_IGNORE_PATHS`
5959      A comma-separated (without spaces) list of path prefixes that should be ignored
5960      by pseudo when monitoring and recording file operations, in order to avoid
5961      problems with files being written to outside of the pseudo context and
5962      reduce pseudo's overhead. A path is ignored if it matches any prefix in the list
5963      and can include partial directory (or file) names.
5964
5965
5966   :term:`PTEST_ENABLED`
5967      Specifies whether or not :ref:`Package
5968      Test <dev-manual/common-tasks:testing packages with ptest>` (ptest)
5969      functionality is enabled when building a recipe. You should not set
5970      this variable directly. Enabling and disabling building Package Tests
5971      at build time should be done by adding "ptest" to (or removing it
5972      from) :term:`DISTRO_FEATURES`.
5973
5974   :term:`PV`
5975      The version of the recipe. The version is normally extracted from the
5976      recipe filename. For example, if the recipe is named
5977      ``expat_2.0.1.bb``, then the default value of ``PV`` will be "2.0.1".
5978      ``PV`` is generally not overridden within a recipe unless it is
5979      building an unstable (i.e. development) version from a source code
5980      repository (e.g. Git or Subversion).
5981
5982      ``PV`` is the default value of the :term:`PKGV` variable.
5983
5984   :term:`PYTHON_ABI`
5985      When used by recipes that inherit the
5986      :ref:`distutils3 <ref-classes-distutils3>`,
5987      :ref:`setuptools3 <ref-classes-setuptools3>`,
5988      :ref:`distutils <ref-classes-distutils>`, or
5989      :ref:`setuptools <ref-classes-setuptools>` classes, denotes the
5990      Application Binary Interface (ABI) currently in use for Python. By
5991      default, the ABI is "m". You do not have to set this variable as the
5992      OpenEmbedded build system sets it for you.
5993
5994      The OpenEmbedded build system uses the ABI to construct directory
5995      names used when installing the Python headers and libraries in
5996      sysroot (e.g. ``.../python3.3m/...``).
5997
5998      Recipes that inherit the ``distutils`` class during cross-builds also
5999      use this variable to locate the headers and libraries of the
6000      appropriate Python that the extension is targeting.
6001
6002   :term:`PYTHON_PN`
6003      When used by recipes that inherit the
6004      `distutils3 <ref-classes-distutils3>`,
6005      :ref:`setuptools3 <ref-classes-setuptools3>`,
6006      :ref:`distutils <ref-classes-distutils>`, or
6007      :ref:`setuptools <ref-classes-setuptools>` classes, specifies the
6008      major Python version being built. For Python 3.x, ``PYTHON_PN`` would
6009      be "python3". You do not have to set this variable as the
6010      OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets it for you.
6011
6012      The variable allows recipes to use common infrastructure such as the
6013      following:
6014      ::
6015
6016         DEPENDS += "${PYTHON_PN}-native"
6017
6018      In the previous example,
6019      the version of the dependency is ``PYTHON_PN``.
6020
6021   :term:`RANLIB`
6022      The minimal command and arguments to run ``ranlib``.
6023
6024   :term:`RCONFLICTS`
6025      The list of packages that conflict with packages. Note that packages
6026      will not be installed if conflicting packages are not first removed.
6027
6028      Like all package-controlling variables, you must always use them in
6029      conjunction with a package name override. Here is an example:
6030      ::
6031
6032         RCONFLICTS_${PN} = "another_conflicting_package_name"
6033
6034      BitBake, which the OpenEmbedded build system uses, supports
6035      specifying versioned dependencies. Although the syntax varies
6036      depending on the packaging format, BitBake hides these differences
6037      from you. Here is the general syntax to specify versions with the
6038      ``RCONFLICTS`` variable:
6039      ::
6040
6041         RCONFLICTS_${PN} = "package (operator version)"
6042
6043      For ``operator``, you can specify the following:
6044
6045      - =
6046      - <
6047      - >
6048      - <=
6049      - >=
6050
6051      For example, the following sets up a dependency on version 1.2 or
6052      greater of the package ``foo``:
6053      ::
6054
6055         RCONFLICTS_${PN} = "foo (>= 1.2)"
6056
6057   :term:`RDEPENDS`
6058      Lists runtime dependencies of a package. These dependencies are other
6059      packages that must be installed in order for the package to function
6060      correctly. As an example, the following assignment declares that the
6061      package ``foo`` needs the packages ``bar`` and ``baz`` to be
6062      installed:
6063      ::
6064
6065         RDEPENDS_foo = "bar baz"
6066
6067      The most common types of package
6068      runtime dependencies are automatically detected and added. Therefore,
6069      most recipes do not need to set ``RDEPENDS``. For more information,
6070      see the
6071      ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:automatically added runtime dependencies`"
6072      section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual.
6073
6074      The practical effect of the above ``RDEPENDS`` assignment is that
6075      ``bar`` and ``baz`` will be declared as dependencies inside the
6076      package ``foo`` when it is written out by one of the
6077      :ref:`do_package_write_\* <ref-tasks-package_write_deb>` tasks.
6078      Exactly how this is done depends on which package format is used,
6079      which is determined by
6080      :term:`PACKAGE_CLASSES`. When the
6081      corresponding package manager installs the package, it will know to
6082      also install the packages on which it depends.
6083
6084      To ensure that the packages ``bar`` and ``baz`` get built, the
6085      previous ``RDEPENDS`` assignment also causes a task dependency to be
6086      added. This dependency is from the recipe's
6087      :ref:`ref-tasks-build` (not to be confused with
6088      :ref:`ref-tasks-compile`) task to the
6089      ``do_package_write_*`` task of the recipes that build ``bar`` and
6090      ``baz``.
6091
6092      The names of the packages you list within ``RDEPENDS`` must be the
6093      names of other packages - they cannot be recipe names. Although
6094      package names and recipe names usually match, the important point
6095      here is that you are providing package names within the ``RDEPENDS``
6096      variable. For an example of the default list of packages created from
6097      a recipe, see the :term:`PACKAGES` variable.
6098
6099      Because the ``RDEPENDS`` variable applies to packages being built,
6100      you should always use the variable in a form with an attached package
6101      name (remember that a single recipe can build multiple packages). For
6102      example, suppose you are building a development package that depends
6103      on the ``perl`` package. In this case, you would use the following
6104      ``RDEPENDS`` statement:
6105      ::
6106
6107         RDEPENDS_${PN}-dev += "perl"
6108
6109      In the example,
6110      the development package depends on the ``perl`` package. Thus, the
6111      ``RDEPENDS`` variable has the ``${PN}-dev`` package name as part of
6112      the variable.
6113
6114      .. note::
6115
6116         ``RDEPENDS_${PN}-dev`` includes ``${``\ :term:`PN`\ ``}``
6117         by default. This default is set in the BitBake configuration file
6118         (``meta/conf/bitbake.conf``). Be careful not to accidentally remove
6119         ``${PN}`` when modifying ``RDEPENDS_${PN}-dev``. Use the "+=" operator
6120         rather than the "=" operator.
6121
6122      The package names you use with ``RDEPENDS`` must appear as they would
6123      in the ``PACKAGES`` variable. The :term:`PKG` variable
6124      allows a different name to be used for the final package (e.g. the
6125      :ref:`debian <ref-classes-debian>` class uses this to rename
6126      packages), but this final package name cannot be used with
6127      ``RDEPENDS``, which makes sense as ``RDEPENDS`` is meant to be
6128      independent of the package format used.
6129
6130      BitBake, which the OpenEmbedded build system uses, supports
6131      specifying versioned dependencies. Although the syntax varies
6132      depending on the packaging format, BitBake hides these differences
6133      from you. Here is the general syntax to specify versions with the
6134      ``RDEPENDS`` variable:
6135      ::
6136
6137         RDEPENDS_${PN} = "package (operator version)"
6138
6139      For ``operator``, you can specify the following:
6140
6141      - =
6142      - <
6143      - >
6144      - <=
6145      - >=
6146
6147      For version, provide the version number.
6148
6149      .. note::
6150
6151         You can use ``EXTENDPKGV`` to provide a full package version
6152         specification.
6153
6154      For example, the following sets up a dependency on version 1.2 or
6155      greater of the package ``foo``:
6156      ::
6157
6158         RDEPENDS_${PN} = "foo (>= 1.2)"
6159
6160      For information on build-time dependencies, see the
6161      :term:`DEPENDS` variable. You can also see the
6162      ":ref:`Tasks <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-metadata:tasks>`" and
6163      ":ref:`Dependencies <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-execution:dependencies>`" sections in the
6164      BitBake User Manual for additional information on tasks and
6165      dependencies.
6166
6167   :term:`REQUIRED_DISTRO_FEATURES`
6168      When inheriting the
6169      :ref:`features_check <ref-classes-features_check>`
6170      class, this variable identifies distribution features that must exist
6171      in the current configuration in order for the OpenEmbedded build
6172      system to build the recipe. In other words, if the
6173      ``REQUIRED_DISTRO_FEATURES`` variable lists a feature that does not
6174      appear in ``DISTRO_FEATURES`` within the current configuration, then
6175      the recipe will be skipped, and if the build system attempts to build
6176      the recipe then an error will be triggered.
6177
6178   :term:`RM_WORK_EXCLUDE`
6179      With ``rm_work`` enabled, this variable specifies a list of recipes
6180      whose work directories should not be removed. See the
6181      ":ref:`rm_work.bbclass <ref-classes-rm-work>`" section for more
6182      details.
6183
6184   :term:`ROOT_HOME`
6185      Defines the root home directory. By default, this directory is set as
6186      follows in the BitBake configuration file:
6187      ::
6188
6189         ROOT_HOME ??= "/home/root"
6190
6191      .. note::
6192
6193         This default value is likely used because some embedded solutions
6194         prefer to have a read-only root filesystem and prefer to keep
6195         writeable data in one place.
6196
6197      You can override the default by setting the variable in any layer or
6198      in the ``local.conf`` file. Because the default is set using a "weak"
6199      assignment (i.e. "??="), you can use either of the following forms to
6200      define your override:
6201      ::
6202
6203         ROOT_HOME = "/root"
6204         ROOT_HOME ?= "/root"
6205
6206      These
6207      override examples use ``/root``, which is probably the most commonly
6208      used override.
6209
6210   :term:`ROOTFS`
6211      Indicates a filesystem image to include as the root filesystem.
6212
6213      The ``ROOTFS`` variable is an optional variable used with the
6214      :ref:`image-live <ref-classes-image-live>` class.
6215
6216   :term:`ROOTFS_POSTINSTALL_COMMAND`
6217      Specifies a list of functions to call after the OpenEmbedded build
6218      system has installed packages. You can specify functions separated by
6219      semicolons:
6220      ::
6221
6222         ROOTFS_POSTINSTALL_COMMAND += "function; ... "
6223
6224      If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command within a
6225      function, you can use ``${IMAGE_ROOTFS}``, which points to the
6226      directory that becomes the root filesystem image. See the
6227      :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` variable for more
6228      information.
6229
6230   :term:`ROOTFS_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND`
6231      Specifies a list of functions to call once the OpenEmbedded build
6232      system has created the root filesystem. You can specify functions
6233      separated by semicolons:
6234      ::
6235
6236         ROOTFS_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND += "function; ... "
6237
6238      If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command within a
6239      function, you can use ``${IMAGE_ROOTFS}``, which points to the
6240      directory that becomes the root filesystem image. See the
6241      :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` variable for more
6242      information.
6243
6244   :term:`ROOTFS_POSTUNINSTALL_COMMAND`
6245      Specifies a list of functions to call after the OpenEmbedded build
6246      system has removed unnecessary packages. When runtime package
6247      management is disabled in the image, several packages are removed
6248      including ``base-passwd``, ``shadow``, and ``update-alternatives``.
6249      You can specify functions separated by semicolons:
6250      ::
6251
6252         ROOTFS_POSTUNINSTALL_COMMAND += "function; ... "
6253
6254      If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command within a
6255      function, you can use ``${IMAGE_ROOTFS}``, which points to the
6256      directory that becomes the root filesystem image. See the
6257      :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` variable for more
6258      information.
6259
6260   :term:`ROOTFS_PREPROCESS_COMMAND`
6261      Specifies a list of functions to call before the OpenEmbedded build
6262      system has created the root filesystem. You can specify functions
6263      separated by semicolons:
6264      ::
6265
6266         ROOTFS_PREPROCESS_COMMAND += "function; ... "
6267
6268      If you need to pass the root filesystem path to a command within a
6269      function, you can use ``${IMAGE_ROOTFS}``, which points to the
6270      directory that becomes the root filesystem image. See the
6271      :term:`IMAGE_ROOTFS` variable for more
6272      information.
6273
6274   :term:`RPROVIDES`
6275      A list of package name aliases that a package also provides. These
6276      aliases are useful for satisfying runtime dependencies of other
6277      packages both during the build and on the target (as specified by
6278      ``RDEPENDS``).
6279
6280      .. note::
6281
6282         A package's own name is implicitly already in its ``RPROVIDES`` list.
6283
6284      As with all package-controlling variables, you must always use the
6285      variable in conjunction with a package name override. Here is an
6286      example:
6287      ::
6288
6289         RPROVIDES_${PN} = "widget-abi-2"
6290
6291   :term:`RRECOMMENDS`
6292      A list of packages that extends the usability of a package being
6293      built. The package being built does not depend on this list of
6294      packages in order to successfully build, but rather uses them for
6295      extended usability. To specify runtime dependencies for packages, see
6296      the ``RDEPENDS`` variable.
6297
6298      The package manager will automatically install the ``RRECOMMENDS``
6299      list of packages when installing the built package. However, you can
6300      prevent listed packages from being installed by using the
6301      :term:`BAD_RECOMMENDATIONS`,
6302      :term:`NO_RECOMMENDATIONS`, and
6303      :term:`PACKAGE_EXCLUDE` variables.
6304
6305      Packages specified in ``RRECOMMENDS`` need not actually be produced.
6306      However, a recipe must exist that provides each package, either
6307      through the :term:`PACKAGES` or
6308      :term:`PACKAGES_DYNAMIC` variables or the
6309      :term:`RPROVIDES` variable, or an error will occur
6310      during the build. If such a recipe does exist and the package is not
6311      produced, the build continues without error.
6312
6313      Because the ``RRECOMMENDS`` variable applies to packages being built,
6314      you should always attach an override to the variable to specify the
6315      particular package whose usability is being extended. For example,
6316      suppose you are building a development package that is extended to
6317      support wireless functionality. In this case, you would use the
6318      following:
6319      ::
6320
6321         RRECOMMENDS_${PN}-dev += "wireless_package_name"
6322
6323      In the
6324      example, the package name (``${PN}-dev``) must appear as it would in
6325      the ``PACKAGES`` namespace before any renaming of the output package
6326      by classes such as ``debian.bbclass``.
6327
6328      BitBake, which the OpenEmbedded build system uses, supports
6329      specifying versioned recommends. Although the syntax varies depending
6330      on the packaging format, BitBake hides these differences from you.
6331      Here is the general syntax to specify versions with the
6332      ``RRECOMMENDS`` variable:
6333      ::
6334
6335         RRECOMMENDS_${PN} = "package (operator version)"
6336
6337      For ``operator``, you can specify the following:
6338
6339      - =
6340      - <
6341      - >
6342      - <=
6343      - >=
6344
6345      For example, the following sets up a recommend on version 1.2 or
6346      greater of the package ``foo``:
6347      ::
6348
6349         RRECOMMENDS_${PN} = "foo (>= 1.2)"
6350
6351   :term:`RREPLACES`
6352      A list of packages replaced by a package. The package manager uses
6353      this variable to determine which package should be installed to
6354      replace other package(s) during an upgrade. In order to also have the
6355      other package(s) removed at the same time, you must add the name of
6356      the other package to the ``RCONFLICTS`` variable.
6357
6358      As with all package-controlling variables, you must use this variable
6359      in conjunction with a package name override. Here is an example:
6360      ::
6361
6362         RREPLACES_${PN} = "other_package_being_replaced"
6363
6364      BitBake, which the OpenEmbedded build system uses, supports
6365      specifying versioned replacements. Although the syntax varies
6366      depending on the packaging format, BitBake hides these differences
6367      from you. Here is the general syntax to specify versions with the
6368      ``RREPLACES`` variable:
6369      ::
6370
6371         RREPLACES_${PN} = "package (operator version)"
6372
6373      For ``operator``, you can specify the following:
6374
6375      - =
6376      - <
6377      - >
6378      - <=
6379      - >=
6380
6381      For example, the following sets up a replacement using version 1.2
6382      or greater of the package ``foo``:
6383      ::
6384
6385          RREPLACES_${PN} = "foo (>= 1.2)"
6386
6387   :term:`RSUGGESTS`
6388      A list of additional packages that you can suggest for installation
6389      by the package manager at the time a package is installed. Not all
6390      package managers support this functionality.
6391
6392      As with all package-controlling variables, you must always use this
6393      variable in conjunction with a package name override. Here is an
6394      example:
6395      ::
6396
6397         RSUGGESTS_${PN} = "useful_package another_package"
6398
6399   :term:`S`
6400      The location in the :term:`Build Directory` where
6401      unpacked recipe source code resides. By default, this directory is
6402      ``${``\ :term:`WORKDIR`\ ``}/${``\ :term:`BPN`\ ``}-${``\ :term:`PV`\ ``}``,
6403      where ``${BPN}`` is the base recipe name and ``${PV}`` is the recipe
6404      version. If the source tarball extracts the code to a directory named
6405      anything other than ``${BPN}-${PV}``, or if the source code is
6406      fetched from an SCM such as Git or Subversion, then you must set
6407      ``S`` in the recipe so that the OpenEmbedded build system knows where
6408      to find the unpacked source.
6409
6410      As an example, assume a :term:`Source Directory`
6411      top-level folder named ``poky`` and a default Build Directory at
6412      ``poky/build``. In this case, the work directory the build system
6413      uses to keep the unpacked recipe for ``db`` is the following:
6414      ::
6415
6416         poky/build/tmp/work/qemux86-poky-linux/db/5.1.19-r3/db-5.1.19
6417
6418      The unpacked source code resides in the ``db-5.1.19`` folder.
6419
6420      This next example assumes a Git repository. By default, Git
6421      repositories are cloned to ``${WORKDIR}/git`` during
6422      :ref:`ref-tasks-fetch`. Since this path is different
6423      from the default value of ``S``, you must set it specifically so the
6424      source can be located:
6425      ::
6426
6427         SRC_URI = "git://path/to/repo.git"
6428         S = "${WORKDIR}/git"
6429
6430   :term:`SANITY_REQUIRED_UTILITIES`
6431      Specifies a list of command-line utilities that should be checked for
6432      during the initial sanity checking process when running BitBake. If
6433      any of the utilities are not installed on the build host, then
6434      BitBake immediately exits with an error.
6435
6436   :term:`SANITY_TESTED_DISTROS`
6437      A list of the host distribution identifiers that the build system has
6438      been tested against. Identifiers consist of the host distributor ID
6439      followed by the release, as reported by the ``lsb_release`` tool or
6440      as read from ``/etc/lsb-release``. Separate the list items with
6441      explicit newline characters (``\n``). If ``SANITY_TESTED_DISTROS`` is
6442      not empty and the current value of
6443      :term:`NATIVELSBSTRING` does not appear in the
6444      list, then the build system reports a warning that indicates the
6445      current host distribution has not been tested as a build host.
6446
6447   :term:`SDK_ARCH`
6448      The target architecture for the SDK. Typically, you do not directly
6449      set this variable. Instead, use :term:`SDKMACHINE`.
6450
6451   :term:`SDK_DEPLOY`
6452      The directory set up and used by the
6453      :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk>` class to which
6454      the SDK is deployed. The ``populate_sdk_base`` class defines
6455      ``SDK_DEPLOY`` as follows:
6456      ::
6457
6458         SDK_DEPLOY = "${TMPDIR}/deploy/sdk"
6459
6460   :term:`SDK_DIR`
6461      The parent directory used by the OpenEmbedded build system when
6462      creating SDK output. The
6463      :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class defines
6464      the variable as follows:
6465      ::
6466
6467         SDK_DIR = "${WORKDIR}/sdk"
6468
6469      .. note::
6470
6471         The ``SDK_DIR`` directory is a temporary directory as it is part of
6472         ``WORKDIR``. The final output directory is :term:`SDK_DEPLOY`.
6473
6474   :term:`SDK_EXT_TYPE`
6475      Controls whether or not shared state artifacts are copied into the
6476      extensible SDK. The default value of "full" copies all of the
6477      required shared state artifacts into the extensible SDK. The value
6478      "minimal" leaves these artifacts out of the SDK.
6479
6480      .. note::
6481
6482         If you set the variable to "minimal", you need to ensure
6483         :term:`SSTATE_MIRRORS` is set in the SDK's configuration to enable the
6484         artifacts to be fetched as needed.
6485
6486   :term:`SDK_HOST_MANIFEST`
6487      The manifest file for the host part of the SDK. This file lists all
6488      the installed packages that make up the host part of the SDK. The
6489      file contains package information on a line-per-package basis as
6490      follows:
6491      ::
6492
6493         packagename packagearch version
6494
6495      The :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class
6496      defines the manifest file as follows:
6497      ::
6498
6499         SDK_HOST_MANIFEST = "${SDK_DEPLOY}/${TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME}.host.manifest"
6500
6501      The location is derived using the :term:`SDK_DEPLOY` and
6502      :term:`TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME` variables.
6503
6504   :term:`SDK_INCLUDE_PKGDATA`
6505      When set to "1", specifies to include the packagedata for all recipes
6506      in the "world" target in the extensible SDK. Including this data
6507      allows the ``devtool search`` command to find these recipes in search
6508      results, as well as allows the ``devtool add`` command to map
6509      dependencies more effectively.
6510
6511      .. note::
6512
6513         Enabling the ``SDK_INCLUDE_PKGDATA``
6514         variable significantly increases build time because all of world
6515         needs to be built. Enabling the variable also slightly increases
6516         the size of the extensible SDK.
6517
6518   :term:`SDK_INCLUDE_TOOLCHAIN`
6519      When set to "1", specifies to include the toolchain in the extensible
6520      SDK. Including the toolchain is useful particularly when
6521      :term:`SDK_EXT_TYPE` is set to "minimal" to keep
6522      the SDK reasonably small but you still want to provide a usable
6523      toolchain. For example, suppose you want to use the toolchain from an
6524      IDE or from other tools and you do not want to perform additional
6525      steps to install the toolchain.
6526
6527      The ``SDK_INCLUDE_TOOLCHAIN`` variable defaults to "0" if
6528      ``SDK_EXT_TYPE`` is set to "minimal", and defaults to "1" if
6529      ``SDK_EXT_TYPE`` is set to "full".
6530
6531   :term:`SDK_INHERIT_BLACKLIST`
6532      A list of classes to remove from the :term:`INHERIT`
6533      value globally within the extensible SDK configuration. The
6534      :ref:`populate-sdk-ext <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class sets the
6535      default value:
6536      ::
6537
6538         SDK_INHERIT_BLACKLIST ?= "buildhistory icecc"
6539
6540      Some classes are not generally applicable within the extensible SDK
6541      context. You can use this variable to disable those classes.
6542
6543      For additional information on how to customize the extensible SDK's
6544      configuration, see the
6545      ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing:configuring the extensible sdk`"
6546      section in the Yocto Project Application Development and the
6547      Extensible Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual.
6548
6549   :term:`SDK_LOCAL_CONF_BLACKLIST`
6550      A list of variables not allowed through from the OpenEmbedded build
6551      system configuration into the extensible SDK configuration. Usually,
6552      these are variables that are specific to the machine on which the
6553      build system is running and thus would be potentially problematic
6554      within the extensible SDK.
6555
6556      By default, ``SDK_LOCAL_CONF_BLACKLIST`` is set in the
6557      :ref:`populate-sdk-ext <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class and
6558      excludes the following variables:
6559
6560      - :term:`CONF_VERSION`
6561      - :term:`BB_NUMBER_THREADS`
6562      - :term:`bitbake:BB_NUMBER_PARSE_THREADS`
6563      - :term:`PARALLEL_MAKE`
6564      - :term:`PRSERV_HOST`
6565      - :term:`SSTATE_MIRRORS` :term:`DL_DIR`
6566      - :term:`SSTATE_DIR` :term:`TMPDIR`
6567      - :term:`BB_SERVER_TIMEOUT`
6568
6569      For additional information on how to customize the extensible SDK's
6570      configuration, see the
6571      ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing:configuring the extensible sdk`"
6572      section in the Yocto Project Application Development and the
6573      Extensible Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual.
6574
6575   :term:`SDK_LOCAL_CONF_WHITELIST`
6576      A list of variables allowed through from the OpenEmbedded build
6577      system configuration into the extensible SDK configuration. By
6578      default, the list of variables is empty and is set in the
6579      :ref:`populate-sdk-ext <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class.
6580
6581      This list overrides the variables specified using the
6582      :term:`SDK_LOCAL_CONF_BLACKLIST`
6583      variable as well as any variables identified by automatic
6584      blacklisting due to the "/" character being found at the start of the
6585      value, which is usually indicative of being a path and thus might not
6586      be valid on the system where the SDK is installed.
6587
6588      For additional information on how to customize the extensible SDK's
6589      configuration, see the
6590      ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing:configuring the extensible sdk`"
6591      section in the Yocto Project Application Development and the
6592      Extensible Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual.
6593
6594   :term:`SDK_NAME`
6595      The base name for SDK output files. The name is derived from the
6596      :term:`DISTRO`, :term:`TCLIBC`,
6597      :term:`SDK_ARCH`,
6598      :term:`IMAGE_BASENAME`, and
6599      :term:`TUNE_PKGARCH` variables:
6600      ::
6601
6602         SDK_NAME = "${DISTRO}-${TCLIBC}-${SDK_ARCH}-${IMAGE_BASENAME}-${TUNE_PKGARCH}"
6603
6604   :term:`SDK_OS`
6605      Specifies the operating system for which the SDK will be built. The
6606      default value is the value of :term:`BUILD_OS`.
6607
6608   :term:`SDK_OUTPUT`
6609      The location used by the OpenEmbedded build system when creating SDK
6610      output. The :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>`
6611      class defines the variable as follows:
6612      ::
6613
6614         SDK_DIR = "${WORKDIR}/sdk"
6615         SDK_OUTPUT = "${SDK_DIR}/image"
6616         SDK_DEPLOY = "${DEPLOY_DIR}/sdk"
6617
6618      .. note::
6619
6620         The ``SDK_OUTPUT`` directory is a temporary directory as it is part of
6621         :term:`WORKDIR` by way of :term:`SDK_DIR`. The final output directory is
6622         :term:`SDK_DEPLOY`.
6623
6624   :term:`SDK_PACKAGE_ARCHS`
6625      Specifies a list of architectures compatible with the SDK machine.
6626      This variable is set automatically and should not normally be
6627      hand-edited. Entries are separated using spaces and listed in order
6628      of priority. The default value for ``SDK_PACKAGE_ARCHS`` is "all any
6629      noarch ${SDK_ARCH}-${SDKPKGSUFFIX}".
6630
6631   :term:`SDK_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND`
6632      Specifies a list of functions to call once the OpenEmbedded build
6633      system creates the SDK. You can specify functions separated by
6634      semicolons: SDK_POSTPROCESS_COMMAND += "function; ... "
6635
6636      If you need to pass an SDK path to a command within a function, you
6637      can use ``${SDK_DIR}``, which points to the parent directory used by
6638      the OpenEmbedded build system when creating SDK output. See the
6639      :term:`SDK_DIR` variable for more information.
6640
6641   :term:`SDK_PREFIX`
6642      The toolchain binary prefix used for ``nativesdk`` recipes. The
6643      OpenEmbedded build system uses the ``SDK_PREFIX`` value to set the
6644      :term:`TARGET_PREFIX` when building
6645      ``nativesdk`` recipes. The default value is "${SDK_SYS}-".
6646
6647   :term:`SDK_RECRDEP_TASKS`
6648      A list of shared state tasks added to the extensible SDK. By default,
6649      the following tasks are added:
6650
6651      - do_populate_lic
6652      - do_package_qa
6653      - do_populate_sysroot
6654      - do_deploy
6655
6656      Despite the default value of "" for the
6657      ``SDK_RECRDEP_TASKS`` variable, the above four tasks are always added
6658      to the SDK. To specify tasks beyond these four, you need to use the
6659      ``SDK_RECRDEP_TASKS`` variable (e.g. you are defining additional
6660      tasks that are needed in order to build
6661      :term:`SDK_TARGETS`).
6662
6663   :term:`SDK_SYS`
6664      Specifies the system, including the architecture and the operating
6665      system, for which the SDK will be built.
6666
6667      The OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets this variable based
6668      on :term:`SDK_ARCH`,
6669      :term:`SDK_VENDOR`, and
6670      :term:`SDK_OS`. You do not need to set the ``SDK_SYS``
6671      variable yourself.
6672
6673   :term:`SDK_TARGET_MANIFEST`
6674      The manifest file for the target part of the SDK. This file lists all
6675      the installed packages that make up the target part of the SDK. The
6676      file contains package information on a line-per-package basis as
6677      follows:
6678      ::
6679
6680         packagename packagearch version
6681
6682      The :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class
6683      defines the manifest file as follows:
6684      ::
6685
6686         SDK_TARGET_MANIFEST = "${SDK_DEPLOY}/${TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME}.target.manifest"
6687
6688      The location is derived using the :term:`SDK_DEPLOY` and
6689      :term:`TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME` variables.
6690
6691   :term:`SDK_TARGETS`
6692      A list of targets to install from shared state as part of the
6693      standard or extensible SDK installation. The default value is "${PN}"
6694      (i.e. the image from which the SDK is built).
6695
6696      The ``SDK_TARGETS`` variable is an internal variable and typically
6697      would not be changed.
6698
6699   :term:`SDK_TITLE`
6700      The title to be printed when running the SDK installer. By default,
6701      this title is based on the :term:`DISTRO_NAME` or
6702      :term:`DISTRO` variable and is set in the
6703      :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class as
6704      follows:
6705      ::
6706
6707         SDK_TITLE ??= "${@d.getVar('DISTRO_NAME') or d.getVar('DISTRO')} SDK"
6708
6709      For the default distribution "poky",
6710      ``SDK_TITLE`` is set to "Poky (Yocto Project Reference Distro)".
6711
6712      For information on how to change this default title, see the
6713      ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing:changing the extensible sdk installer title`"
6714      section in the Yocto Project Application Development and the
6715      Extensible Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual.
6716
6717   :term:`SDK_UPDATE_URL`
6718      An optional URL for an update server for the extensible SDK. If set,
6719      the value is used as the default update server when running
6720      ``devtool sdk-update`` within the extensible SDK.
6721
6722   :term:`SDK_VENDOR`
6723      Specifies the name of the SDK vendor.
6724
6725   :term:`SDK_VERSION`
6726      Specifies the version of the SDK. The distribution configuration file
6727      (e.g. ``/meta-poky/conf/distro/poky.conf``) defines the
6728      ``SDK_VERSION`` as follows:
6729      ::
6730
6731         SDK_VERSION = "${@d.getVar('DISTRO_VERSION').replace('snapshot-${DATE}','snapshot')}"
6732
6733      For additional information, see the
6734      :term:`DISTRO_VERSION` and
6735      :term:`DATE` variables.
6736
6737   :term:`SDKEXTPATH`
6738      The default installation directory for the Extensible SDK. By
6739      default, this directory is based on the :term:`DISTRO`
6740      variable and is set in the
6741      :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class as
6742      follows:
6743      ::
6744
6745         SDKEXTPATH ??= "~/${@d.getVar('DISTRO')}_sdk"
6746
6747      For the
6748      default distribution "poky", the ``SDKEXTPATH`` is set to "poky_sdk".
6749
6750      For information on how to change this default directory, see the
6751      ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing:changing the default sdk installation directory`"
6752      section in the Yocto Project Application Development and the
6753      Extensible Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual.
6754
6755   :term:`SDKIMAGE_FEATURES`
6756      Equivalent to ``IMAGE_FEATURES``. However, this variable applies to
6757      the SDK generated from an image using the following command:
6758      ::
6759
6760         $ bitbake -c populate_sdk imagename
6761
6762   :term:`SDKMACHINE`
6763      The machine for which the SDK is built. In other words, the SDK is
6764      built such that it runs on the target you specify with the
6765      ``SDKMACHINE`` value. The value points to a corresponding ``.conf``
6766      file under ``conf/machine-sdk/``.
6767
6768      You can use "i686" and "x86_64" as possible values for this variable.
6769      The variable defaults to "i686" and is set in the local.conf file in
6770      the Build Directory.
6771      ::
6772
6773         SDKMACHINE ?= "i686"
6774
6775      .. note::
6776
6777         You cannot set the ``SDKMACHINE``
6778         variable in your distribution configuration file. If you do, the
6779         configuration will not take affect.
6780
6781   :term:`SDKPATH`
6782      Defines the path offered to the user for installation of the SDK that
6783      is generated by the OpenEmbedded build system. The path appears as
6784      the default location for installing the SDK when you run the SDK's
6785      installation script. You can override the offered path when you run
6786      the script.
6787
6788   :term:`SDKTARGETSYSROOT`
6789      The full path to the sysroot used for cross-compilation within an SDK
6790      as it will be when installed into the default
6791      :term:`SDKPATH`.
6792
6793   :term:`SECTION`
6794      The section in which packages should be categorized. Package
6795      management utilities can make use of this variable.
6796
6797   :term:`SELECTED_OPTIMIZATION`
6798      Specifies the optimization flags passed to the C compiler when
6799      building for the target. The flags are passed through the default
6800      value of the :term:`TARGET_CFLAGS` variable.
6801
6802      The ``SELECTED_OPTIMIZATION`` variable takes the value of
6803      ``FULL_OPTIMIZATION`` unless ``DEBUG_BUILD`` = "1". If that is the
6804      case, the value of ``DEBUG_OPTIMIZATION`` is used.
6805
6806   :term:`SERIAL_CONSOLE`
6807      Defines a serial console (TTY) to enable using
6808      `getty <https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Getty_(Unix)>`__. Provide a
6809      value that specifies the baud rate followed by the TTY device name
6810      separated by a space. You cannot specify more than one TTY device:
6811      ::
6812
6813         SERIAL_CONSOLE = "115200 ttyS0"
6814
6815      .. note::
6816
6817         The ``SERIAL_CONSOLE`` variable is deprecated. Please use the
6818         :term:`SERIAL_CONSOLES` variable.
6819
6820   :term:`SERIAL_CONSOLES`
6821      Defines a serial console (TTY) to enable using
6822      `getty <https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Getty_(Unix)>`__. Provide a
6823      value that specifies the baud rate followed by the TTY device name
6824      separated by a semicolon. Use spaces to separate multiple devices:
6825      ::
6826
6827         SERIAL_CONSOLES = "115200;ttyS0 115200;ttyS1"
6828
6829   :term:`SERIAL_CONSOLES_CHECK`
6830      Specifies serial consoles, which must be listed in
6831      :term:`SERIAL_CONSOLES`, to check against
6832      ``/proc/console`` before enabling them using getty. This variable
6833      allows aliasing in the format: <device>:<alias>. If a device was
6834      listed as "sclp_line0" in ``/dev/`` and "ttyS0" was listed in
6835      ``/proc/console``, you would do the following: ::
6836
6837         SERIAL_CONSOLES_CHECK = "slcp_line0:ttyS0"
6838
6839      This variable is currently only supported with SysVinit (i.e. not
6840      with systemd).
6841
6842   :term:`SIGGEN_EXCLUDE_SAFE_RECIPE_DEPS`
6843      A list of recipe dependencies that should not be used to determine
6844      signatures of tasks from one recipe when they depend on tasks from
6845      another recipe. For example: ::
6846
6847         SIGGEN_EXCLUDE_SAFE_RECIPE_DEPS += "intone->mplayer2"
6848
6849      In the previous example, ``intone`` depends on ``mplayer2``.
6850
6851      You can use the special token ``"*"`` on the left-hand side of the
6852      dependency to match all recipes except the one on the right-hand
6853      side. Here is an example: ::
6854
6855         SIGGEN_EXCLUDE_SAFE_RECIPE_DEPS += "*->quilt-native"
6856
6857      In the previous example, all recipes except ``quilt-native`` ignore
6858      task signatures from the ``quilt-native`` recipe when determining
6859      their task signatures.
6860
6861      Use of this variable is one mechanism to remove dependencies that
6862      affect task signatures and thus force rebuilds when a recipe changes.
6863
6864      .. note::
6865
6866         If you add an inappropriate dependency for a recipe relationship,
6867         the software might break during runtime if the interface of the
6868         second recipe was changed after the first recipe had been built.
6869
6870   :term:`SIGGEN_EXCLUDERECIPES_ABISAFE`
6871      A list of recipes that are completely stable and will never change.
6872      The ABI for the recipes in the list are presented by output from the
6873      tasks run to build the recipe. Use of this variable is one way to
6874      remove dependencies from one recipe on another that affect task
6875      signatures and thus force rebuilds when the recipe changes.
6876
6877      .. note::
6878
6879         If you add an inappropriate variable to this list, the software
6880         might break at runtime if the interface of the recipe was changed
6881         after the other had been built.
6882
6883   :term:`SITEINFO_BITS`
6884      Specifies the number of bits for the target system CPU. The value
6885      should be either "32" or "64".
6886
6887   :term:`SITEINFO_ENDIANNESS`
6888      Specifies the endian byte order of the target system. The value
6889      should be either "le" for little-endian or "be" for big-endian.
6890
6891   :term:`SKIP_FILEDEPS`
6892      Enables removal of all files from the "Provides" section of an RPM
6893      package. Removal of these files is required for packages containing
6894      prebuilt binaries and libraries such as ``libstdc++`` and ``glibc``.
6895
6896      To enable file removal, set the variable to "1" in your
6897      ``conf/local.conf`` configuration file in your:
6898      :term:`Build Directory`.
6899      ::
6900
6901         SKIP_FILEDEPS = "1"
6902
6903   :term:`SOC_FAMILY`
6904      Groups together machines based upon the same family of SOC (System On
6905      Chip). You typically set this variable in a common ``.inc`` file that
6906      you include in the configuration files of all the machines.
6907
6908      .. note::
6909
6910         You must include ``conf/machine/include/soc-family.inc`` for this
6911         variable to appear in :term:`MACHINEOVERRIDES`.
6912
6913   :term:`SOLIBS`
6914      Defines the suffix for shared libraries used on the target platform.
6915      By default, this suffix is ".so.*" for all Linux-based systems and is
6916      defined in the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` configuration file.
6917
6918      You will see this variable referenced in the default values of
6919      ``FILES_${PN}``.
6920
6921   :term:`SOLIBSDEV`
6922      Defines the suffix for the development symbolic link (symlink) for
6923      shared libraries on the target platform. By default, this suffix is
6924      ".so" for Linux-based systems and is defined in the
6925      ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf`` configuration file.
6926
6927      You will see this variable referenced in the default values of
6928      ``FILES_${PN}-dev``.
6929
6930   :term:`SOURCE_MIRROR_FETCH`
6931      When you are fetching files to create a mirror of sources (i.e.
6932      creating a source mirror), setting ``SOURCE_MIRROR_FETCH`` to "1" in
6933      your ``local.conf`` configuration file ensures the source for all
6934      recipes are fetched regardless of whether or not a recipe is
6935      compatible with the configuration. A recipe is considered
6936      incompatible with the currently configured machine when either or
6937      both the :term:`COMPATIBLE_MACHINE`
6938      variable and :term:`COMPATIBLE_HOST` variables
6939      specify compatibility with a machine other than that of the current
6940      machine or host.
6941
6942      .. note::
6943
6944         Do not set the ``SOURCE_MIRROR_FETCH``
6945         variable unless you are creating a source mirror. In other words,
6946         do not set the variable during a normal build.
6947
6948   :term:`SOURCE_MIRROR_URL`
6949      Defines your own :term:`PREMIRRORS` from which to
6950      first fetch source before attempting to fetch from the upstream
6951      specified in :term:`SRC_URI`.
6952
6953      To use this variable, you must globally inherit the
6954      :ref:`own-mirrors <ref-classes-own-mirrors>` class and then provide
6955      the URL to your mirrors. Here is the general syntax:
6956      ::
6957
6958         INHERIT += "own-mirrors"
6959         SOURCE_MIRROR_URL = "http://example.com/my_source_mirror"
6960
6961      .. note::
6962
6963         You can specify only a single URL in ``SOURCE_MIRROR_URL``.
6964
6965   :term:`SPDXLICENSEMAP`
6966      Maps commonly used license names to their SPDX counterparts found in
6967      ``meta/files/common-licenses/``. For the default ``SPDXLICENSEMAP``
6968      mappings, see the ``meta/conf/licenses.conf`` file.
6969
6970      For additional information, see the :term:`LICENSE`
6971      variable.
6972
6973   :term:`SPECIAL_PKGSUFFIX`
6974      A list of prefixes for :term:`PN` used by the OpenEmbedded
6975      build system to create variants of recipes or packages. The list
6976      specifies the prefixes to strip off during certain circumstances such
6977      as the generation of the :term:`BPN` variable.
6978
6979   :term:`SPL_BINARY`
6980      The file type for the Secondary Program Loader (SPL). Some devices
6981      use an SPL from which to boot (e.g. the BeagleBone development
6982      board). For such cases, you can declare the file type of the SPL
6983      binary in the ``u-boot.inc`` include file, which is used in the
6984      U-Boot recipe.
6985
6986      The SPL file type is set to "null" by default in the ``u-boot.inc``
6987      file as follows:
6988      ::
6989
6990         # Some versions of u-boot build an SPL (Second Program Loader) image that
6991         # should be packaged along with the u-boot binary as well as placed in the
6992         # deploy directory. For those versions they can set the following variables
6993         # to allow packaging the SPL.
6994         SPL_BINARY ?= ""
6995         SPL_BINARYNAME ?= "${@os.path.basename(d.getVar("SPL_BINARY"))}"
6996         SPL_IMAGE ?= "${SPL_BINARYNAME}-${MACHINE}-${PV}-${PR}"
6997         SPL_SYMLINK ?= "${SPL_BINARYNAME}-${MACHINE}"
6998
6999      The ``SPL_BINARY`` variable helps form
7000      various ``SPL_*`` variables used by the OpenEmbedded build system.
7001
7002      See the BeagleBone machine configuration example in the
7003      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:adding a layer using the \`\`bitbake-layers\`\` script`"
7004      section in the Yocto Project Board Support Package Developer's Guide
7005      for additional information.
7006
7007   :term:`SRC_URI`
7008      The list of source files - local or remote. This variable tells the
7009      OpenEmbedded build system which bits to pull in for the build and how
7010      to pull them in. For example, if the recipe or append file only needs
7011      to fetch a tarball from the Internet, the recipe or append file uses
7012      a single ``SRC_URI`` entry. On the other hand, if the recipe or
7013      append file needs to fetch a tarball, apply two patches, and include
7014      a custom file, the recipe or append file would include four instances
7015      of the variable.
7016
7017      The following list explains the available URI protocols. URI
7018      protocols are highly dependent on particular BitBake Fetcher
7019      submodules. Depending on the fetcher BitBake uses, various URL
7020      parameters are employed. For specifics on the supported Fetchers, see
7021      the ":ref:`Fetchers <bitbake:bitbake-user-manual/bitbake-user-manual-fetching:fetchers>`" section in the
7022      BitBake User Manual.
7023
7024      -  ``file://`` - Fetches files, which are usually files shipped
7025         with the :term:`Metadata`, from the local machine (e.g.
7026         :ref:`patch <overview-manual/concepts:patching>` files).
7027         The path is relative to the :term:`FILESPATH`
7028         variable. Thus, the build system searches, in order, from the
7029         following directories, which are assumed to be a subdirectories of
7030         the directory in which the recipe file (``.bb``) or append file
7031         (``.bbappend``) resides:
7032
7033         -  ``${BPN}`` - The base recipe name without any special suffix
7034            or version numbers.
7035
7036         -  ``${BP}`` - ``${BPN}-${PV}``. The base recipe name and
7037            version but without any special package name suffix.
7038
7039         -  *files -* Files within a directory, which is named ``files``
7040            and is also alongside the recipe or append file.
7041
7042         .. note::
7043
7044            If you want the build system to pick up files specified through
7045            a
7046            SRC_URI
7047            statement from your append file, you need to be sure to extend
7048            the
7049            FILESPATH
7050            variable by also using the
7051            FILESEXTRAPATHS
7052            variable from within your append file.
7053
7054      -  ``bzr://`` - Fetches files from a Bazaar revision control
7055         repository.
7056
7057      -  ``git://`` - Fetches files from a Git revision control
7058         repository.
7059
7060      -  ``osc://`` - Fetches files from an OSC (OpenSUSE Build service)
7061         revision control repository.
7062
7063      -  ``repo://`` - Fetches files from a repo (Git) repository.
7064
7065      -  ``ccrc://`` - Fetches files from a ClearCase repository.
7066
7067      -  ``http://`` - Fetches files from the Internet using ``http``.
7068
7069      -  ``https://`` - Fetches files from the Internet using ``https``.
7070
7071      -  ``ftp://`` - Fetches files from the Internet using ``ftp``.
7072
7073      -  ``cvs://`` - Fetches files from a CVS revision control
7074         repository.
7075
7076      -  ``hg://`` - Fetches files from a Mercurial (``hg``) revision
7077         control repository.
7078
7079      -  ``p4://`` - Fetches files from a Perforce (``p4``) revision
7080         control repository.
7081
7082      -  ``ssh://`` - Fetches files from a secure shell.
7083
7084      -  ``svn://`` - Fetches files from a Subversion (``svn``) revision
7085         control repository.
7086
7087      -  ``npm://`` - Fetches JavaScript modules from a registry.
7088
7089      Standard and recipe-specific options for ``SRC_URI`` exist. Here are
7090      standard options:
7091
7092      -  ``apply`` - Whether to apply the patch or not. The default
7093         action is to apply the patch.
7094
7095      -  ``striplevel`` - Which striplevel to use when applying the
7096         patch. The default level is 1.
7097
7098      -  ``patchdir`` - Specifies the directory in which the patch should
7099         be applied. The default is ``${``\ :term:`S`\ ``}``.
7100
7101      Here are options specific to recipes building code from a revision
7102      control system:
7103
7104      -  ``mindate`` - Apply the patch only if
7105         :term:`SRCDATE` is equal to or greater than
7106         ``mindate``.
7107
7108      -  ``maxdate`` - Apply the patch only if ``SRCDATE`` is not later
7109         than ``maxdate``.
7110
7111      -  ``minrev`` - Apply the patch only if ``SRCREV`` is equal to or
7112         greater than ``minrev``.
7113
7114      -  ``maxrev`` - Apply the patch only if ``SRCREV`` is not later
7115         than ``maxrev``.
7116
7117      -  ``rev`` - Apply the patch only if ``SRCREV`` is equal to
7118         ``rev``.
7119
7120      -  ``notrev`` - Apply the patch only if ``SRCREV`` is not equal to
7121         ``rev``.
7122
7123      Here are some additional options worth mentioning:
7124
7125      -  ``unpack`` - Controls whether or not to unpack the file if it is
7126         an archive. The default action is to unpack the file.
7127
7128      -  ``destsuffix`` - Places the file (or extracts its contents) into
7129         the specified subdirectory of :term:`WORKDIR` when
7130         the Git fetcher is used.
7131
7132      -  ``subdir`` - Places the file (or extracts its contents) into the
7133         specified subdirectory of ``WORKDIR`` when the local (``file://``)
7134         fetcher is used.
7135
7136      -  ``localdir`` - Places the file (or extracts its contents) into
7137         the specified subdirectory of ``WORKDIR`` when the CVS fetcher is
7138         used.
7139
7140      -  ``subpath`` - Limits the checkout to a specific subpath of the
7141         tree when using the Git fetcher is used.
7142
7143      -  ``name`` - Specifies a name to be used for association with
7144         ``SRC_URI`` checksums or :term:`SRCREV` when you have more than one
7145         file or git repository specified in ``SRC_URI``. For example:
7146         ::
7147
7148            SRC_URI = "git://example.com/foo.git;name=first \
7149                       git://example.com/bar.git;name=second \
7150                       http://example.com/file.tar.gz;name=third"
7151
7152            SRCREV_first = "f1d2d2f924e986ac86fdf7b36c94bcdf32beec15"
7153            SRCREV_second = "e242ed3bffccdf271b7fbaf34ed72d089537b42f"
7154            SRC_URI[third.sha256sum] = "13550350a8681c84c861aac2e5b440161c2b33a3e4f302ac680ca5b686de48de"
7155
7156
7157      -  ``downloadfilename`` - Specifies the filename used when storing
7158         the downloaded file.
7159
7160   :term:`SRC_URI_OVERRIDES_PACKAGE_ARCH`
7161      By default, the OpenEmbedded build system automatically detects
7162      whether ``SRC_URI`` contains files that are machine-specific. If so,
7163      the build system automatically changes ``PACKAGE_ARCH``. Setting this
7164      variable to "0" disables this behavior.
7165
7166   :term:`SRCDATE`
7167      The date of the source code used to build the package. This variable
7168      applies only if the source was fetched from a Source Code Manager
7169      (SCM).
7170
7171   :term:`SRCPV`
7172      Returns the version string of the current package. This string is
7173      used to help define the value of :term:`PV`.
7174
7175      The ``SRCPV`` variable is defined in the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf``
7176      configuration file in the :term:`Source Directory` as
7177      follows:
7178      ::
7179
7180         SRCPV = "${@bb.fetch2.get_srcrev(d)}"
7181
7182      Recipes that need to define ``PV`` do so with the help of the
7183      ``SRCPV``. For example, the ``ofono`` recipe (``ofono_git.bb``)
7184      located in ``meta/recipes-connectivity`` in the Source Directory
7185      defines ``PV`` as follows:
7186      ::
7187
7188         PV = "0.12-git${SRCPV}"
7189
7190   :term:`SRCREV`
7191      The revision of the source code used to build the package. This
7192      variable applies to Subversion, Git, Mercurial, and Bazaar only. Note
7193      that if you want to build a fixed revision and you want to avoid
7194      performing a query on the remote repository every time BitBake parses
7195      your recipe, you should specify a ``SRCREV`` that is a full revision
7196      identifier and not just a tag.
7197
7198      .. note::
7199
7200         For information on limitations when inheriting the latest revision
7201         of software using ``SRCREV``, see the :term:`AUTOREV` variable
7202         description and the
7203         ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:automatically incrementing a package version number`"
7204         section, which is in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
7205
7206   :term:`SSTATE_DIR`
7207      The directory for the shared state cache.
7208
7209   :term:`SSTATE_MIRROR_ALLOW_NETWORK`
7210      If set to "1", allows fetches from mirrors that are specified in
7211      :term:`SSTATE_MIRRORS` to work even when
7212      fetching from the network is disabled by setting ``BB_NO_NETWORK`` to
7213      "1". Using the ``SSTATE_MIRROR_ALLOW_NETWORK`` variable is useful if
7214      you have set ``SSTATE_MIRRORS`` to point to an internal server for
7215      your shared state cache, but you want to disable any other fetching
7216      from the network.
7217
7218   :term:`SSTATE_MIRRORS`
7219      Configures the OpenEmbedded build system to search other mirror
7220      locations for prebuilt cache data objects before building out the
7221      data. This variable works like fetcher :term:`MIRRORS`
7222      and :term:`PREMIRRORS` and points to the cache
7223      locations to check for the shared state (sstate) objects.
7224
7225      You can specify a filesystem directory or a remote URL such as HTTP
7226      or FTP. The locations you specify need to contain the shared state
7227      cache (sstate-cache) results from previous builds. The sstate-cache
7228      you point to can also be from builds on other machines.
7229
7230      When pointing to sstate build artifacts on another machine that uses
7231      a different GCC version for native builds, you must configure
7232      ``SSTATE_MIRRORS`` with a regular expression that maps local search
7233      paths to server paths. The paths need to take into account
7234      :term:`NATIVELSBSTRING` set by the
7235      :ref:`uninative <ref-classes-uninative>` class. For example, the
7236      following maps the local search path ``universal-4.9`` to the
7237      server-provided path server_url_sstate_path:
7238      ::
7239
7240         SSTATE_MIRRORS ?= "file://universal-4.9/(.*) http://server_url_sstate_path/universal-4.8/\1 \n"
7241
7242      If a mirror uses the same structure as
7243      :term:`SSTATE_DIR`, you need to add "PATH" at the
7244      end as shown in the examples below. The build system substitutes the
7245      correct path within the directory structure.
7246      ::
7247
7248         SSTATE_MIRRORS ?= "\
7249             file://.* http://someserver.tld/share/sstate/PATH;downloadfilename=PATH \n \
7250             file://.* file:///some-local-dir/sstate/PATH"
7251
7252   :term:`SSTATE_SCAN_FILES`
7253      Controls the list of files the OpenEmbedded build system scans for
7254      hardcoded installation paths. The variable uses a space-separated
7255      list of filenames (not paths) with standard wildcard characters
7256      allowed.
7257
7258      During a build, the OpenEmbedded build system creates a shared state
7259      (sstate) object during the first stage of preparing the sysroots.
7260      That object is scanned for hardcoded paths for original installation
7261      locations. The list of files that are scanned for paths is controlled
7262      by the ``SSTATE_SCAN_FILES`` variable. Typically, recipes add files
7263      they want to be scanned to the value of ``SSTATE_SCAN_FILES`` rather
7264      than the variable being comprehensively set. The
7265      :ref:`sstate <ref-classes-sstate>` class specifies the default list
7266      of files.
7267
7268      For details on the process, see the
7269      :ref:`staging <ref-classes-staging>` class.
7270
7271   :term:`STAGING_BASE_LIBDIR_NATIVE`
7272      Specifies the path to the ``/lib`` subdirectory of the sysroot
7273      directory for the build host.
7274
7275   :term:`STAGING_BASELIBDIR`
7276      Specifies the path to the ``/lib`` subdirectory of the sysroot
7277      directory for the target for which the current recipe is being built
7278      (:term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`).
7279
7280   :term:`STAGING_BINDIR`
7281      Specifies the path to the ``/usr/bin`` subdirectory of the sysroot
7282      directory for the target for which the current recipe is being built
7283      (:term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`).
7284
7285   :term:`STAGING_BINDIR_CROSS`
7286      Specifies the path to the directory containing binary configuration
7287      scripts. These scripts provide configuration information for other
7288      software that wants to make use of libraries or include files
7289      provided by the software associated with the script.
7290
7291      .. note::
7292
7293         This style of build configuration has been largely replaced by
7294         ``pkg-config``. Consequently, if ``pkg-config`` is supported by the
7295         library to which you are linking, it is recommended you use
7296         ``pkg-config`` instead of a provided configuration script.
7297
7298   :term:`STAGING_BINDIR_NATIVE`
7299      Specifies the path to the ``/usr/bin`` subdirectory of the sysroot
7300      directory for the build host.
7301
7302   :term:`STAGING_DATADIR`
7303      Specifies the path to the ``/usr/share`` subdirectory of the sysroot
7304      directory for the target for which the current recipe is being built
7305      (:term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`).
7306
7307   :term:`STAGING_DATADIR_NATIVE`
7308      Specifies the path to the ``/usr/share`` subdirectory of the sysroot
7309      directory for the build host.
7310
7311   :term:`STAGING_DIR`
7312      Helps construct the ``recipe-sysroots`` directory, which is used
7313      during packaging.
7314
7315      For information on how staging for recipe-specific sysroots occurs,
7316      see the :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot`
7317      task, the ":ref:`sdk-manual/extensible:sharing files between recipes`"
7318      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual, the
7319      ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:configuration, compilation, and staging`"
7320      section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual, and the
7321      :term:`SYSROOT_DIRS` variable.
7322
7323      .. note::
7324
7325         Recipes should never write files directly under the ``STAGING_DIR``
7326         directory because the OpenEmbedded build system manages the
7327         directory automatically. Instead, files should be installed to
7328         ``${``\ :term:`D`\ ``}`` within your recipe's :ref:`ref-tasks-install`
7329         task and then the OpenEmbedded build system will stage a subset of
7330         those files into the sysroot.
7331
7332   :term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`
7333      Specifies the path to the sysroot directory for the system on which
7334      the component is built to run (the system that hosts the component).
7335      For most recipes, this sysroot is the one in which that recipe's
7336      :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task copies
7337      files. Exceptions include ``-native`` recipes, where the
7338      ``do_populate_sysroot`` task instead uses
7339      :term:`STAGING_DIR_NATIVE`. Depending on
7340      the type of recipe and the build target, ``STAGING_DIR_HOST`` can
7341      have the following values:
7342
7343      -  For recipes building for the target machine, the value is
7344         "${:term:`STAGING_DIR`}/${:term:`MACHINE`}".
7345
7346      -  For native recipes building for the build host, the value is empty
7347         given the assumption that when building for the build host, the
7348         build host's own directories should be used.
7349
7350         .. note::
7351
7352            ``-native`` recipes are not installed into host paths like such
7353            as ``/usr``. Rather, these recipes are installed into
7354            ``STAGING_DIR_NATIVE``. When compiling ``-native`` recipes,
7355            standard build environment variables such as
7356            :term:`CPPFLAGS` and
7357            :term:`CFLAGS` are set up so that both host paths
7358            and ``STAGING_DIR_NATIVE`` are searched for libraries and
7359            headers using, for example, GCC's ``-isystem`` option.
7360
7361            Thus, the emphasis is that the ``STAGING_DIR*`` variables
7362            should be viewed as input variables by tasks such as
7363            :ref:`ref-tasks-configure`,
7364            :ref:`ref-tasks-compile`, and
7365            :ref:`ref-tasks-install`. Having the real system
7366            root correspond to ``STAGING_DIR_HOST`` makes conceptual sense
7367            for ``-native`` recipes, as they make use of host headers and
7368            libraries.
7369
7370   :term:`STAGING_DIR_NATIVE`
7371      Specifies the path to the sysroot directory used when building
7372      components that run on the build host itself.
7373
7374   :term:`STAGING_DIR_TARGET`
7375      Specifies the path to the sysroot used for the system for which the
7376      component generates code. For components that do not generate code,
7377      which is the majority, ``STAGING_DIR_TARGET`` is set to match
7378      :term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`.
7379
7380      Some recipes build binaries that can run on the target system but
7381      those binaries in turn generate code for another different system
7382      (e.g. cross-canadian recipes). Using terminology from GNU, the
7383      primary system is referred to as the "HOST" and the secondary, or
7384      different, system is referred to as the "TARGET". Thus, the binaries
7385      run on the "HOST" system and generate binaries for the "TARGET"
7386      system. The ``STAGING_DIR_HOST`` variable points to the sysroot used
7387      for the "HOST" system, while ``STAGING_DIR_TARGET`` points to the
7388      sysroot used for the "TARGET" system.
7389
7390   :term:`STAGING_ETCDIR_NATIVE`
7391      Specifies the path to the ``/etc`` subdirectory of the sysroot
7392      directory for the build host.
7393
7394   :term:`STAGING_EXECPREFIXDIR`
7395      Specifies the path to the ``/usr`` subdirectory of the sysroot
7396      directory for the target for which the current recipe is being built
7397      (:term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`).
7398
7399   :term:`STAGING_INCDIR`
7400      Specifies the path to the ``/usr/include`` subdirectory of the
7401      sysroot directory for the target for which the current recipe being
7402      built (:term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`).
7403
7404   :term:`STAGING_INCDIR_NATIVE`
7405      Specifies the path to the ``/usr/include`` subdirectory of the
7406      sysroot directory for the build host.
7407
7408   :term:`STAGING_KERNEL_BUILDDIR`
7409      Points to the directory containing the kernel build artifacts.
7410      Recipes building software that needs to access kernel build artifacts
7411      (e.g. ``systemtap-uprobes``) can look in the directory specified with
7412      the ``STAGING_KERNEL_BUILDDIR`` variable to find these artifacts
7413      after the kernel has been built.
7414
7415   :term:`STAGING_KERNEL_DIR`
7416      The directory with kernel headers that are required to build
7417      out-of-tree modules.
7418
7419   :term:`STAGING_LIBDIR`
7420      Specifies the path to the ``/usr/lib`` subdirectory of the sysroot
7421      directory for the target for which the current recipe is being built
7422      (:term:`STAGING_DIR_HOST`).
7423
7424   :term:`STAGING_LIBDIR_NATIVE`
7425      Specifies the path to the ``/usr/lib`` subdirectory of the sysroot
7426      directory for the build host.
7427
7428   :term:`STAMP`
7429      Specifies the base path used to create recipe stamp files. The path
7430      to an actual stamp file is constructed by evaluating this string and
7431      then appending additional information. Currently, the default
7432      assignment for ``STAMP`` as set in the ``meta/conf/bitbake.conf``
7433      file is:
7434      ::
7435
7436         STAMP = "${STAMPS_DIR}/${MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS}/${PN}/${EXTENDPE}${PV}-${PR}"
7437
7438      For information on how BitBake uses stamp files to determine if a
7439      task should be rerun, see the
7440      ":ref:`overview-manual/concepts:stamp files and the rerunning of tasks`"
7441      section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual.
7442
7443      See :term:`STAMPS_DIR`,
7444      :term:`MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS`,
7445      :term:`PN`, :term:`EXTENDPE`,
7446      :term:`PV`, and :term:`PR` for related variable
7447      information.
7448
7449   :term:`STAMPS_DIR`
7450      Specifies the base directory in which the OpenEmbedded build system
7451      places stamps. The default directory is ``${TMPDIR}/stamps``.
7452
7453   :term:`STRIP`
7454      The minimal command and arguments to run ``strip``, which is used to
7455      strip symbols.
7456
7457   :term:`SUMMARY`
7458      The short (72 characters or less) summary of the binary package for
7459      packaging systems such as ``opkg``, ``rpm``, or ``dpkg``. By default,
7460      ``SUMMARY`` is used to define the
7461      :term:`DESCRIPTION` variable if ``DESCRIPTION`` is
7462      not set in the recipe.
7463
7464   :term:`SVNDIR`
7465      The directory in which files checked out of a Subversion system are
7466      stored.
7467
7468   :term:`SYSLINUX_DEFAULT_CONSOLE`
7469      Specifies the kernel boot default console. If you want to use a
7470      console other than the default, set this variable in your recipe as
7471      follows where "X" is the console number you want to use:
7472      ::
7473
7474         SYSLINUX_DEFAULT_CONSOLE = "console=ttyX"
7475
7476      The :ref:`syslinux <ref-classes-syslinux>` class initially sets
7477      this variable to null but then checks for a value later.
7478
7479   :term:`SYSLINUX_OPTS`
7480      Lists additional options to add to the syslinux file. You need to set
7481      this variable in your recipe. If you want to list multiple options,
7482      separate the options with a semicolon character (``;``).
7483
7484      The :ref:`syslinux <ref-classes-syslinux>` class uses this variable
7485      to create a set of options.
7486
7487   :term:`SYSLINUX_SERIAL`
7488      Specifies the alternate serial port or turns it off. To turn off
7489      serial, set this variable to an empty string in your recipe. The
7490      variable's default value is set in the
7491      :ref:`syslinux <ref-classes-syslinux>` class as follows:
7492      ::
7493
7494         SYSLINUX_SERIAL ?= "0 115200"
7495
7496      The class checks for and uses the variable as needed.
7497
7498   :term:`SYSLINUX_SERIAL_TTY`
7499      Specifies the alternate console=tty... kernel boot argument. The
7500      variable's default value is set in the
7501      :ref:`syslinux <ref-classes-syslinux>` class as follows:
7502      ::
7503
7504         SYSLINUX_SERIAL_TTY ?= "console=ttyS0,115200"
7505
7506      The class checks for and uses the variable as needed.
7507
7508   :term:`SYSLINUX_SPLASH`
7509      An ``.LSS`` file used as the background for the VGA boot menu when
7510      you use the boot menu. You need to set this variable in your recipe.
7511
7512      The :ref:`syslinux <ref-classes-syslinux>` class checks for this
7513      variable and if found, the OpenEmbedded build system installs the
7514      splash screen.
7515
7516   :term:`SYSROOT_DESTDIR`
7517      Points to the temporary directory under the work directory (default
7518      "``${``\ :term:`WORKDIR`\ ``}/sysroot-destdir``")
7519      where the files populated into the sysroot are assembled during the
7520      :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task.
7521
7522   :term:`SYSROOT_DIRS`
7523      Directories that are staged into the sysroot by the
7524      :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task. By
7525      default, the following directories are staged:
7526      ::
7527
7528         SYSROOT_DIRS = " \
7529             ${includedir} \
7530             ${libdir} \
7531             ${base_libdir} \
7532             ${nonarch_base_libdir} \
7533             ${datadir} \
7534             "
7535
7536   :term:`SYSROOT_DIRS_BLACKLIST`
7537      Directories that are not staged into the sysroot by the
7538      :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task. You
7539      can use this variable to exclude certain subdirectories of
7540      directories listed in :term:`SYSROOT_DIRS` from
7541      staging. By default, the following directories are not staged:
7542      ::
7543
7544         SYSROOT_DIRS_BLACKLIST = " \
7545             ${mandir} \
7546             ${docdir} \
7547             ${infodir} \
7548             ${datadir}/locale \
7549             ${datadir}/applications \
7550             ${datadir}/fonts \
7551             ${datadir}/pixmaps \
7552             "
7553
7554   :term:`SYSROOT_DIRS_NATIVE`
7555      Extra directories staged into the sysroot by the
7556      :ref:`ref-tasks-populate_sysroot` task for
7557      ``-native`` recipes, in addition to those specified in
7558      :term:`SYSROOT_DIRS`. By default, the following
7559      extra directories are staged:
7560      ::
7561
7562         SYSROOT_DIRS_NATIVE = " \
7563             ${bindir} \
7564             ${sbindir} \
7565             ${base_bindir} \
7566             ${base_sbindir} \
7567             ${libexecdir} \
7568             ${sysconfdir} \
7569             ${localstatedir} \
7570             "
7571
7572      .. note::
7573
7574         Programs built by ``-native`` recipes run directly from the sysroot
7575         (:term:`STAGING_DIR_NATIVE`), which is why additional directories
7576         containing program executables and supporting files need to be staged.
7577
7578   :term:`SYSROOT_PREPROCESS_FUNCS`
7579      A list of functions to execute after files are staged into the
7580      sysroot. These functions are usually used to apply additional
7581      processing on the staged files, or to stage additional files.
7582
7583   :term:`SYSTEMD_AUTO_ENABLE`
7584      When inheriting the :ref:`systemd <ref-classes-systemd>` class,
7585      this variable specifies whether the specified service in
7586      :term:`SYSTEMD_SERVICE` should start
7587      automatically or not. By default, the service is enabled to
7588      automatically start at boot time. The default setting is in the
7589      :ref:`systemd <ref-classes-systemd>` class as follows:
7590      ::
7591
7592         SYSTEMD_AUTO_ENABLE ??= "enable"
7593
7594      You can disable the service by setting the variable to "disable".
7595
7596   :term:`SYSTEMD_BOOT_CFG`
7597      When :term:`EFI_PROVIDER` is set to
7598      "systemd-boot", the ``SYSTEMD_BOOT_CFG`` variable specifies the
7599      configuration file that should be used. By default, the
7600      :ref:`systemd-boot <ref-classes-systemd-boot>` class sets the
7601      ``SYSTEMD_BOOT_CFG`` as follows:
7602      ::
7603
7604         SYSTEMD_BOOT_CFG ?= "${:term:`S`}/loader.conf"
7605
7606      For information on Systemd-boot, see the `Systemd-boot
7607      documentation <http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/systemd/systemd-boot/>`__.
7608
7609   :term:`SYSTEMD_BOOT_ENTRIES`
7610      When :term:`EFI_PROVIDER` is set to
7611      "systemd-boot", the ``SYSTEMD_BOOT_ENTRIES`` variable specifies a
7612      list of entry files (``*.conf``) to install that contain one boot
7613      entry per file. By default, the
7614      :ref:`systemd-boot <ref-classes-systemd-boot>` class sets the
7615      ``SYSTEMD_BOOT_ENTRIES`` as follows:
7616      ::
7617
7618          SYSTEMD_BOOT_ENTRIES ?= ""
7619
7620      For information on Systemd-boot, see the `Systemd-boot
7621      documentation <http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/systemd/systemd-boot/>`__.
7622
7623   :term:`SYSTEMD_BOOT_TIMEOUT`
7624      When :term:`EFI_PROVIDER` is set to
7625      "systemd-boot", the ``SYSTEMD_BOOT_TIMEOUT`` variable specifies the
7626      boot menu timeout in seconds. By default, the
7627      :ref:`systemd-boot <ref-classes-systemd-boot>` class sets the
7628      ``SYSTEMD_BOOT_TIMEOUT`` as follows:
7629      ::
7630
7631         SYSTEMD_BOOT_TIMEOUT ?= "10"
7632
7633      For information on Systemd-boot, see the `Systemd-boot
7634      documentation <http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/systemd/systemd-boot/>`__.
7635
7636   :term:`SYSTEMD_PACKAGES`
7637      When inheriting the :ref:`systemd <ref-classes-systemd>` class,
7638      this variable locates the systemd unit files when they are not found
7639      in the main recipe's package. By default, the ``SYSTEMD_PACKAGES``
7640      variable is set such that the systemd unit files are assumed to
7641      reside in the recipes main package:
7642      ::
7643
7644         SYSTEMD_PACKAGES ?= "${PN}"
7645
7646      If these unit files are not in this recipe's main package, you need
7647      to use ``SYSTEMD_PACKAGES`` to list the package or packages in which
7648      the build system can find the systemd unit files.
7649
7650   :term:`SYSTEMD_SERVICE`
7651      When inheriting the :ref:`systemd <ref-classes-systemd>` class,
7652      this variable specifies the systemd service name for a package.
7653
7654      When you specify this file in your recipe, use a package name
7655      override to indicate the package to which the value applies. Here is
7656      an example from the connman recipe:
7657      ::
7658
7659         SYSTEMD_SERVICE_${PN} = "connman.service"
7660
7661   :term:`SYSVINIT_ENABLED_GETTYS`
7662      When using
7663      :ref:`SysVinit <dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling system services>`,
7664      specifies a space-separated list of the virtual terminals that should
7665      run a `getty <http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Getty_%28Unix%29>`__
7666      (allowing login), assuming :term:`USE_VT` is not set to
7667      "0".
7668
7669      The default value for ``SYSVINIT_ENABLED_GETTYS`` is "1" (i.e. only
7670      run a getty on the first virtual terminal).
7671
7672   :term:`T`
7673      This variable points to a directory were BitBake places temporary
7674      files, which consist mostly of task logs and scripts, when building a
7675      particular recipe. The variable is typically set as follows:
7676      ::
7677
7678         T = "${WORKDIR}/temp"
7679
7680      The :term:`WORKDIR` is the directory into which
7681      BitBake unpacks and builds the recipe. The default ``bitbake.conf``
7682      file sets this variable.
7683
7684      The ``T`` variable is not to be confused with the
7685      :term:`TMPDIR` variable, which points to the root of
7686      the directory tree where BitBake places the output of an entire
7687      build.
7688
7689   :term:`TARGET_ARCH`
7690      The target machine's architecture. The OpenEmbedded build system
7691      supports many architectures. Here is an example list of architectures
7692      supported. This list is by no means complete as the architecture is
7693      configurable:
7694
7695      - arm
7696      - i586
7697      - x86_64
7698      - powerpc
7699      - powerpc64
7700      - mips
7701      - mipsel
7702
7703      For additional information on machine architectures, see the
7704      :term:`TUNE_ARCH` variable.
7705
7706   :term:`TARGET_AS_ARCH`
7707      Specifies architecture-specific assembler flags for the target
7708      system. ``TARGET_AS_ARCH`` is initialized from
7709      :term:`TUNE_ASARGS` by default in the BitBake
7710      configuration file (``meta/conf/bitbake.conf``):
7711      ::
7712
7713         TARGET_AS_ARCH = "${TUNE_ASARGS}"
7714
7715   :term:`TARGET_CC_ARCH`
7716      Specifies architecture-specific C compiler flags for the target
7717      system. ``TARGET_CC_ARCH`` is initialized from
7718      :term:`TUNE_CCARGS` by default.
7719
7720      .. note::
7721
7722         It is a common workaround to append :term:`LDFLAGS` to
7723         ``TARGET_CC_ARCH`` in recipes that build software for the target that
7724         would not otherwise respect the exported ``LDFLAGS`` variable.
7725
7726   :term:`TARGET_CC_KERNEL_ARCH`
7727      This is a specific kernel compiler flag for a CPU or Application
7728      Binary Interface (ABI) tune. The flag is used rarely and only for
7729      cases where a userspace :term:`TUNE_CCARGS` is not
7730      compatible with the kernel compilation. The ``TARGET_CC_KERNEL_ARCH``
7731      variable allows the kernel (and associated modules) to use a
7732      different configuration. See the
7733      ``meta/conf/machine/include/arm/feature-arm-thumb.inc`` file in the
7734      :term:`Source Directory` for an example.
7735
7736   :term:`TARGET_CFLAGS`
7737      Specifies the flags to pass to the C compiler when building for the
7738      target. When building in the target context,
7739      :term:`CFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable by
7740      default.
7741
7742      Additionally, the SDK's environment setup script sets the ``CFLAGS``
7743      variable in the environment to the ``TARGET_CFLAGS`` value so that
7744      executables built using the SDK also have the flags applied.
7745
7746   :term:`TARGET_CPPFLAGS`
7747      Specifies the flags to pass to the C pre-processor (i.e. to both the
7748      C and the C++ compilers) when building for the target. When building
7749      in the target context, :term:`CPPFLAGS` is set to the
7750      value of this variable by default.
7751
7752      Additionally, the SDK's environment setup script sets the
7753      ``CPPFLAGS`` variable in the environment to the ``TARGET_CPPFLAGS``
7754      value so that executables built using the SDK also have the flags
7755      applied.
7756
7757   :term:`TARGET_CXXFLAGS`
7758      Specifies the flags to pass to the C++ compiler when building for the
7759      target. When building in the target context,
7760      :term:`CXXFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable
7761      by default.
7762
7763      Additionally, the SDK's environment setup script sets the
7764      ``CXXFLAGS`` variable in the environment to the ``TARGET_CXXFLAGS``
7765      value so that executables built using the SDK also have the flags
7766      applied.
7767
7768   :term:`TARGET_FPU`
7769      Specifies the method for handling FPU code. For FPU-less targets,
7770      which include most ARM CPUs, the variable must be set to "soft". If
7771      not, the kernel emulation gets used, which results in a performance
7772      penalty.
7773
7774   :term:`TARGET_LD_ARCH`
7775      Specifies architecture-specific linker flags for the target system.
7776      ``TARGET_LD_ARCH`` is initialized from
7777      :term:`TUNE_LDARGS` by default in the BitBake
7778      configuration file (``meta/conf/bitbake.conf``):
7779      ::
7780
7781         TARGET_LD_ARCH = "${TUNE_LDARGS}"
7782
7783   :term:`TARGET_LDFLAGS`
7784      Specifies the flags to pass to the linker when building for the
7785      target. When building in the target context,
7786      :term:`LDFLAGS` is set to the value of this variable
7787      by default.
7788
7789      Additionally, the SDK's environment setup script sets the
7790      :term:`LDFLAGS` variable in the environment to the
7791      ``TARGET_LDFLAGS`` value so that executables built using the SDK also
7792      have the flags applied.
7793
7794   :term:`TARGET_OS`
7795      Specifies the target's operating system. The variable can be set to
7796      "linux" for glibc-based systems (GNU C Library) and to "linux-musl"
7797      for musl libc. For ARM/EABI targets, "linux-gnueabi" and
7798      "linux-musleabi" possible values exist.
7799
7800   :term:`TARGET_PREFIX`
7801      Specifies the prefix used for the toolchain binary target tools.
7802
7803      Depending on the type of recipe and the build target,
7804      ``TARGET_PREFIX`` is set as follows:
7805
7806      -  For recipes building for the target machine, the value is
7807         "${:term:`TARGET_SYS`}-".
7808
7809      -  For native recipes, the build system sets the variable to the
7810         value of ``BUILD_PREFIX``.
7811
7812      -  For native SDK recipes (``nativesdk``), the build system sets the
7813         variable to the value of ``SDK_PREFIX``.
7814
7815   :term:`TARGET_SYS`
7816      Specifies the system, including the architecture and the operating
7817      system, for which the build is occurring in the context of the
7818      current recipe.
7819
7820      The OpenEmbedded build system automatically sets this variable based
7821      on :term:`TARGET_ARCH`,
7822      :term:`TARGET_VENDOR`, and
7823      :term:`TARGET_OS` variables.
7824
7825      .. note::
7826
7827         You do not need to set the ``TARGET_SYS`` variable yourself.
7828
7829      Consider these two examples:
7830
7831      -  Given a native recipe on a 32-bit, x86 machine running Linux, the
7832         value is "i686-linux".
7833
7834      -  Given a recipe being built for a little-endian, MIPS target
7835         running Linux, the value might be "mipsel-linux".
7836
7837   :term:`TARGET_VENDOR`
7838      Specifies the name of the target vendor.
7839
7840   :term:`TCLIBC`
7841      Specifies the GNU standard C library (``libc``) variant to use during
7842      the build process. This variable replaces ``POKYLIBC``, which is no
7843      longer supported.
7844
7845      You can select "glibc", "musl", "newlib", or "baremetal"
7846
7847   :term:`TCLIBCAPPEND`
7848      Specifies a suffix to be appended onto the
7849      :term:`TMPDIR` value. The suffix identifies the
7850      ``libc`` variant for building. When you are building for multiple
7851      variants with the same :term:`Build Directory`, this
7852      mechanism ensures that output for different ``libc`` variants is kept
7853      separate to avoid potential conflicts.
7854
7855      In the ``defaultsetup.conf`` file, the default value of
7856      ``TCLIBCAPPEND`` is "-${TCLIBC}". However, distros such as poky,
7857      which normally only support one ``libc`` variant, set
7858      ``TCLIBCAPPEND`` to "" in their distro configuration file resulting
7859      in no suffix being applied.
7860
7861   :term:`TCMODE`
7862      Specifies the toolchain selector. ``TCMODE`` controls the
7863      characteristics of the generated packages and images by telling the
7864      OpenEmbedded build system which toolchain profile to use. By default,
7865      the OpenEmbedded build system builds its own internal toolchain. The
7866      variable's default value is "default", which uses that internal
7867      toolchain.
7868
7869      .. note::
7870
7871         If ``TCMODE`` is set to a value other than "default", then it is your
7872         responsibility to ensure that the toolchain is compatible with the
7873         default toolchain. Using older or newer versions of these
7874         components might cause build problems. See the Release Notes for
7875         the Yocto Project release for the specific components with which
7876         the toolchain must be compatible. To access the Release Notes, go
7877         to the :yocto_home:`Downloads </software-overview/downloads>`
7878         page on the Yocto Project website and click on the "RELEASE
7879         INFORMATION" link for the appropriate release.
7880
7881      The ``TCMODE`` variable is similar to :term:`TCLIBC`,
7882      which controls the variant of the GNU standard C library (``libc``)
7883      used during the build process: ``glibc`` or ``musl``.
7884
7885      With additional layers, it is possible to use a pre-compiled external
7886      toolchain. One example is the Sourcery G++ Toolchain. The support for
7887      this toolchain resides in the separate Mentor Graphics
7888      ``meta-sourcery`` layer at
7889      http://github.com/MentorEmbedded/meta-sourcery/.
7890
7891      The layer's ``README`` file contains information on how to use the
7892      Sourcery G++ Toolchain as an external toolchain. In summary, you must
7893      be sure to add the layer to your ``bblayers.conf`` file in front of
7894      the ``meta`` layer and then set the ``EXTERNAL_TOOLCHAIN`` variable
7895      in your ``local.conf`` file to the location in which you installed
7896      the toolchain.
7897
7898      The fundamentals used for this example apply to any external
7899      toolchain. You can use ``meta-sourcery`` as a template for adding
7900      support for other external toolchains.
7901
7902   :term:`TEST_EXPORT_DIR`
7903      The location the OpenEmbedded build system uses to export tests when
7904      the :term:`TEST_EXPORT_ONLY` variable is set
7905      to "1".
7906
7907      The ``TEST_EXPORT_DIR`` variable defaults to
7908      ``"${TMPDIR}/testimage/${PN}"``.
7909
7910   :term:`TEST_EXPORT_ONLY`
7911      Specifies to export the tests only. Set this variable to "1" if you
7912      do not want to run the tests but you want them to be exported in a
7913      manner that you to run them outside of the build system.
7914
7915   :term:`TEST_LOG_DIR`
7916      Holds the SSH log and the boot log for QEMU machines. The
7917      ``TEST_LOG_DIR`` variable defaults to ``"${WORKDIR}/testimage"``.
7918
7919      .. note::
7920
7921         Actual test results reside in the task log (``log.do_testimage``),
7922         which is in the ``${WORKDIR}/temp/`` directory.
7923
7924   :term:`TEST_POWERCONTROL_CMD`
7925      For automated hardware testing, specifies the command to use to
7926      control the power of the target machine under test. Typically, this
7927      command would point to a script that performs the appropriate action
7928      (e.g. interacting with a web-enabled power strip). The specified
7929      command should expect to receive as the last argument "off", "on" or
7930      "cycle" specifying to power off, on, or cycle (power off and then
7931      power on) the device, respectively.
7932
7933   :term:`TEST_POWERCONTROL_EXTRA_ARGS`
7934      For automated hardware testing, specifies additional arguments to
7935      pass through to the command specified in
7936      :term:`TEST_POWERCONTROL_CMD`. Setting
7937      ``TEST_POWERCONTROL_EXTRA_ARGS`` is optional. You can use it if you
7938      wish, for example, to separate the machine-specific and
7939      non-machine-specific parts of the arguments.
7940
7941   :term:`TEST_QEMUBOOT_TIMEOUT`
7942      The time in seconds allowed for an image to boot before automated
7943      runtime tests begin to run against an image. The default timeout
7944      period to allow the boot process to reach the login prompt is 500
7945      seconds. You can specify a different value in the ``local.conf``
7946      file.
7947
7948      For more information on testing images, see the
7949      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:performing automated runtime testing`"
7950      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
7951
7952   :term:`TEST_SERIALCONTROL_CMD`
7953      For automated hardware testing, specifies the command to use to
7954      connect to the serial console of the target machine under test. This
7955      command simply needs to connect to the serial console and forward
7956      that connection to standard input and output as any normal terminal
7957      program does.
7958
7959      For example, to use the Picocom terminal program on serial device
7960      ``/dev/ttyUSB0`` at 115200bps, you would set the variable as follows:
7961      ::
7962
7963         TEST_SERIALCONTROL_CMD = "picocom /dev/ttyUSB0 -b 115200"
7964
7965   :term:`TEST_SERIALCONTROL_EXTRA_ARGS`
7966      For automated hardware testing, specifies additional arguments to
7967      pass through to the command specified in
7968      :term:`TEST_SERIALCONTROL_CMD`. Setting
7969      ``TEST_SERIALCONTROL_EXTRA_ARGS`` is optional. You can use it if you
7970      wish, for example, to separate the machine-specific and
7971      non-machine-specific parts of the command.
7972
7973   :term:`TEST_SERVER_IP`
7974      The IP address of the build machine (host machine). This IP address
7975      is usually automatically detected. However, if detection fails, this
7976      variable needs to be set to the IP address of the build machine (i.e.
7977      where the build is taking place).
7978
7979      .. note::
7980
7981         The ``TEST_SERVER_IP`` variable is only used for a small number of
7982         tests such as the "dnf" test suite, which needs to download packages
7983         from ``WORKDIR/oe-rootfs-repo``.
7984
7985   :term:`TEST_SUITES`
7986      An ordered list of tests (modules) to run against an image when
7987      performing automated runtime testing.
7988
7989      The OpenEmbedded build system provides a core set of tests that can
7990      be used against images.
7991
7992      .. note::
7993
7994         Currently, there is only support for running these tests under
7995         QEMU.
7996
7997      Tests include ``ping``, ``ssh``, ``df`` among others. You can add
7998      your own tests to the list of tests by appending ``TEST_SUITES`` as
7999      follows:
8000      ::
8001
8002         TEST_SUITES_append = " mytest"
8003
8004      Alternatively, you can
8005      provide the "auto" option to have all applicable tests run against
8006      the image.
8007      ::
8008
8009         TEST_SUITES_append = " auto"
8010
8011      Using this option causes the
8012      build system to automatically run tests that are applicable to the
8013      image. Tests that are not applicable are skipped.
8014
8015      The order in which tests are run is important. Tests that depend on
8016      another test must appear later in the list than the test on which
8017      they depend. For example, if you append the list of tests with two
8018      tests (``test_A`` and ``test_B``) where ``test_B`` is dependent on
8019      ``test_A``, then you must order the tests as follows:
8020      ::
8021
8022         TEST_SUITES = "test_A test_B"
8023
8024      For more information on testing images, see the
8025      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:performing automated runtime testing`"
8026      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
8027
8028   :term:`TEST_TARGET`
8029      Specifies the target controller to use when running tests against a
8030      test image. The default controller to use is "qemu":
8031      ::
8032
8033         TEST_TARGET = "qemu"
8034
8035      A target controller is a class that defines how an image gets
8036      deployed on a target and how a target is started. A layer can extend
8037      the controllers by adding a module in the layer's
8038      ``/lib/oeqa/controllers`` directory and by inheriting the
8039      ``BaseTarget`` class, which is an abstract class that cannot be used
8040      as a value of ``TEST_TARGET``.
8041
8042      You can provide the following arguments with ``TEST_TARGET``:
8043
8044      -  *"qemu":* Boots a QEMU image and runs the tests. See the
8045         ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling runtime tests on qemu`" section
8046         in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for more
8047         information.
8048
8049      -  *"simpleremote":* Runs the tests on target hardware that is
8050         already up and running. The hardware can be on the network or it
8051         can be a device running an image on QEMU. You must also set
8052         :term:`TEST_TARGET_IP` when you use
8053         "simpleremote".
8054
8055         .. note::
8056
8057            This argument is defined in
8058            ``meta/lib/oeqa/controllers/simpleremote.py``.
8059
8060      For information on running tests on hardware, see the
8061      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling runtime tests on hardware`"
8062      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual.
8063
8064   :term:`TEST_TARGET_IP`
8065      The IP address of your hardware under test. The ``TEST_TARGET_IP``
8066      variable has no effect when :term:`TEST_TARGET` is
8067      set to "qemu".
8068
8069      When you specify the IP address, you can also include a port. Here is
8070      an example:
8071      ::
8072
8073         TEST_TARGET_IP = "192.168.1.4:2201"
8074
8075      Specifying a port is
8076      useful when SSH is started on a non-standard port or in cases when
8077      your hardware under test is behind a firewall or network that is not
8078      directly accessible from your host and you need to do port address
8079      translation.
8080
8081   :term:`TESTIMAGE_AUTO`
8082      Automatically runs the series of automated tests for images when an
8083      image is successfully built. Setting ``TESTIMAGE_AUTO`` to "1" causes
8084      any image that successfully builds to automatically boot under QEMU.
8085      Using the variable also adds in dependencies so that any SDK for
8086      which testing is requested is automatically built first.
8087
8088      These tests are written in Python making use of the ``unittest``
8089      module, and the majority of them run commands on the target system
8090      over ``ssh``. You can set this variable to "1" in your ``local.conf``
8091      file in the :term:`Build Directory` to have the
8092      OpenEmbedded build system automatically run these tests after an
8093      image successfully builds:
8094
8095         TESTIMAGE_AUTO = "1"
8096
8097      For more information
8098      on enabling, running, and writing these tests, see the
8099      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:performing automated runtime testing`"
8100      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual and the
8101      ":ref:`testimage*.bbclass <ref-classes-testimage*>`" section.
8102
8103   :term:`THISDIR`
8104      The directory in which the file BitBake is currently parsing is
8105      located. Do not manually set this variable.
8106
8107   :term:`TIME`
8108      The time the build was started. Times appear using the hour, minute,
8109      and second (HMS) format (e.g. "140159" for one minute and fifty-nine
8110      seconds past 1400 hours).
8111
8112   :term:`TMPDIR`
8113      This variable is the base directory the OpenEmbedded build system
8114      uses for all build output and intermediate files (other than the
8115      shared state cache). By default, the ``TMPDIR`` variable points to
8116      ``tmp`` within the :term:`Build Directory`.
8117
8118      If you want to establish this directory in a location other than the
8119      default, you can uncomment and edit the following statement in the
8120      ``conf/local.conf`` file in the :term:`Source Directory`:
8121      ::
8122
8123         #TMPDIR = "${TOPDIR}/tmp"
8124
8125      An example use for this scenario is to set ``TMPDIR`` to a local disk,
8126      which does not use NFS, while having the Build Directory use NFS.
8127
8128      The filesystem used by ``TMPDIR`` must have standard filesystem
8129      semantics (i.e. mixed-case files are unique, POSIX file locking, and
8130      persistent inodes). Due to various issues with NFS and bugs in some
8131      implementations, NFS does not meet this minimum requirement.
8132      Consequently, ``TMPDIR`` cannot be on NFS.
8133
8134   :term:`TOOLCHAIN_HOST_TASK`
8135      This variable lists packages the OpenEmbedded build system uses when
8136      building an SDK, which contains a cross-development environment. The
8137      packages specified by this variable are part of the toolchain set
8138      that runs on the :term:`SDKMACHINE`, and each
8139      package should usually have the prefix ``nativesdk-``. For example,
8140      consider the following command when building an SDK:
8141      ::
8142
8143         $ bitbake -c populate_sdk imagename
8144
8145      In this case, a default list of packages is
8146      set in this variable, but you can add additional packages to the
8147      list. See the
8148      ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing-standard:adding individual packages to the standard sdk`" section
8149      in the Yocto Project Application Development and the Extensible
8150      Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual for more information.
8151
8152      For background information on cross-development toolchains in the
8153      Yocto Project development environment, see the
8154      ":ref:`sdk-manual/intro:the cross-development toolchain`"
8155      section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. For
8156      information on setting up a cross-development environment, see the
8157      :doc:`/sdk-manual/index` manual.
8158
8159   :term:`TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME`
8160      This variable defines the name used for the toolchain output. The
8161      :ref:`populate_sdk_base <ref-classes-populate-sdk-*>` class sets
8162      the ``TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME`` variable as follows:
8163      ::
8164
8165         TOOLCHAIN_OUTPUTNAME ?= "${SDK_NAME}-toolchain-${SDK_VERSION}"
8166
8167      See
8168      the :term:`SDK_NAME` and
8169      :term:`SDK_VERSION` variables for additional
8170      information.
8171
8172   :term:`TOOLCHAIN_TARGET_TASK`
8173      This variable lists packages the OpenEmbedded build system uses when
8174      it creates the target part of an SDK (i.e. the part built for the
8175      target hardware), which includes libraries and headers. Use this
8176      variable to add individual packages to the part of the SDK that runs
8177      on the target. See the
8178      ":ref:`sdk-manual/appendix-customizing-standard:adding individual packages to the standard sdk`" section
8179      in the Yocto Project Application Development and the Extensible
8180      Software Development Kit (eSDK) manual for more information.
8181
8182      For background information on cross-development toolchains in the
8183      Yocto Project development environment, see the
8184      ":ref:`sdk-manual/intro:the cross-development toolchain`"
8185      section in the Yocto Project Overview and Concepts Manual. For
8186      information on setting up a cross-development environment, see the
8187      :doc:`/sdk-manual/index` manual.
8188
8189   :term:`TOPDIR`
8190      The top-level :term:`Build Directory`. BitBake
8191      automatically sets this variable when you initialize your build
8192      environment using :ref:`structure-core-script`.
8193
8194   :term:`TRANSLATED_TARGET_ARCH`
8195      A sanitized version of :term:`TARGET_ARCH`. This
8196      variable is used where the architecture is needed in a value where
8197      underscores are not allowed, for example within package filenames. In
8198      this case, dash characters replace any underscore characters used in
8199      ``TARGET_ARCH``.
8200
8201      Do not edit this variable.
8202
8203   :term:`TUNE_ARCH`
8204      The GNU canonical architecture for a specific architecture (i.e.
8205      ``arm``, ``armeb``, ``mips``, ``mips64``, and so forth). BitBake uses
8206      this value to setup configuration.
8207
8208      ``TUNE_ARCH`` definitions are specific to a given architecture. The
8209      definitions can be a single static definition, or can be dynamically
8210      adjusted. You can see details for a given CPU family by looking at
8211      the architecture's ``README`` file. For example, the
8212      ``meta/conf/machine/include/mips/README`` file in the
8213      :term:`Source Directory` provides information for
8214      ``TUNE_ARCH`` specific to the ``mips`` architecture.
8215
8216      ``TUNE_ARCH`` is tied closely to
8217      :term:`TARGET_ARCH`, which defines the target
8218      machine's architecture. The BitBake configuration file
8219      (``meta/conf/bitbake.conf``) sets ``TARGET_ARCH`` as follows:
8220      ::
8221
8222         TARGET_ARCH = "${TUNE_ARCH}"
8223
8224      The following list, which is by no means complete since architectures
8225      are configurable, shows supported machine architectures:
8226
8227      - arm
8228      - i586
8229      - x86_64
8230      - powerpc
8231      - powerpc64
8232      - mips
8233      - mipsel
8234
8235   :term:`TUNE_ASARGS`
8236      Specifies architecture-specific assembler flags for the target
8237      system. The set of flags is based on the selected tune features.
8238      ``TUNE_ASARGS`` is set using the tune include files, which are
8239      typically under ``meta/conf/machine/include/`` and are influenced
8240      through :term:`TUNE_FEATURES`. For example, the
8241      ``meta/conf/machine/include/x86/arch-x86.inc`` file defines the flags
8242      for the x86 architecture as follows:
8243      ::
8244
8245         TUNE_ASARGS += "${@bb.utils.contains("TUNE_FEATURES", "mx32", "-x32", "", d)}"
8246
8247      .. note::
8248
8249         Board Support Packages (BSPs) select the tune. The selected tune,
8250         in turn, affects the tune variables themselves (i.e. the tune can
8251         supply its own set of flags).
8252
8253   :term:`TUNE_CCARGS`
8254      Specifies architecture-specific C compiler flags for the target
8255      system. The set of flags is based on the selected tune features.
8256      ``TUNE_CCARGS`` is set using the tune include files, which are
8257      typically under ``meta/conf/machine/include/`` and are influenced
8258      through :term:`TUNE_FEATURES`.
8259
8260      .. note::
8261
8262         Board Support Packages (BSPs) select the tune. The selected tune,
8263         in turn, affects the tune variables themselves (i.e. the tune can
8264         supply its own set of flags).
8265
8266   :term:`TUNE_FEATURES`
8267      Features used to "tune" a compiler for optimal use given a specific
8268      processor. The features are defined within the tune files and allow
8269      arguments (i.e. ``TUNE_*ARGS``) to be dynamically generated based on
8270      the features.
8271
8272      The OpenEmbedded build system verifies the features to be sure they
8273      are not conflicting and that they are supported.
8274
8275      The BitBake configuration file (``meta/conf/bitbake.conf``) defines
8276      ``TUNE_FEATURES`` as follows:
8277      ::
8278
8279         TUNE_FEATURES ??= "${TUNE_FEATURES_tune-${DEFAULTTUNE}}"
8280
8281      See the :term:`DEFAULTTUNE` variable for more information.
8282
8283   :term:`TUNE_LDARGS`
8284      Specifies architecture-specific linker flags for the target system.
8285      The set of flags is based on the selected tune features.
8286      ``TUNE_LDARGS`` is set using the tune include files, which are
8287      typically under ``meta/conf/machine/include/`` and are influenced
8288      through :term:`TUNE_FEATURES`. For example, the
8289      ``meta/conf/machine/include/x86/arch-x86.inc`` file defines the flags
8290      for the x86 architecture as follows:
8291      ::
8292
8293         TUNE_LDARGS += "${@bb.utils.contains("TUNE_FEATURES", "mx32", "-m elf32_x86_64", "", d)}"
8294
8295      .. note::
8296
8297         Board Support Packages (BSPs) select the tune. The selected tune,
8298         in turn, affects the tune variables themselves (i.e. the tune can
8299         supply its own set of flags).
8300
8301   :term:`TUNE_PKGARCH`
8302      The package architecture understood by the packaging system to define
8303      the architecture, ABI, and tuning of output packages. The specific
8304      tune is defined using the "_tune" override as follows:
8305      ::
8306
8307         TUNE_PKGARCH_tune-tune = "tune"
8308
8309      These tune-specific package architectures are defined in the machine
8310      include files. Here is an example of the "core2-32" tuning as used in
8311      the ``meta/conf/machine/include/tune-core2.inc`` file:
8312      ::
8313
8314         TUNE_PKGARCH_tune-core2-32 = "core2-32"
8315
8316   :term:`TUNEABI`
8317      An underlying Application Binary Interface (ABI) used by a particular
8318      tuning in a given toolchain layer. Providers that use prebuilt
8319      libraries can use the ``TUNEABI``,
8320      :term:`TUNEABI_OVERRIDE`, and
8321      :term:`TUNEABI_WHITELIST` variables to check
8322      compatibility of tunings against their selection of libraries.
8323
8324      If ``TUNEABI`` is undefined, then every tuning is allowed. See the
8325      :ref:`sanity <ref-classes-sanity>` class to see how the variable is
8326      used.
8327
8328   :term:`TUNEABI_OVERRIDE`
8329      If set, the OpenEmbedded system ignores the
8330      :term:`TUNEABI_WHITELIST` variable.
8331      Providers that use prebuilt libraries can use the
8332      ``TUNEABI_OVERRIDE``, ``TUNEABI_WHITELIST``, and
8333      :term:`TUNEABI` variables to check compatibility of a
8334      tuning against their selection of libraries.
8335
8336      See the :ref:`sanity <ref-classes-sanity>` class to see how the
8337      variable is used.
8338
8339   :term:`TUNEABI_WHITELIST`
8340      A whitelist of permissible :term:`TUNEABI` values. If
8341      ``TUNEABI_WHITELIST`` is not set, all tunes are allowed. Providers
8342      that use prebuilt libraries can use the ``TUNEABI_WHITELIST``,
8343      :term:`TUNEABI_OVERRIDE`, and ``TUNEABI``
8344      variables to check compatibility of a tuning against their selection
8345      of libraries.
8346
8347      See the :ref:`sanity <ref-classes-sanity>` class to see how the
8348      variable is used.
8349
8350   :term:`TUNECONFLICTS[feature]`
8351      Specifies CPU or Application Binary Interface (ABI) tuning features
8352      that conflict with feature.
8353
8354      Known tuning conflicts are specified in the machine include files in
8355      the :term:`Source Directory`. Here is an example from
8356      the ``meta/conf/machine/include/mips/arch-mips.inc`` include file
8357      that lists the "o32" and "n64" features as conflicting with the "n32"
8358      feature:
8359      ::
8360
8361         TUNECONFLICTS[n32] = "o32 n64"
8362
8363   :term:`TUNEVALID[feature]`
8364      Specifies a valid CPU or Application Binary Interface (ABI) tuning
8365      feature. The specified feature is stored as a flag. Valid features
8366      are specified in the machine include files (e.g.
8367      ``meta/conf/machine/include/arm/arch-arm.inc``). Here is an example
8368      from that file:
8369      ::
8370
8371         TUNEVALID[bigendian] = "Enable big-endian mode."
8372
8373      See the machine include files in the :term:`Source Directory`
8374      for these features.
8375
8376   :term:`UBOOT_CONFIG`
8377      Configures the :term:`UBOOT_MACHINE` and can
8378      also define :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` for individual
8379      cases.
8380
8381      Following is an example from the ``meta-fsl-arm`` layer. ::
8382
8383         UBOOT_CONFIG ??= "sd"
8384         UBOOT_CONFIG[sd] = "mx6qsabreauto_config,sdcard"
8385         UBOOT_CONFIG[eimnor] = "mx6qsabreauto_eimnor_config"
8386         UBOOT_CONFIG[nand] = "mx6qsabreauto_nand_config,ubifs"
8387         UBOOT_CONFIG[spinor] = "mx6qsabreauto_spinor_config"
8388
8389      In this example, "sd" is selected as the configuration of the possible four for the
8390      ``UBOOT_MACHINE``. The "sd" configuration defines
8391      "mx6qsabreauto_config" as the value for ``UBOOT_MACHINE``, while the
8392      "sdcard" specifies the ``IMAGE_FSTYPES`` to use for the U-boot image.
8393
8394      For more information on how the ``UBOOT_CONFIG`` is handled, see the
8395      :ref:`uboot-config <ref-classes-uboot-config>`
8396      class.
8397
8398   :term:`UBOOT_DTB_LOADADDRESS`
8399      Specifies the load address for the dtb image used by U-boot. During FIT
8400      image creation, the ``UBOOT_DTB_LOADADDRESS`` variable is used in
8401      :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class to specify
8402      the load address to be used in
8403      creating the dtb sections of Image Tree Source for the FIT image.
8404
8405   :term:`UBOOT_DTBO_LOADADDRESS`
8406      Specifies the load address for the dtbo image used by U-boot.  During FIT
8407      image creation, the ``UBOOT_DTBO_LOADADDRESS`` variable is used in
8408      :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class to specify the load address to be used in
8409      creating the dtbo sections of Image Tree Source for the FIT image.
8410
8411   :term:`UBOOT_ENTRYPOINT`
8412      Specifies the entry point for the U-Boot image. During U-Boot image
8413      creation, the ``UBOOT_ENTRYPOINT`` variable is passed as a
8414      command-line parameter to the ``uboot-mkimage`` utility.
8415
8416   :term:`UBOOT_LOADADDRESS`
8417      Specifies the load address for the U-Boot image. During U-Boot image
8418      creation, the ``UBOOT_LOADADDRESS`` variable is passed as a
8419      command-line parameter to the ``uboot-mkimage`` utility.
8420
8421   :term:`UBOOT_LOCALVERSION`
8422      Appends a string to the name of the local version of the U-Boot
8423      image. For example, assuming the version of the U-Boot image built
8424      was "2013.10", the full version string reported by U-Boot would be
8425      "2013.10-yocto" given the following statement:
8426      ::
8427
8428         UBOOT_LOCALVERSION = "-yocto"
8429
8430   :term:`UBOOT_MACHINE`
8431      Specifies the value passed on the ``make`` command line when building
8432      a U-Boot image. The value indicates the target platform
8433      configuration. You typically set this variable from the machine
8434      configuration file (i.e. ``conf/machine/machine_name.conf``).
8435
8436      Please see the "Selection of Processor Architecture and Board Type"
8437      section in the U-Boot README for valid values for this variable.
8438
8439   :term:`UBOOT_MAKE_TARGET`
8440      Specifies the target called in the ``Makefile``. The default target
8441      is "all".
8442
8443   :term:`UBOOT_MKIMAGE_DTCOPTS`
8444      Options for the device tree compiler passed to mkimage '-D'
8445      feature while creating FIT image in :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class.
8446
8447   :term:`UBOOT_RD_ENTRYPOINT`
8448      Specifies the entrypoint for the RAM disk image.
8449      During FIT image creation, the
8450      ``UBOOT_RD_ENTRYPOINT`` variable is used
8451      in :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class to specify the
8452      entrypoint to be used in creating the Image Tree Source for
8453      the FIT image.
8454
8455   :term:`UBOOT_RD_LOADADDRESS`
8456      Specifies the load address for the RAM disk image.
8457      During FIT image creation, the
8458      ``UBOOT_RD_LOADADDRESS`` variable is used
8459      in :ref:`kernel-fitimage <ref-classes-kernel-fitimage>` class to specify the
8460      load address to be used in creating the Image Tree Source for
8461      the FIT image.
8462
8463   :term:`UBOOT_SIGN_ENABLE`
8464      Enable signing of FIT image. The default value is "0".
8465
8466   :term:`UBOOT_SIGN_KEYDIR`
8467      Location of the directory containing the RSA key and
8468      certificate used for signing FIT image.
8469
8470   :term:`UBOOT_SIGN_KEYNAME`
8471      The name of keys used for signing U-boot FIT image stored in
8472      :term:`UBOOT_SIGN_KEYDIR` directory. For e.g. dev.key key and dev.crt
8473      certificate stored in :term:`UBOOT_SIGN_KEYDIR` directory will have
8474      :term:`UBOOT_SIGN_KEYNAME` set to "dev".
8475
8476   :term:`UBOOT_SUFFIX`
8477      Points to the generated U-Boot extension. For example, ``u-boot.sb``
8478      has a ``.sb`` extension.
8479
8480      The default U-Boot extension is ``.bin``
8481
8482   :term:`UBOOT_TARGET`
8483      Specifies the target used for building U-Boot. The target is passed
8484      directly as part of the "make" command (e.g. SPL and AIS). If you do
8485      not specifically set this variable, the OpenEmbedded build process
8486      passes and uses "all" for the target during the U-Boot building
8487      process.
8488
8489   :term:`UNKNOWN_CONFIGURE_WHITELIST`
8490      Specifies a list of options that, if reported by the configure script
8491      as being invalid, should not generate a warning during the
8492      :ref:`ref-tasks-configure` task. Normally, invalid
8493      configure options are simply not passed to the configure script (e.g.
8494      should be removed from :term:`EXTRA_OECONF` or
8495      :term:`PACKAGECONFIG_CONFARGS`).
8496      However, common options, for example, exist that are passed to all
8497      configure scripts at a class level that might not be valid for some
8498      configure scripts. It follows that no benefit exists in seeing a
8499      warning about these options. For these cases, the options are added
8500      to ``UNKNOWN_CONFIGURE_WHITELIST``.
8501
8502      The configure arguments check that uses
8503      ``UNKNOWN_CONFIGURE_WHITELIST`` is part of the
8504      :ref:`insane <ref-classes-insane>` class and is only enabled if the
8505      recipe inherits the :ref:`autotools <ref-classes-autotools>` class.
8506
8507   :term:`UPDATERCPN`
8508      For recipes inheriting the
8509      :ref:`update-rc.d <ref-classes-update-rc.d>` class, ``UPDATERCPN``
8510      specifies the package that contains the initscript that is enabled.
8511
8512      The default value is "${PN}". Given that almost all recipes that
8513      install initscripts package them in the main package for the recipe,
8514      you rarely need to set this variable in individual recipes.
8515
8516   :term:`UPSTREAM_CHECK_GITTAGREGEX`
8517      You can perform a per-recipe check for what the latest upstream
8518      source code version is by calling ``bitbake -c checkpkg`` recipe. If
8519      the recipe source code is provided from Git repositories, the
8520      OpenEmbedded build system determines the latest upstream version by
8521      picking the latest tag from the list of all repository tags.
8522
8523      You can use the ``UPSTREAM_CHECK_GITTAGREGEX`` variable to provide a
8524      regular expression to filter only the relevant tags should the
8525      default filter not work correctly.
8526      ::
8527
8528         UPSTREAM_CHECK_GITTAGREGEX = "git_tag_regex"
8529
8530   :term:`UPSTREAM_CHECK_REGEX`
8531      Use the ``UPSTREAM_CHECK_REGEX`` variable to specify a different
8532      regular expression instead of the default one when the package
8533      checking system is parsing the page found using
8534      :term:`UPSTREAM_CHECK_URI`.
8535      ::
8536
8537         UPSTREAM_CHECK_REGEX = "package_regex"
8538
8539   :term:`UPSTREAM_CHECK_URI`
8540      You can perform a per-recipe check for what the latest upstream
8541      source code version is by calling ``bitbake -c checkpkg`` recipe. If
8542      the source code is provided from tarballs, the latest version is
8543      determined by fetching the directory listing where the tarball is and
8544      attempting to find a later tarball. When this approach does not work,
8545      you can use ``UPSTREAM_CHECK_URI`` to provide a different URI that
8546      contains the link to the latest tarball.
8547      ::
8548
8549         UPSTREAM_CHECK_URI = "recipe_url"
8550
8551   :term:`USE_DEVFS`
8552      Determines if ``devtmpfs`` is used for ``/dev`` population. The
8553      default value used for ``USE_DEVFS`` is "1" when no value is
8554      specifically set. Typically, you would set ``USE_DEVFS`` to "0" for a
8555      statically populated ``/dev`` directory.
8556
8557      See the ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:selecting a device manager`" section in
8558      the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual for information on how to
8559      use this variable.
8560
8561   :term:`USE_VT`
8562      When using
8563      :ref:`SysVinit <dev-manual/common-tasks:enabling system services>`,
8564      determines whether or not to run a
8565      `getty <http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Getty_%28Unix%29>`__ on any
8566      virtual terminals in order to enable logging in through those
8567      terminals.
8568
8569      The default value used for ``USE_VT`` is "1" when no default value is
8570      specifically set. Typically, you would set ``USE_VT`` to "0" in the
8571      machine configuration file for machines that do not have a graphical
8572      display attached and therefore do not need virtual terminal
8573      functionality.
8574
8575   :term:`USER_CLASSES`
8576      A list of classes to globally inherit. These classes are used by the
8577      OpenEmbedded build system to enable extra features (e.g.
8578      ``buildstats``, ``image-mklibs``, and so forth).
8579
8580      The default list is set in your ``local.conf`` file:
8581      ::
8582
8583         USER_CLASSES ?= "buildstats image-mklibs image-prelink"
8584
8585      For more information, see
8586      ``meta-poky/conf/local.conf.sample`` in the :term:`Source Directory`.
8587
8588   :term:`USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC`
8589      If set to ``error``, forces the OpenEmbedded build system to produce
8590      an error if the user identification (``uid``) and group
8591      identification (``gid``) values are not defined in any of the files
8592      listed in :term:`USERADD_UID_TABLES` and
8593      :term:`USERADD_GID_TABLES`. If set to
8594      ``warn``, a warning will be issued instead.
8595
8596      The default behavior for the build system is to dynamically apply
8597      ``uid`` and ``gid`` values. Consequently, the
8598      ``USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC`` variable is by default not set. If you plan
8599      on using statically assigned ``gid`` and ``uid`` values, you should
8600      set the ``USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC`` variable in your ``local.conf``
8601      file as follows:
8602      ::
8603
8604         USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC = "error"
8605
8606      Overriding the
8607      default behavior implies you are going to also take steps to set
8608      static ``uid`` and ``gid`` values through use of the
8609      :term:`USERADDEXTENSION`,
8610      :term:`USERADD_UID_TABLES`, and
8611      :term:`USERADD_GID_TABLES` variables.
8612
8613      .. note::
8614
8615         There is a difference in behavior between setting
8616         ``USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC`` to ``error`` and setting it to ``warn``.
8617         When it is set to ``warn``, the build system will report a warning for
8618         every undefined ``uid`` and ``gid`` in any recipe. But when it is set
8619         to ``error``, it will only report errors for recipes that are actually
8620         built.
8621         This saves you from having to add static IDs for recipes that you
8622         know will never be built.
8623
8624   :term:`USERADD_GID_TABLES`
8625      Specifies a password file to use for obtaining static group
8626      identification (``gid``) values when the OpenEmbedded build system
8627      adds a group to the system during package installation.
8628
8629      When applying static group identification (``gid``) values, the
8630      OpenEmbedded build system looks in :term:`BBPATH` for a
8631      ``files/group`` file and then applies those ``uid`` values. Set the
8632      variable as follows in your ``local.conf`` file:
8633      ::
8634
8635
8636         USERADD_GID_TABLES = "files/group"
8637
8638      .. note::
8639
8640         Setting the :term:`USERADDEXTENSION` variable to "useradd-staticids"
8641         causes the build system to use static ``gid`` values.
8642
8643   :term:`USERADD_PACKAGES`
8644      When inheriting the :ref:`useradd <ref-classes-useradd>` class,
8645      this variable specifies the individual packages within the recipe
8646      that require users and/or groups to be added.
8647
8648      You must set this variable if the recipe inherits the class. For
8649      example, the following enables adding a user for the main package in
8650      a recipe:
8651      ::
8652
8653         USERADD_PACKAGES = "${PN}"
8654
8655      .. note::
8656
8657         It follows that if you are going to use the ``USERADD_PACKAGES``
8658         variable, you need to set one or more of the :term:`USERADD_PARAM`,
8659         :term:`GROUPADD_PARAM`, or :term:`GROUPMEMS_PARAM` variables.
8660
8661   :term:`USERADD_PARAM`
8662      When inheriting the :ref:`useradd <ref-classes-useradd>` class,
8663      this variable specifies for a package what parameters should pass to
8664      the ``useradd`` command if you add a user to the system when the
8665      package is installed.
8666
8667      Here is an example from the ``dbus`` recipe:
8668      ::
8669
8670         USERADD_PARAM_${PN} = "--system --home ${localstatedir}/lib/dbus \
8671                                --no-create-home --shell /bin/false \
8672                                --user-group messagebus"
8673
8674      For information on the
8675      standard Linux shell command ``useradd``, see
8676      http://linux.die.net/man/8/useradd.
8677
8678   :term:`USERADD_UID_TABLES`
8679      Specifies a password file to use for obtaining static user
8680      identification (``uid``) values when the OpenEmbedded build system
8681      adds a user to the system during package installation.
8682
8683      When applying static user identification (``uid``) values, the
8684      OpenEmbedded build system looks in :term:`BBPATH` for a
8685      ``files/passwd`` file and then applies those ``uid`` values. Set the
8686      variable as follows in your ``local.conf`` file:
8687      ::
8688
8689         USERADD_UID_TABLES = "files/passwd"
8690
8691      .. note::
8692
8693         Setting the :term:`USERADDEXTENSION` variable to "useradd-staticids"
8694         causes the build system to use static ``uid`` values.
8695
8696   :term:`USERADDEXTENSION`
8697      When set to "useradd-staticids", causes the OpenEmbedded build system
8698      to base all user and group additions on a static ``passwd`` and
8699      ``group`` files found in :term:`BBPATH`.
8700
8701      To use static user identification (``uid``) and group identification
8702      (``gid``) values, set the variable as follows in your ``local.conf``
8703      file: USERADDEXTENSION = "useradd-staticids"
8704
8705      .. note::
8706
8707         Setting this variable to use static ``uid`` and ``gid``
8708         values causes the OpenEmbedded build system to employ the
8709         :ref:`ref-classes-useradd` class.
8710
8711      If you use static ``uid`` and ``gid`` information, you must also
8712      specify the ``files/passwd`` and ``files/group`` files by setting the
8713      :term:`USERADD_UID_TABLES` and
8714      :term:`USERADD_GID_TABLES` variables.
8715      Additionally, you should also set the
8716      :term:`USERADD_ERROR_DYNAMIC` variable.
8717
8718   :term:`VOLATILE_LOG_DIR`
8719      Specifies the persistence of the target's ``/var/log`` directory,
8720      which is used to house postinstall target log files.
8721
8722      By default, ``VOLATILE_LOG_DIR`` is set to "yes", which means the
8723      file is not persistent. You can override this setting by setting the
8724      variable to "no" to make the log directory persistent.
8725
8726   :term:`WARN_QA`
8727      Specifies the quality assurance checks whose failures are reported as
8728      warnings by the OpenEmbedded build system. You set this variable in
8729      your distribution configuration file. For a list of the checks you
8730      can control with this variable, see the
8731      ":ref:`insane.bbclass <ref-classes-insane>`" section.
8732
8733   :term:`WKS_FILE`
8734      Specifies the location of the Wic kickstart file that is used by the
8735      OpenEmbedded build system to create a partitioned image
8736      (image\ ``.wic``). For information on how to create a partitioned
8737      image, see the
8738      ":ref:`dev-manual/common-tasks:creating partitioned images using wic`"
8739      section in the Yocto Project Development Tasks Manual. For details on
8740      the kickstart file format, see the ":doc:`/ref-manual/kickstart`" Chapter.
8741
8742   :term:`WKS_FILE_DEPENDS`
8743      When placed in the recipe that builds your image, this variable lists
8744      build-time dependencies. The ``WKS_FILE_DEPENDS`` variable is only
8745      applicable when Wic images are active (i.e. when
8746      :term:`IMAGE_FSTYPES` contains entries related
8747      to Wic). If your recipe does not create Wic images, the variable has
8748      no effect.
8749
8750      The ``WKS_FILE_DEPENDS`` variable is similar to the
8751      :term:`DEPENDS` variable. When you use the variable in
8752      your recipe that builds the Wic image, dependencies you list in the
8753      ``WIC_FILE_DEPENDS`` variable are added to the ``DEPENDS`` variable.
8754
8755      With the ``WKS_FILE_DEPENDS`` variable, you have the possibility to
8756      specify a list of additional dependencies (e.g. native tools,
8757      bootloaders, and so forth), that are required to build Wic images.
8758      Following is an example:
8759      ::
8760
8761         WKS_FILE_DEPENDS = "some-native-tool"
8762
8763      In the
8764      previous example, some-native-tool would be replaced with an actual
8765      native tool on which the build would depend.
8766
8767   :term:`WORKDIR`
8768      The pathname of the work directory in which the OpenEmbedded build
8769      system builds a recipe. This directory is located within the
8770      :term:`TMPDIR` directory structure and is specific to
8771      the recipe being built and the system for which it is being built.
8772
8773      The ``WORKDIR`` directory is defined as follows:
8774      ::
8775
8776         ${TMPDIR}/work/${MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS}/${PN}/${EXTENDPE}${PV}-${PR}
8777
8778      The actual directory depends on several things:
8779
8780      -  :term:`TMPDIR`: The top-level build output directory
8781      -  :term:`MULTIMACH_TARGET_SYS`: The target system identifier
8782      -  :term:`PN`: The recipe name
8783      -  :term:`EXTENDPE`: The epoch - (if :term:`PE` is not specified, which
8784         is usually the case for most recipes, then `EXTENDPE` is blank)
8785      -  :term:`PV`: The recipe version
8786      -  :term:`PR`: The recipe revision
8787
8788      As an example, assume a Source Directory top-level folder name
8789      ``poky``, a default Build Directory at ``poky/build``, and a
8790      ``qemux86-poky-linux`` machine target system. Furthermore, suppose
8791      your recipe is named ``foo_1.3.0-r0.bb``. In this case, the work
8792      directory the build system uses to build the package would be as
8793      follows:
8794      ::
8795
8796         poky/build/tmp/work/qemux86-poky-linux/foo/1.3.0-r0
8797
8798   :term:`XSERVER`
8799      Specifies the packages that should be installed to provide an X
8800      server and drivers for the current machine, assuming your image
8801      directly includes ``packagegroup-core-x11-xserver`` or, perhaps
8802      indirectly, includes "x11-base" in
8803      :term:`IMAGE_FEATURES`.
8804
8805      The default value of ``XSERVER``, if not specified in the machine
8806      configuration, is "xserver-xorg xf86-video-fbdev xf86-input-evdev".
8807
8808